<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><rss version="2.0"
	xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/"
	xmlns:wfw="http://wellformedweb.org/CommentAPI/"
	xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"
	xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom"
	xmlns:sy="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/syndication/"
	xmlns:slash="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/slash/"
	>

<channel>
	<title>KitchenAid &#8211; UseManuals</title>
	<atom:link href="http://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/feed/" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml" />
	<link>https://usemanuals.com</link>
	<description>Owner&#039;s manuals for all sorts of products</description>
	<lastBuildDate>Wed, 23 Aug 2023 05:09:25 +0000</lastBuildDate>
	<language>en-US</language>
	<sy:updatePeriod>
	hourly	</sy:updatePeriod>
	<sy:updateFrequency>
	1	</sy:updateFrequency>
	<generator>https://wordpress.org/?v=6.7.2</generator>

<image>
	<url>https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/02/favicon-32x32-2.png</url>
	<title>KitchenAid &#8211; UseManuals</title>
	<link>https://usemanuals.com</link>
	<width>32</width>
	<height>32</height>
</image> 
	<item>
		<title>KitchenAid W10758300B Built-In Electric Single and Double Oven Manual</title>
		<link>https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/w10758300b-oven/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[ItsManual]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Fri, 23 Jun 2023 08:38:10 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[KitchenAid]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://usemanuals.com/?p=114156</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[KitchenAid W10758300B Built-In Electric Single and Double Oven Instruction Manual THANK YOU for purchasing this high-quality product. Register your new oven at www.kitchenaid.com. In Canada, register your oven at www.kitchenaid.ca. For future reference, please make a note of your product model and serial numbers. These can be located on the lower right-hand side of the oven frame inside the oven door. Model Number__________________________________________ Serial Number ___________________________________________ OVEN SAFETY Your safety and the safety of others are very important.  We have provided many important safety messages in this manual and on your appliance. Always read and obey all safety messages. This is the safety alert symbol. This symbol alerts you to potential hazards that can kill or hurt you and others. All safety messages will follow the safety alert symbol and either the word “DANGER” or “WARNING.” These words mean: DANGER: You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t immediately  follow instructions. WARNING: You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t follow  instructions All safety messages will tell you what the potential hazard is, tell you how to reduce the chance of injury, and tell you what can happen if the instructions are not followed. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, injury to persons, or damage when using the oven, follow basic precautions, including the following: Proper Installation – Be sure the oven is properly installed and grounded by a qualified technician. Never Use the Oven for Warming or Heating the Room. Do Not Leave Children Alone – Children should not be left alone or unattended in area where oven is in use. They should never be allowed to sit or stand on any part of the oven. Wear Proper Apparel – Loose-fitting or hanging garments should never be worn while using the oven. User Servicing – Do not repair or replace any part of the oven unless specifically recommended in the manual. All other servicing should be referred to a qualified technician. Storage in Oven – Flammable materials should not be stored in an oven. Do Not Use Water on Grease Fires – Smother fire or flame or use dry chemical or foam-type extinguisher. Use Only Dry Potholders – Moist or damp potholders on hot surfaces may result in burns from steam. Do not let potholder touch hot heating elements. Do not use a towel or other bulky cloth. Use Care When Opening Door – Let hot air or steam escape before removing or replacing food. Do Not Heat Unopened Food Containers – Build-up of pressure may cause container to burst and result in injury Keep Oven Vent Ducts Unobstructed. Placement of Oven Racks – Always place oven racks in desired location while oven is cool. If rack must be moved while oven is hot, do not let potholder contact hot heating element in oven. DO NOT TOUCH HEATING ELEMENTS OR INTERIOR SURFACES OF OVEN – Heating elements may be hot even though they are dark in color. Interior surfaces of an oven become hot enough to cause burns. During and after use, do not touch, or let clothing or other flammable materials contact heating elements or interior surfaces of oven until they have had sufficient time to cool. Other surfaces of the oven may become hot enough to cause burns – among these surfaces are oven vent openings and surfaces near these openings, oven doors, and windows of oven doors. For self-cleaning ovens: Do Not Clean Gasket – The gasket is essential for a good seal. Care should be taken not to rub, damage, or move the gasket. Do Not Use Oven Cleaners – No commercial oven cleaneror oven liner protective coating of any kind should be used in or around any part of the oven. Clean Only Parts Listed in Manual. Before Self-Cleaning the Oven – Remove broiler pan and other utensils. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS  State of California Proposition 65 Warnings: WARNING: This product contains one or more chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. WARNING: This product contains one or more chemicals known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm FEATURE GUIDE This manual covers several models. Your model may have some or all of the items listed. Refer to this manual or Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) section of our website at www.kitchenaid.com for more detailed instructions. In Canada, reference the Customer  Service section at www.kitchenaid.ca. WARNING: Food Poisoning Hazard Do not let food sit in oven more than one hour before or after cooking. Doing so can result in food poisoning or sickness. KEYPAD FEATURE INSTRUCTIONS CLOCK/TOOLS Clock This clock can use a 12- or 24-hour cycle. See “Electronic Oven Controls” section. 1.    Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “Clock” is displayed. 2.    Press the number keypads to set the time of day. 3.    Press START. CLOCK/TOOLS Oven use functions Enables you to personalize the audible tones and oven operation to suit your needs. See the “Oven Use” section. OVEN LIGHT Oven cavity light While the oven door(s) are closed, press OVEN LIGHT to turn the lights on and off. The oven lights will come on when an oven door is opened. TIMER SET/OFF Oven timer The Timer can be set in hours or minutes up to 9 hours and 59 minutes. 1.    Press TIMER SET/OFF. 2.    Press the number keypads to set the length of time in hr-min. Leading zeros do not have to be entered. For example, for 2 minutes, enter “2.” 3.    Press TIMER SET/OFF to begin the countdown. If enabled, timer tone(s) will sound at the end of countdown. 4.    Press TIMER SET/OFF to cancel the Timer and return to the time of day. Do not press the Cancel keypad because the oven will turn off. START Cooking start The Start keypad begins any oven function. If Start is not pressed within 2 minutes after pressing a keypad, the function is canceled and the time of day is displayed. CANCEL Oven function The Cancel keypad stops any oven function except the Clock, Timer and Control Lock in the selected oven. BAKE Baking and roasting 1.    Press BAKE for the desired oven. 2.    Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will be displayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range. 3.    Press START for the selected oven. 4.    To change the temperature when one oven is in use, repeat steps 2 and 3. To change the temperature when two ovens are in use, press “1” for the upper oven or press “2” for the lower oven, and then repeat steps 2 and 3. 5.    Press CANCEL for the selected oven when finished. BROIL Broiling 1.    Press BROIL for the desired oven. 2.    Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will be displayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range. 3.    Press START for the selected oven, and then allow the oven to preheat for 2 minutes. 4.    Position the cookware in the oven and close the door. 5.    To change the temperature when one oven is in use, repeat steps 2 and 3. To change the temperature when two ovens are in use, press “1” for the upper oven or press “2” for the lower oven, and then repeat steps 2 and 3. 6.    Press CANCEL for the selected oven when finished. CONVECT MODES (Single or upper oven only) Convection cooking 1.    Press CONVECT MODES until the desired mode is displayed. 2.    Press START for the desired oven. 3.    Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will be displayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range. 4.    Press START for the selected oven. 5.    To change the temperature, repeat steps 3 and 4. 6.    Press CANCEL for the selected oven when finished. PROOF Proofing bread 1.    Press PROOF until the desired proof is displayed (“Standard Proof” or “Rapid Proof”). NOTE: “Rapid” operates at a slightly higher temperature for second rise of formed dough. 2.    Press START for the selected oven. Let the dough rise until nearly doubled in size. Proofing time may vary depending on dough type and quantity. 3.    Press CANCEL for the selected oven when finished proofing. Refer to the “Proofing Bread” section for more information. DELAY START Delayed start The Delay Start keypad is used to enter the starting time for an oven function with a delayed start. Delay Start should not be used for foods such as breads and cakes because they may not bake properly. To set a Timed Cook or a Delayed Timed Cook, see the “Cook Time” section. COOK TIME Timed cooking Cook Time allows the oven to be set to turn on at a certain time of day, cook for a set length of time, and/or shut off automatically. To set a Timed Cook or a Delayed Timed Cook, see the “Cook Time” section. SELF CLEAN Self-clean cycle See the “Self-Clean Cycle” section. START/START LOWER CONTROL LOCK hold 3 sec. Oven control lockout 1.    Check that the ovens and timers are off. 2.    Press and hold START or START LOWER for 3 seconds. 3.    If enabled, a tone will sound, and “CONTROL LOCKED” will be displayed. 4.    Repeat to unlock. No keypads will function with the controls locked. OVEN USE Odors and smoke are normal when the oven is used the first few times or when it is heavily soiled. IMPORTANT: The health of some birds is extremely sensitive to the fumes given off. Exposure to the fumes may result in death to certain birds. Always move birds to another closed and well ventilated room. Electronic Oven Controls  Control Display  The display will light up when first powered up or after a power loss. When oven is not in use, the time of day is displayed. Tones Tones are audible signals, indicating the following: One Tone  Valid keypad press. Oven is preheated (long tone). Kitchen timer (long tone with reminder tone every 60 seconds). Function has been entered. Three Tones  Invalid keypad press. Four Tones  End of cycle (with reminder tone every 60 seconds). Use the Clock/Tools keypad to change the tone settings. Tools Many features of the oven control can be adjusted to meet your personal needs. These changes are made using the Clock/Tools keypad. Use the Clock/Tools keypad to scroll through the features that can be changed. Each press of the Clock/Tools keypad will advance the display to the next setting. After selecting the feature to be changed, the control will prompt you for the required input. Details of all of the feature changes are explained in the following sections. Press CANCEL to exit Tools. Fahrenheit and Celsius  The temperature is preset to Fahrenheit, but can be changed to Celsius. Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “TEMP UNIT” is displayed. The current setting will be displayed. Press the “1” keypad to adjust the setting. Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day. Audible Tones Disable  Turns off all tones, including the end of cycle tone and key press tones. Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “SOUND” is displayed. The current setting will be displayed. Press the “1” keypad to adjust the setting. Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day Sound Volume  Sets the pitch of the tone to either high or low. Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “SOUND VOLUME” is displayed. The current setting will be displayed. Press the “1” keypad to adjust the setting. Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day End of Cycle Tone  Activates or turns off the tones that sound at the end of a cycle. Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “END TONE” is displayed. The current setting will be displayed. Press the “1” keypad to adjust the setting. Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day Key Press Tones  Activates or turns off the tones when a keypad is pressed. Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “KEYPRESS TONE” is displayed. The current setting will be displayed. Press the “1” keypad to adjust the setting. Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day. Reminder Tones Disable  Turns off the short repeating tone that sounds every 1 minute after the end of cycle tones. Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “REMINDER TONE” is displayed. The current setting will be displayed. Press the “1” keypad to adjust the setting. Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day 12/24 Hour Clock Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “12/24 HOUR” is displayed. The current setting will be displayed. Press the “1” keypad to adjust the setting. Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day Demo Mode  IMPORTANT: This feature is intended for use on the sales floor with 120V power connection and permits the control features to be demonstrated without heating elements turning on. If this feature is activated, the oven will not work. Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “DEMO MODE” is displayed. The current setting will be displayed. Press the “1” keypad to adjust the setting. Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day 12-Hour Shutoff  The oven control is set to automatically shut off the oven 12 hours after the oven initiates a cook or clean function. This will not interfere with any timed or delay cook functions Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “12 HR AUTO OFF” is displayed. The current setting will be displayed. Press the “1” keypad to adjust the setting. Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day. Languages – Scrolling Display Text  Language options are English, Spanish and French. Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “LANGUAGE” is displayed. The current setting will be displayed. Press the number keypad as instructed by the scrolling text to select the new language. Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day Oven Temperature Offset Control  IMPORTANT: Do not use a thermometer to measure oven temperature. Elements will cycle on and off as needed to provide  consistent temperature, but they may run slightly hot or cool at any point in time due to this cycling. Most thermometers are slow to react to temperature change and will not provide an accurate reading due to this cycling. The oven provides accurate temperatures; however, it may cook faster or slower than your previous oven, so the temperature can be adjusted to personalize it for your cooking needs. It can be changed to Fahrenheit or Celsius. To Adjust Oven Temperature:  Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “TEMP CALIB” is displayed. The current setting will be displayed. For double ovens only: Press the “1” keypad to toggle between the upper and lower ovens. Press START for the selected oven to select the choice displayed in Step 2. Wait several seconds for the display to change or press START for the selected oven, and then continue with Step 4. Press the “3” keypad to increase the temperature in 5°F (3°C) increments, or press the “6” keypad to decrease the temperature in 5°F (3°C) increments. The range is from -30°F to +30°F (-18°C to +18°C). Press START. Press CANCEL for the selected oven to exit and display the time of day. Sabbath Mode The Sabbath Mode sets the oven to remain on in a bake setting until turned off. When the Sabbath Mode is set, only the Bake cycle will operate. Al  other cooking and cleaning cycles are disabled. No tones will sound, and the displays will not indicate temperature changes. When the oven door is opened or closed, the oven light will not turn on or off, and the heating elements will not turn on or off immediately. To Enable Sabbath Mode Capability (One Time Only):  Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “SABBATH” is displayed. Press the “1” keypad. Sabbath Mode can be activated for baking. Press CANCEL to save the setting and exit to display the time of day. NOTE: To disable the Sabbath Mode, repeat steps 1 through 3 to change the status from “SABBATH ON” to “SABBATH OFF.” To Activate Sabbath Mode:  Press BAKE for the desired oven. Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will be displayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range. Press START for the selected oven. For timed cooking in Sabbath Mode, press COOK TIME, and then press the number keypads to set the desired cook time. Press START for the selected oven. (Optional) If Sabbath Mode is to be used for both ovens, repeat steps 1 through 3 for the second oven. Press CLOCK/TOOLS. Three tones will sound. Then press “7.” “SAb” will appear in the display To Adjust Temperature (when Sabbath Mode is running in only one oven): Press the number keypad as instructed by the scrolling text to select the new temperature. NOTE: The temperature adjustment will not appear on the display, and no tones will sound. The scrolling text will be shown on the display as it was before the keypad was pressed. Press START for the selected oven. To Adjust Temperature (when Sabbath Mode is running in both ovens): Press BAKE for the desired oven. Press the number keypad as instructed by the scrolling text to select the new temperature. NOTE: The temperature adjustment will not appear on the display, and no tones will sound. The scrolling text will be shown on the display as it was before the keypad was pressed. 3. Press START for the selected oven. To Deactivate Sabbath Mode:  Press CLOCK/TOOLS, and then press “7” to return to regular baking, or press CANCEL for the desired oven to turn off the oven(s) Aluminum Foil IMPORTANT: To avoid permanent damage to the oven bottom finish, do not line the oven bottom with any type of foil or liner. For best cooking results, do not cover entire oven rack with foil because air must be able to move freely. Positioning Racks and Bakeware IMPORTANT: To avoid permanent damage to the porcelain finish, do not place food or bakeware directly on the oven door or bottom. Racks Position racks before turning on the oven. Do not position racks with bakeware on them. Make sure racks are level. Place food so it will not rise into the broil element. Allow at least ¹⁄₂” (1.3 cm) between pans and the broil element. To move a rack, pull it out to the stop position, raise the front edge, and then lift it out. Use the following illustrations and charts as a guide for positioning racks. Rack Positions Broiling Food Rack Position Broiled meats, poultry, fish 4 Broiling/searing meats, hamburgers, steaks 5 Baking Food Rack Position Large roasts, roasted meats or poultry 1 or 2 Most baked goods, casseroles 2 or 3 Baking Layer Cakes on 1 Rack  Place the cakes on the rack as shown. Multiple Rack Cooking  2-rack: Use rack positions 2 and 4 for regular baking. 2-rack (convection only): Use rack positions 2 and 4 for convection baking. Baking Layer Cakes on 2 Racks  For best results when baking cakes on 2 racks, use rack positions 2 and 4 with the Convection Bake function. Place the cakes on the racks as shown. Baking Cookies on 2 Racks  For best results when baking cookies on 2 racks, use rack positions 2 and 4 with the Convection Bake function. Bakeware To cook food evenly, hot air must be able to circulate. Allow 2″ (5.0 cm) of space around bakeware and oven walls. Use the following chart as a guide. Number of Pan(s) Position on Rack 1 Center of rack. 2 Side by side. 3 or 4 Refer to the previous illustration. NOTE: Bakeware materials and color may affect results. Dark, dull, non-stick or glass pans may require shorter baking times, in contrast insulated or stainless steel pans may require longer baking times. Follow bakeware manufacturer’s recommendations. Baking Stone The Baking Stone is ideal for baking and reheating. Because the Baking Stone absorbs excess moisture, heat is concentrated for crispier pizza and more thorough baking of bread and cookies. It is oven safe to 550°F (288°C). For Best Results:  Place Baking Stone centered on Rack 1. Use a regular bake cycle. Avoid clustering food on the Baking Stone. You may use parchment paper with the Baking Stone to aid in removing food. For best bottom browning, preheat oven with Baking Stone prior to use. Preheating with the Baking Stone may take longer than usual. Thaw frozen foods in the refrigerator prior to baking. Refrigerated food can be placed directly in the oven after it is preheated. Not intended for multi-rack baking. Follow recipe temperature and baking time. Short baking times may need an extra 1-2 minutes. Tips for Use:  Always use a heat-resistant oven mitt or pad when handling. Seasoning is not needed. The stone will discolor with age. This will enhance the performance. Avoid placing any other pan or rack on top of the Baking Stone. Baking Stone is metal utensil safe. When placing Baking Stone on a surface, first cover surface with a sturdy material to avoid scratches. To Avoid Damage to Your Stone:  Avoid extreme temperature changes. Do not use Baking Stone if damaged or chipped. Do not use on a direct heat source or under a broiler. Do not touch the closed oven door or sides of oven with Baking Stone. Avoid bumping or dropping the Baking Stone, which can break. Oven Vent(s) Single and Double Oven A. Control panel B. Oven vent C. Single oven or upper double oven G. Bottom vent Double Oven  D. Upper oven E. Oven vent F. Lower oven G. Bottom vent The oven vent(s) should not be blocked or covered since they allow the inlet of fresh air into the cooling system. Also, the bottom vent should not be blocked or covered since it allows the inlet of fresh air into the cooling system and the outlet of hot air from the cooling system. Blocking or covering vents will cause poor air circulation, affecting cooking, cleaning and cooling results. Baking and Roasting Preheating When beginning a Bake, Convect Bake or Convect Roast cycle, the oven will begin preheating after Start is pressed. The oven will take approximately 13 to 19 minutes to reach 350°F (177°C) with all of the oven racks provided with your oven inside the oven cavity. Higher temperatures will take longer to preheat. The preheat cycle rapidly increases the oven temperature. The actual oven temperature will go above your set temperature to offset the heat lost when your oven door is opened to insert food. This ensures that when you place your food in the oven, the oven will begin at the proper temperature. Insert your food when the preheat tone sounds. Do not open the door during preheat before the tone sounds. Oven Temperature  While in use, the oven elements will cycle on and off as needed to maintain a consistent temperature, but they may run slightly hot or cool at any point in time due to this cycling. Opening the oven door while in use will release the hot air and cool the oven which could impact the cooking time and performance. It is recommended to use the oven light to monitor cooking progress. NOTE: On models with convection, the convection fan may run in the non-convection bake mode to improve oven performance. Before baking and roasting, position racks according to the “Positioning Racks and Bakeware” section. When roasting, it is not necessary to wait for the oven preheat cycle to end before putting food in unless it is recommended in the recipe. Broiling When broiling, preheat the oven for 2 minutes before putting food in unless recommended otherwise in the recipe. Position food on grid in a broiler pan, and then place it in the center of the oven rack. Close the oven door to ensure proper broiling temperature. NOTE: Odors and smoke are normal the first few times the oven is used or if the oven is heavily soiled. Changing the temperature when broiling allows more precise control when cooking. The lower the broil setting, the slower the cooking. Thicker cuts and unevenly shaped pieces of meat, fish and poultry may cook better at lower broil settings. Place the food in the upper or lower oven. Refer to the “Positioning Racks and Bakeware” section for more information. On lower settings, the broil element will cycle on and off to maintain the proper temperature. For best results, use a broiler pan and grid. It is designed todrain juices and help avoid spatter and smoke. If you would like to purchase a broiler pan, one may be ordered. Please refer to the “Accessories” section for more information. Convection Cooking – Upper Oven Only During convection cooking, the fan provides hot air circulation throughout the oven. The movement of heated air around the food can help to speed up cooking by penetrating the cooler outer surfaces. Food cooks more evenly, browning and crisping outer surfaces while sealing moisture inside. During the Convect function, the ring element, bake and broil elements, and the fan operate to heat the oven cavity. If the oven door is opened during convection cooking or preheating, the fan turns off immediately and the element(s) will turn off after 30 seconds. Once the door is closed, the element(s) will turn back on. NOTE: It is normal for the convection fan to run during non convection cycles as well as during preheat. It is important not to cover foods so that surface areas remain exposed to the circulating air, allowing browning and crisping. Keep heat loss to a minimum by only opening the oven door when necessary. It is recommended to use the oven light to monitor cooking progress. Choose cookie sheets without sides and roasting pans with lower sides to allow air to move freely around the food. Test baked goods for doneness a few minutes before the minimum cooking time with a method such as a toothpick. Use a meat thermometer to determine the doneness of meats and poultry. Check the temperature of pork and poultry in 2 or 3 different places, including the thickest part. Before convection cooking, position the rack(s) according to the “Positioning Racks and Bakeware” section. When using more than one rack, position bakeware/cookware on the racks to allow movement of the fan circulated air around the food. See the “Positioning Racks and Bakeware” section. If the oven is full, extra cooking time may be needed. For optimal cooking results, do not cover food. When roasting poultry and meat, use a broiler pan and grid. It is not necessary to wait for the oven to preheat, unless recommended in the recipe. To order a broiler pan, see the “Assistance or Service” section. A. Broiler grid B. Broiler pan  Convection Baking  Use Convect Bake for single or multiple rack baking. When convection baking, reduce your recipe baking temperature by 25°F (15°C) To Set Convect Bake:  Press CONVECT MODES until “CONVECT BAKE” is displayed. Press START for the selected oven. Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will be displayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range. Press START for the selected oven. The oven will begin preheating. There are two preheat modes on Convect Bake function. Use Rapid Preheating when using a single rack only, and use the standard Preheating when using multiple racks. It is possible to switch between “Rapid Preheating” and “Preheating” by pressing Start for the selected oven during the preheating. Place the food in the oven and close the oven door when preheat is completed. Press CANCEL for the selected oven when finished. Remove food from the oven. NOTE: The temperature may be changed at any time by pressing the number keypads to enter the desired temperature and then pressing Start for the selected oven. Changing the temperature once food is placed in the oven could affect the performance. Convection Broil  The oven door must be closed when using Convect Broil. It is not necessary to preheat the oven for Convect Broil. Place the food in the oven and close the oven door. Press CONVECT MODES until “CONVECT BROIL” is displayed. Press START for the selected oven. Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will be displayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range. Press START for the selected oven. Press CANCEL for the selected oven when finished. Remove food from the oven. Convection Roasting  When convection roasting, enter your normal roasting temperature. The roasting time should be 15-30% less than in conventional cooking. It is not necessary to preheat the oven for Convect Roast. Place the food in the oven and close the oven door. Press CONVECT MODES until “CONVECT ROAST” is displayed. Press START for the selected oven. Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will be displayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range. Press START for the selected oven. Press CANCEL for the selected oven when finished. Remove food from the oven. NOTE: The temperature may be changed at any time by pressing the number keypads to enter the desired temperature and then pressing Start for the selected oven. Changing the temperature once food is placed in the oven could affect the performance. Convection Recipe  When using Convection Recipe, enter your normal cooking temperature. The oven door must be closed when using Convection Recipe. It is not necessary to preheat the oven for Convection Recipe MEAT option. For Convection Recipe MEAT only: Place food in the oven and close the oven door. Press CONVECT MODES until “CONVECT RECIPE” is displayed. Press START. Press CONVECT MODES to cycle between the options. Press START to select the displayed option. Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will be displayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range. Press the number keypads to enter the desired cook time, and then press START. For MEAT and OTHERS options only: The cook time will automatically be adjusted to 80% of the time entered, and the adjusted cook time will appear on the display, but temperature will not be adjusted. NOTE: Preheating can cause overcooking. If preheat is required for the recipe, add 15 minutes to the cook time. Place food in the oven at appropriate time. For BAKED FOODS and OTHERS options only: The preheating will start and once complete the unit will sound a tone. Place the food in the oven and close the oven door. At the end of the cooking time set, the oven will turn off automatically, the end of cycle tone will sound and “Cooking Complete” will appear in the text area. It’s also possible to press CANCEL to finish the cycle. Remove food from the oven. Proofing Bread Proofing bread prepares the dough for baking by activating the yeast. Follow the recipe directions as a guide. Standard Proof should be used for fresh dough, thawed dough, and for the first and second rise. Rapid Proof (on some models) operates at a slightly higher temperature than Standard Proof, and it can be used for the second rise of formed dough. To Proof:  Before first proofing, place the dough in a lightly greased bowl and cover loosely with wax paper, coated with shortening. Place in position 2, and then close the oven door. Press PROOF for the desired oven until the desired proof is displayed (“Standrd” or “Rapid”). Press START for the selected oven. Let the dough rise until nearly doubled in size. Proofing time may vary depending on dough type and quantity. Press CANCEL for the selected oven when finished proofing. Before second proofing, shape the dough, place it in baking pan(s) and then cover loosely. Follow the same placement and control steps above. Before baking, remove the cover. NOTE: If the oven temperature is greater than 110°F (43°C), the display will indicate “Oven Cooling” until the temperature is below 110°F (43°C) Cook Time WARNING: Food Poisoning Hazard Do not let food sit in oven more than one hour before or after cooking. Doing so can result in food poisoning or sickness. To Set a Timed Cook:  Press the keypad for any cooking function except Broil, Convect Broil or Proof. Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will be displayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range. Press COOK TIME. Press the number keypads to enter the length of time to cook. Press START for the selected oven. The display will count down the time. When the time ends, the oven will shut off automatically. The temperature and/or time setting can be changed at any time by repeating steps 2 through 5. Press CANCEL for the selected oven to clear the display. To Set a Delayed Timed Cook:  Press DELAY START. For double ovens only: Press the number “1” or “2” keypad to select the desired oven. Press the number keypads to enter the number of hours and/or minutes you want to delay the start time. Press the keypad for any cooking function except Broil, Convect Broil or Proof. Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will bedisplayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range. Press START for the selected oven or COOK TIME. Press the number keypads to enter the length of time to cook. Press START for the selected oven. When the start time is reached, the oven will automatically turn on. The temperature and/or time settings can be changed after the delay countdown by repeating steps 1 through 7. When resetting the time and temperature, it is necessary to press Start for the selected oven between steps 4 and 5 to continue making changes. When the set cook time ends, the oven will shut off automatically. Press CANCEL for the selected oven to clear the display. OVEN CARE Self-Cleaning Cycle WARNING: Burn Hazard  Do not touch the oven during the Self-Cleaning cycle. Keep children away from oven during Self-Cleaning cycle. Failure to follow these instructions can result in burns. IMPORTANT: The health of some birds is extremely sensitive to the fumes given off during the Self-Cleaning cycle. Exposure to the fumes may result in death to certain birds. Always move birds to another closed and well-ventilated room. Keep the kitchen well-ventilated during the Self-Cleaning cycle to help get rid of heat, odors and smoke. Do not block the oven vent(s) during the Self-Cleaning cycle. Air must be able to move freely. Depending on your model, see “Oven Vent” or “Oven Vents” section. Do not clean, rub, damage or move the oven door gasket. Prepare Oven:  Remove the broiler pan, grid, cookware and bakeware, all cooking utensils, oven racks and aluminum foil and, on some models, the temperature probe from the oven. Use a damp cloth to clean inside door edge and the 1½” (38 mm) area around the inside oven cavity frame, being certain not to move or bend the gasket. Wipe out any loose soil to reduce smoke and avoid damage. At high temperatures, foods react with porcelain. Staining, etching, pitting or faint white spots can result. This will not affect cooking performance. IMPORTANT Oven temperature must be below 500°F (260°C) to program a clean cycle. For double ovens only: Only 1 oven can be cleaned at a time. For double ovens only: Both oven doors will lock when either oven is running the Self-Cleaning cycle. How the Cycle Works  IMPORTANT: The heating and cooling of porcelain on steel in theoven may result in discoloring, loss of gloss, hairline cracks and popping sounds. The Self-Cleaning cycle uses very high temperatures, burning soil to a powdery ash. Once the oven has completely cooled, remove ash with a damp cloth. To avoid breaking the glass, do not apply a cool damp cloth to the inner door glass before it has completely cooled. The oven light will not work during the Self-Cleaning cycle. To stop the Self-Cleaning cycle at anytime, press CANCEL for the selected oven. If the temperature is too high, the oven doors will remain locked. When “LOCK” shows in the display, the doors of the oven cannot be opened. To avoid damage to the doors, do not force the doors open when “LOCK” is displayed. Before self-cleaning, make sure the doors are completely closed or the doors will not lock and the Self-Cleaning cycle will not begin. NOTE: 12 hours must pass before the next Self-Clean can begin, and for double ovens only: only one oven can use the Self-Clean cycle at a time The oven is preset for a 4-hour clean cycle; however, the time can be changed. Suggested clean times are 3 hours for light soil and between 4 hours and 5 hours for average to heavy soil. Use the following chart as a guide to determine the desired cleaning level. Cleaning Level Total Cleaning Time (Includes a 30 Minute Cool Down Time) 1 (Quick) 3 hours 2 3 hours 20 minutes 3 3 hours 40 minutes 4 (reg) 4 hours 5 4 hours 30 minutes 6 (Maxi) 5 hours To Self-Clean:  Close the oven doors, and then press SELF CLEAN. For double ovens only: Press the number “1” or “2” keypad to select the desired oven to clean. Choose the clean level desired by pressing the appropriate number keypad as instructed by the scrolling text. Press START for the selected oven. The oven doors will automatically lock. When the Self-Clean cycle is complete and the oven cools, the oven doors will unlock. When the oven is completely cooled, remove ash with a damp cloth. To Delay Start Self-Clean:  Close the oven doors, and then press DELAY START. For double ovens only: Press the number “1” or “2” keypad to select the desired oven to clean. Press the number keypads to enter the desired amount of time by which you want to delay the start. Press SELF CLEAN.  Choose the clean level desired by pressing the appropriate number keypad as instructed by the scrolling text. Press START for the selected oven. The oven doors will automatically lock after the Delay Start countdown. When the Self-Clean cycle is complete and the oven cools, the oven doors will unlock. When the oven is completely cooled, remove ash with a damp cloth. General Cleaning IMPORTANT: Before cleaning, make sure all controls are off and the oven is cool. Always follow label instructions on cleaning products. For additional information, you can visit the Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) section of our website at www.kitchenaid.com. In Canada, refer to the Customer Service section at www.kitchenaid.ca. Soap, water and a soft cloth or sponge are suggested first unless otherwise noted. EXTERIOR PORCELAIN ENAMEL SURFACES (on some models) Food spills containing acids, such as vinegar and tomato, should be cleaned as soon as the entire oven is cool. These spills may affect the finish. Cleaning Method:  Glass cleaner, mild liquid cleaner or nonabrasive scrubbing pad: Gently clean around the model/serial/rating plate because scrubbing may remove numbers. affresh® Kitchen and Appliance Cleaner Part Number W10355010 (not included): See the “Accessories” section for more information. STAINLESS STEEL (on some models)  NOTE: To avoid damage to stainless steel surfaces, do not use soap-filled scouring pads, abrasive cleaners, steel-wool pads, gritty washcloths or abrasive paper towels. Damage may occur to stainless steel surfaces, even with one-time or limited use. Cleaning Method:  Rub in direction of grain to avoid damaging. affresh® Stainless Steel Cleaner Part Number W10355016: See the “Accessories” section for more information. METALLIC PAINT (on some models)  Do not use abrasive cleaners, cleaners with bleach, rust removers, ammonia or sodium hydroxide (lye) because paint surface may stain. CONTROL PANEL AND OVEN DOOR EXTERIOR  To avoid damage to the control panel, do not use abrasive cleaners, steel-wool pads, gritty washcloths or abrasive paper towels. Cleaning Method:  Glass cleaner and soft cloth or sponge: Apply glass cleaner to soft cloth or sponge, not directly on panel. affresh® Kitchen and Appliance Cleaner Part Number W10355010 (not included): See the “Accessories” section for more information. OVEN RACKS  Cleaning Method:  Steel-wool pad. For racks that have discolored and are harder to slide, a light coating of vegetable oil applied to the rack guides will help them slide. BAKING STONE  Cleaning Method:  Before cleaning, allow Baking Stone to cool. Hand wash and rinse with warm water. Use a plastic scraper to remove baked-on foods. Do not use soap or detergent. Do not soak or clean in a dishwasher. OVEN CAVITY  Do not use oven cleaners. Food spills should be cleaned after the oven cools. At high temperatures, foods react with porcelain and staining, etching, pitting or faint white spots can result. Cleaning Method:  Self-Cleaning cycle: See “Self-Cleaning Cycle” first. Oven Lights The oven lights are standard 40-watt appliance bulbs. Before replacing, make sure the oven is cool and the controls are turned Off. To Replace:  Disconnect power. Turn the glass bulb cover in the back of the oven counterclockwise to remove. Turn bulb counterclockwise to remove from socket. Replace bulb, and the PROBLEM SOLVER First try the solutions suggested here. If you need further assistance or more recommendations that may help you avoid a service call, refer to the warranty page in this manual and scan the code there with your  mobile device, or visit http://kitchenaid.custhelp.com. In Canada, visit http://www.kitchenaid.ca. Contact us by mail with any questions or concerns at the address below:  In the U.S.A.:  KitchenAid Brand Home Appliances Customer eXperience Center 553 Benson Road Benton Harbor, MI 49022-2692 In Canada:  KitchenAid Brand Home Appliances Customer eXperience Centre 200 – 6750 Century Ave. Mississauga, Ontario L5N 0B7 Please include a daytime phone number in your correspondence.  PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES AND/OR SOLUTIONS Nothing will operate Oven isn’t wired properly – See the Installation Instructions. Household fuse is blown, or a circuit breaker is tripped – Replace the fuse or reset the circuit breaker. If the problem continues, call an electrician. The control displays an F9 or F9 E0 error code – The electrical outlet in the home may be miswired. Contact a qualified electrician to verify the electrical supply. Oven will not operate Delay Start is set – See the “Cook Time” section. Control Lock is on – Press and hold START or START LOWER for 3 seconds to unlock. Control is in Demo Mode – See the “Electronic Oven Controls” section. Demo Mode is used for display models in a showroom. Electronic oven control set incorrectly – See the “Electronic Oven Controls” section. Oven temperature too high or too low Oven temperature needs adjustment – See “Oven Temperature Control” in the “Electronic Oven Controls” section. Display shows messages Power failure (display shows flashing time) – Press CANCEL or CANCEL UPPER to clear the display. On some models, reset the clock, if needed. See the “Clock/Tools” keypad feature in the “Feature Guide” section. Error code (display shows letter followed by number) – Press CANCEL or CANCEL UPPER to clear the display. See “Control Display” in the “Electronic Oven Controls” section. If it reappears, call for service. See the “Warranty” section for contact information. Clean cycle did not work on all spills Several cooking cycles between Clean cycles or spills on oven walls and doors – Run additional Clean cycles. The affresh® Kitchen and Appliance Cleaner can be used for stubborn soils. See the “Accessories” and “Self-Cleaning Cycle” sections for more information. Oven cooking results not what expected The set temperature was incorrect – Double-check the recipe in a reliable cookbook. Oven temperature needs adjustment – See “Oven Temperature Control” in the “Electronic Oven Controls” section. Oven was not preheated – See the “Baking and Roasting” section. Racks were positioned improperly – See the “Positioning Racks and Bakeware” section. Not enough air circulation around bakeware – See the “Positioning Racks and Bakeware” section. Batter distributed unevenly in pan – Check that batter is level in the pan. Darker browning of food caused by dull or dark bakeware – Lower the oven temperature 25°F (15°C) or move rack to a higher position in the oven. Lighter browning of food caused by shiny or light colored bakeware – Move rack to a lower position in the oven. Incorrect length of cooking time was used – Adjust cooking time. Oven door was not closed – Be sure that the bakeware does not keep the door from closing. Oven door was opened during cooking – Oven peeking releases oven heat and can result in longer cooking times. Rack is too close to bake burner, making baked items too brown on bottom – Move rack to higher position in the oven. Pie crusts browning too quickly – Use aluminum foil to cover the edge of the crust and/or reduce baking temperature. ACCESSORIES For accessories in the U.S.A., you can visit our website at www.kitchenaid.com or call us at 1-800-422-1230. In Canada, visit our website at www.kitchenaid.ca or call us at 1-800-807-6777. affresh® Stainless Steel Cleaning Wipes (stainless steel models) Order Part Number W10355049 affresh® Stainless Steel Cleaner (stainless steel models) Order Part Number W10355016 affresh® Kitchen and Appliance Cleaner Order Part Number W10355010 Granite Cleaner and Polish Order Part Number W10275756 Standard Flat Oven Rack Order Part Number 4448716 Porcelain Broiler Pan and Grid Order Part Number 4396923 KITCHENAID® BUILT-IN OVEN &#38; MICROWAVE LIMITED WARRANTY ATTACH YOUR RECEIPT HERE. PROOF OF PURCHASE IS REQUIRED TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE. Please have the following information available when you call the Customer eXperience Center: Name, address and telephone number Model number and serial number A clear, detailed description of the problem Proof of purchase including dealer or retailer name and address IF YOU NEED SERVICE:  Before contacting us to arrange service, please determine whether your product requires repair. Some questions can be addressed without service. Please take a few minutes to review the Troubleshooting or Problem Solver section of the Use and Care Guide, scan the QR code on the right to access additional resources, or visit http://kitchenaid.custhelp.com. All warranty service is provided exclusively by our authorized KitchenAid Service Providers. In the U.S. and Canada, direct all requests for warranty  service to: KitchenAid Customer eXperience Center In the U.S.A., call 1-800-422-1230. In Canada, call 1-800-807-6777. If outside the 50 United States or Canada, contact your authorized KitchenAid dealer to determine whether another warranty applies. http://kitchenaid.custhelp.com TEN YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY  WHAT IS COVERED FIRST YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY (PARTS &#38; LABOR)  For one year from the date of purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated and maintained according to instructions attached or furnished with the product, KitchenAid brand of Whirlpool Corporation or Whirlpool Canada LP (hereafter “KitchenAid”) will pay for factory specified replacement part  and repair labor to correct defects in materials and workmanship that existed when this major appliance was purchased, or at its sole discretion replace the product. In the event of product replacement, your product will be warranted for the remaining term of the original unit’s warranty period. SECOND THROUGH FIFTH YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY (CERTAIN COMPONENTS PARTS ONLY – LABOR NOT INCLUDED) In the second through fifth years from the date of original purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated and maintained according to instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid will pay for factory specified parts for the following components to correct non-cosmetic defects in materials or workmanship in these parts that prevent function of this major appliance and that existed when this major appliance was purchased. This is a limited 5-year warranty on the below named parts only and does not include repair labor. Electric element Solid state touch control system parts SECOND THROUGH TENTH YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY (MICROWAVE OVENS ONLY) In the second through tenth years from the date of original purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated and maintained according to instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid will pay for factory specified parts for the stainless steel oven cavity/inner door if the partrusts through due to defects in materials or workmanship. YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE PRODUCT REPAIR AS PROVIDED HEREIN. Service must be provided by a KitchenAid designated service company. This limited warranty is valid only in the United States or Canada and applies only when the major appliance is used in the country in which it was purchased. This limited warranty is effective from the date of original consumer purchase. Proof of original purchase date is required to obtain service under this limited warranty. WHAT IS NOT COVERED Commercial, non-residential or multiple-family use, or use inconsistent with published user, operator or installation instructions. In-home Instruction on how to use your product. Service to correct improper product maintenance or installation, installation not in accordance with electrical or plumbing codes or correction of household electrical or plumbing (i.e. house wiring, fuses or water inlet hoses). Consumable parts (i.e. light bulbs, batteries, air or water filters, etc.). Defects or damage caused by the use of non-genuine KitchenAid parts or accessories. Conversion of your product from natural gas or L.P. gas. Damage from accident, misuse, abuse, fire, floods, acts of God or use with products not approved by KitchenAid. Repairs to parts or systems to correct product damage or defects caused by unauthorized service, alteration or modification of the appliance. Cosmetic damage including scratches, dents, chips, and other damage to appliance finishes unless such damage results from defects in materials and workmanship and is reported to KitchenAid within 30 days. Discoloration, rust or oxidation of surfaces resulting from caustic or corrosive environments including but not limited to high salt concentrations, high moisture or humidity or exposure to chemicals. Food loss due to product failure. Pick-up or delivery. This product is intended for in-home repair. Travel or transportation expenses for service in remote locations where an authorized KitchenAid servicer is not available. Removal or reinstallation of inaccessible appliances or built-in fixtures (i.e. trim, decorative panels, flooring, cabinetry, islands,  countertops, drywall, etc.) that interfere with servicing, removal or replacement of the product. Service or parts for appliances with original model/serial numbers removed, altered or not easily determined. The cost of repair or replacement under these excluded circumstances shall be borne by the customer. DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES  IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO ONE YEAR OR THE SHORTEST PERIOD ALLOWED BY LAW. Some states and provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of implied warranties of merchantability or fitness, so this limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province. DISCLAIMER OF REPRESENTATIONS OUTSIDE OF WARRANTY  KitchenAid makes no representations about the quality, durability, or need for service or repair of this major appliance other than the representations contained in this warranty. If you want a longer or more comprehensive warranty than the limited warranty that comes with this major appliance, you should ask KitchenAid or your retailer about buying an extended warranty. LIMITATION OF REMEDIES; EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE PRODUCT REPAIR AS PROVIDED HEREIN. KITCHENAID SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states and provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province. [...]<p><a class="btn btn-secondary understrap-read-more-link" href="https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/w10758300b-oven/">Read More...</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>KitchenAid W10758300B Built-In Electric Single and Double Oven Instruction Manual</p>
<p></strong></p>
<p>THANK YOU for purchasing this high-quality product. Register your new oven at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.com</a>. In Canada, register your oven at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.ca/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.ca</a>.<br />
For future reference, please make a note of your product model and serial numbers. These can be located on the lower right-hand side of the oven frame inside the oven door.</p>
<p>Model Number__________________________________________<br />
Serial Number ___________________________________________</p>
<h4>OVEN SAFETY</h4>
<p><strong>Your safety and the safety of others are very important. </strong></p>
<p>We have provided many important safety messages in this manual and on your appliance. Always read and obey all safety messages.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/warning-icon-10-300x265-1.webp" /> This is the safety alert symbol.<br />
This symbol alerts you to potential hazards that can kill or hurt you and others.<br />
All safety messages will follow the safety alert symbol and either the word <strong>“DANGER”</strong> or <strong>“WARNING.”</strong><br />
These words mean:</p>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/warning-icon-10-300x265-1.webp" /> DANGER:</strong> You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t immediately  follow instructions.</p>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/warning-icon-10-300x265-1.webp" /> WARNING:</strong> You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t follow  instructions</p>
<p>All safety messages will tell you what the potential hazard is, tell you how to reduce the chance of injury, and tell you what can <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/warning-icon-10-300x265-1.webp" />happen if the instructions are not followed.</p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS </strong></p>
<p><strong>WARNING:</strong> To reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, injury to persons, or damage when using the oven, follow basic precautions, including the following:</p>
<ul>
<li>Proper Installation – Be sure the oven is properly installed and grounded by a qualified technician.</li>
<li>Never Use the Oven for Warming or Heating the Room.</li>
<li>Do Not Leave Children Alone – Children should not be left alone or unattended in area where oven is in use. They should never be allowed to sit or stand on any part of the oven.</li>
<li>Wear Proper Apparel – Loose-fitting or hanging garments should never be worn while using the oven.</li>
<li>User Servicing – Do not repair or replace any part of the oven unless specifically recommended in the manual. All other servicing should be referred to a qualified technician.</li>
<li>Storage in Oven – Flammable materials should not be stored in an oven.</li>
<li>Do Not Use Water on Grease Fires – Smother fire or flame or use dry chemical or foam-type extinguisher.</li>
<li>Use Only Dry Potholders – Moist or damp potholders on hot surfaces may result in burns from steam. Do not let potholder touch hot heating elements. Do not use a towel or other bulky cloth.</li>
<li>Use Care When Opening Door – Let hot air or steam escape before removing or replacing food.</li>
<li>Do Not Heat Unopened Food Containers – Build-up of pressure may cause container to burst and result in injury</li>
<li>Keep Oven Vent Ducts Unobstructed.</li>
<li>Placement of Oven Racks – Always place oven racks in desired location while oven is cool. If rack must be moved while oven is hot, do not let potholder contact hot heating element in oven.</li>
<li>DO NOT TOUCH HEATING ELEMENTS OR INTERIOR SURFACES OF OVEN – Heating elements may be hot even though they are dark in color. Interior surfaces of an oven become hot enough to cause burns. During and after use, do not touch, or let clothing or other flammable materials contact heating elements or interior surfaces of oven until they have had sufficient time to cool. Other surfaces of the oven may become hot enough to cause burns – among these surfaces are oven vent openings and surfaces near these openings, oven doors, and windows of oven doors.<br />
<strong>For self-cleaning ovens:</strong></li>
<li>Do Not Clean Gasket – The gasket is essential for a good seal. Care should be taken not to rub, damage, or move the gasket.</li>
<li>Do Not Use Oven Cleaners – No commercial oven cleaneror oven liner protective coating of any kind should be used in or around any part of the oven.</li>
<li>Clean Only Parts Listed in Manual.</li>
<li>Before Self-Cleaning the Oven – Remove broiler pan and other utensils.<br />
<strong>SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS </strong></li>
</ul>
<p><strong>State of California Proposition 65 Warnings:</strong><br />
<strong>WARNING:</strong> This product contains one or more chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer.<br />
<strong>WARNING:</strong> This product contains one or more chemicals known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm</p>
<h4>FEATURE GUIDE</h4>
<p>This manual covers several models. Your model may have some or all of the items listed. Refer to this manual or Frequently Asked<br />
Questions (FAQs) section of our website at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.com</a> for more detailed instructions. In Canada, reference the Customer  Service section at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.ca./" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.ca.</a></p>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/warning-icon-10-300x265-1.webp" /> WARNING: Food Poisoning Hazard</strong><br />
Do not let food sit in oven more than one hour before or after cooking. Doing so can result in food poisoning or sickness.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_1-238-300x70-1.webp" /></p>
<table width="1022">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="108"><strong>KEYPAD</strong></td>
<td width="110"><strong>FEATURE</strong></td>
<td width="516"><strong>INSTRUCTIONS</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="108"><strong>CLOCK/TOOLS</strong></td>
<td width="110"><strong>Clock</strong></td>
<td width="516">This clock can use a 12- or 24-hour cycle. See “Electronic Oven Controls” section.</p>
<p><strong>1.    </strong>Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “Clock” is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>2.    </strong>Press the number keypads to set the time of day.</p>
<p><strong>3.    </strong>Press START.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="108"><strong>CLOCK/TOOLS</strong></td>
<td width="110"><strong>Oven </strong><strong>use</strong> <strong>functions</strong></td>
<td width="516">Enables you to personalize the audible tones and oven operation to suit your needs. See the “Oven Use” section.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="108"><strong>OVEN LIGHT</strong></td>
<td width="110"><strong>Oven</strong> <strong>cavity light</strong></td>
<td width="516">While the oven door(s) are closed, press OVEN LIGHT to turn the lights on and off. The oven lights will come on when an oven door is opened.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="108"><strong>TIMER SET/OFF</strong></td>
<td width="110"><strong>Oven timer</strong></td>
<td width="516">The Timer can be set in hours or minutes up to 9 hours and 59 minutes.</p>
<p><strong>1.    </strong>Press TIMER SET/OFF.</p>
<p><strong>2.    </strong>Press the number keypads to set the length of time in hr-min. Leading zeros do not have to be entered. For example, for 2 minutes, enter “2.”</p>
<p><strong>3.    </strong>Press TIMER SET/OFF to begin the countdown. If enabled, timer tone(s) will sound at the end of countdown.</p>
<p><strong>4.    </strong>Press TIMER SET/OFF to cancel the Timer and return to the time of day. Do not press the Cancel keypad because the oven will turn off.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="108"><strong>START</strong></td>
<td width="110"><strong>Cooking start</strong></td>
<td width="516">The Start keypad begins any oven function. If Start is not pressed within 2 minutes after pressing a keypad, the function is canceled and the time of day is displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="108"><strong>CANCEL</strong></td>
<td width="110"><strong>Oven</strong> <strong>function</strong></td>
<td width="516">The Cancel keypad stops any oven function except the Clock, Timer and Control Lock in the selected oven.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="108"><strong>BAKE</strong></td>
<td width="110"><strong>Baking and</strong> <strong>roasting</strong></td>
<td width="516"><strong>1.    </strong>Press BAKE for the desired oven.</p>
<p><strong>2.    </strong>Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will be displayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range.</p>
<p><strong>3.    </strong>Press START for the selected oven.</p>
<p><strong>4.    </strong>To change the temperature when one oven is in use, repeat steps 2 and 3. To change the temperature when two ovens are in use, press “1” for the upper oven or press “2” for the lower oven, and then repeat steps 2 and 3.</p>
<p><strong>5.    </strong>Press CANCEL for the selected oven when finished.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table width="1024">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="110"><strong>BROIL</strong></td>
<td width="106"><strong>Broiling</strong></td>
<td width="518"><strong>1.    </strong>Press BROIL for the desired oven.</p>
<p><strong>2.    </strong>Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will be displayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range.</p>
<p><strong>3.    </strong>Press START for the selected oven, and then allow the oven to preheat for 2 minutes.</p>
<p><strong>4.    </strong>Position the cookware in the oven and close the door.</p>
<p><strong>5.    </strong>To change the temperature when one oven is in use, repeat steps 2 and 3. To change the temperature when two ovens are in use, press “1” for the upper oven or press “2” for the lower oven, and then repeat steps 2 and 3.</p>
<p><strong>6.    </strong>Press CANCEL for the selected oven when finished.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="110"><strong>CONVECT</strong> <strong>MODES</strong></p>
<p><strong>(Single or upper</strong> <strong>oven only)</strong></td>
<td width="106"><strong>Convection</strong> <strong>cooking</strong></td>
<td width="518"><strong>1.    </strong>Press CONVECT MODES until the desired mode is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>2.    </strong>Press START for the desired oven.</p>
<p><strong>3.    </strong>Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will be displayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range.</p>
<p><strong>4.    </strong>Press START for the selected oven.</p>
<p><strong>5.    </strong>To change the temperature, repeat steps 3 and 4.</p>
<p><strong>6.    </strong>Press CANCEL for the selected oven when finished.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="110"><strong>PROOF</strong></td>
<td width="106"><strong>Proofing</strong> <strong>bread</strong></td>
<td width="518"><strong>1.    </strong>Press PROOF until the desired proof is displayed (“Standard Proof” or “Rapid Proof”).</p>
<p><strong>NOTE: </strong>“Rapid” operates at a slightly higher temperature for second rise of formed dough.</p>
<p><strong>2.    </strong>Press START for the selected oven.</p>
<p>Let the dough rise until nearly doubled in size. Proofing time may vary depending on dough type and quantity.</p>
<p><strong>3.    </strong>Press CANCEL for the selected oven when finished proofing. Refer to the “Proofing Bread” section for more information.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="110"><strong>DELAY START</strong></td>
<td width="106"><strong>Delayed start</strong></td>
<td width="518">The Delay Start keypad is used to enter the starting time for an oven function with a delayed start. Delay Start should not be used for foods such as breads and cakes because they may not bake properly.</p>
<p>To set a Timed Cook or a Delayed Timed Cook, see the “Cook Time” section.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="110"><strong>COOK TIME</strong></td>
<td width="106"><strong>Timed cooking</strong></td>
<td width="518">Cook Time allows the oven to be set to turn on at a certain time of day, cook for a set length of time, and/or shut off automatically.</p>
<p>To set a Timed Cook or a Delayed Timed Cook, see the “Cook Time” section.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="110"><strong>SELF</strong> <strong>CLEAN</strong></td>
<td width="106"><strong>Self-clean cycle</strong></td>
<td width="518">See the “Self-Clean Cycle” section.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="110"><strong>START/START LOWER CONTROL LOCK</strong></p>
<p><strong>hold 3 sec.</strong></td>
<td width="106"><strong>Oven control</strong> <strong>lockout</strong></td>
<td width="518"><strong>1.    </strong>Check that the ovens and timers are off.</p>
<p><strong>2.    </strong>Press and hold START or START LOWER for 3 seconds.</p>
<p><strong>3.    </strong>If enabled, a tone will sound, and “CONTROL LOCKED” will be displayed.</p>
<p><strong>4.    </strong>Repeat to unlock. No keypads will function with the controls locked.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>OVEN USE</h4>
<p>Odors and smoke are normal when the oven is used the first few times or when it is heavily soiled.</p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> The health of some birds is extremely sensitive to the fumes given off. Exposure to the fumes may result in death to certain birds. Always move birds to another closed and well ventilated room.</p>
<h5><strong>Electronic Oven Controls </strong></h5>
<p><strong>Control Display </strong></p>
<p>The display will light up when first powered up or after a power loss. When oven is not in use, the time of day is displayed.</p>
<p><strong>Tones</strong></p>
<p>Tones are audible signals, indicating the following:</p>
<p><strong>One Tone </strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Valid keypad press.</li>
<li>Oven is preheated (long tone).</li>
<li>Kitchen timer (long tone with reminder tone every 60 seconds).</li>
<li>Function has been entered.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Three Tones </strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Invalid keypad press.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Four Tones </strong></p>
<ul>
<li>End of cycle (with reminder tone every 60 seconds). Use the Clock/Tools keypad to change the tone settings.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Tools</strong></p>
<p>Many features of the oven control can be adjusted to meet your personal needs. These changes are made using the Clock/Tools keypad.</p>
<p>Use the Clock/Tools keypad to scroll through the features that can be changed. Each press of the Clock/Tools keypad will advance the display to the next setting. After selecting the feature to be changed, the control will prompt you for the required input. Details of all of the feature changes are explained in the following sections. Press CANCEL to exit Tools.</p>
<p><strong>Fahrenheit and Celsius </strong></p>
<p>The temperature is preset to Fahrenheit, but can be changed to Celsius.</p>
<ol>
<li>Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “TEMP UNIT” is displayed.</li>
<li>The current setting will be displayed.</li>
<li>Press the “1” keypad to adjust the setting.</li>
<li>Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Audible Tones Disable </strong></p>
<p>Turns off all tones, including the end of cycle tone and key press tones.</p>
<ol>
<li>Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “SOUND” is displayed.</li>
<li>The current setting will be displayed.</li>
<li>Press the “1” keypad to adjust the setting.</li>
<li>Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Sound Volume </strong></p>
<p>Sets the pitch of the tone to either high or low.</p>
<ol>
<li>Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “SOUND VOLUME” is displayed.</li>
<li>The current setting will be displayed.</li>
<li>Press the “1” keypad to adjust the setting.</li>
<li>Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>End of Cycle Tone </strong></p>
<p>Activates or turns off the tones that sound at the end of a cycle.</p>
<ol>
<li>Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “END TONE” is displayed.</li>
<li>The current setting will be displayed.</li>
<li>Press the “1” keypad to adjust the setting.</li>
<li>Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Key Press Tones </strong></p>
<p>Activates or turns off the tones when a keypad is pressed.</p>
<ol>
<li>Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “KEYPRESS TONE” is displayed.</li>
<li>The current setting will be displayed.</li>
<li>Press the “1” keypad to adjust the setting.</li>
<li>Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Reminder Tones Disable </strong></p>
<p>Turns off the short repeating tone that sounds every 1 minute after the end of cycle tones.</p>
<ol>
<li>Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “REMINDER TONE” is displayed.</li>
<li>The current setting will be displayed.</li>
<li>Press the “1” keypad to adjust the setting.</li>
<li>Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>12/24 Hour Clock</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “12/24 HOUR” is displayed.</li>
<li>The current setting will be displayed.</li>
<li>Press the “1” keypad to adjust the setting.</li>
<li>Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Demo Mode </strong></p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> This feature is intended for use on the sales floor with 120V power connection and permits the control features to be demonstrated without heating elements turning on. If this feature is activated, the oven will not work.</p>
<ol>
<li>Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “DEMO MODE” is displayed.</li>
<li>The current setting will be displayed.</li>
<li>Press the “1” keypad to adjust the setting.</li>
<li>Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>12-Hour Shutoff </strong></p>
<p>The oven control is set to automatically shut off the oven 12 hours after the oven initiates a cook or clean function. This will not interfere with any timed or delay cook functions</p>
<ol>
<li>Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “12 HR AUTO OFF” is displayed.</li>
<li>The current setting will be displayed.</li>
<li>Press the “1” keypad to adjust the setting.</li>
<li>Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Languages – Scrolling Display Text </strong></p>
<p>Language options are English, Spanish and French.</p>
<ol>
<li>Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “LANGUAGE” is displayed.</li>
<li>The current setting will be displayed.</li>
<li>Press the number keypad as instructed by the scrolling text to select the new language.</li>
<li>Press CANCEL to exit and display the time of day</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Oven Temperature Offset Control </strong></p>
<p>IMPORTANT: Do not use a thermometer to measure oven temperature. Elements will cycle on and off as needed to provide  consistent temperature, but they may run slightly hot or cool at any point in time due to this cycling. Most thermometers are slow to react to temperature change and will not provide an accurate reading due to this cycling.</p>
<p>The oven provides accurate temperatures; however, it may cook faster or slower than your previous oven, so the temperature can be adjusted to personalize it for your cooking needs. It can be changed to Fahrenheit or Celsius.</p>
<p><strong>To Adjust Oven Temperature: </strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “TEMP CALIB” is displayed.</li>
<li>The current setting will be displayed. For double ovens only: Press the “1” keypad to toggle between the upper and lower ovens.</li>
<li>Press START for the selected oven to select the choice displayed in Step 2. Wait several seconds for the display to change or press START for the selected oven, and then continue with Step 4.</li>
<li>Press the “3” keypad to increase the temperature in 5°F (3°C) increments, or press the “6” keypad to decrease the temperature in 5°F (3°C) increments. The range is from -30°F to +30°F (-18°C to +18°C).</li>
<li>Press START.</li>
<li>Press CANCEL for the selected oven to exit and display the time of day.</li>
</ol>
<h5>Sabbath Mode</h5>
<p>The Sabbath Mode sets the oven to remain on in a bake setting until turned off.<br />
When the Sabbath Mode is set, only the Bake cycle will operate. Al  other cooking and cleaning cycles are disabled. No tones will sound, and the displays will not indicate temperature changes. When the oven door is opened or closed, the oven light will not turn on or off, and the heating elements will not turn on or off immediately.</p>
<p><strong>To Enable Sabbath Mode Capability (One Time Only): </strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Press CLOCK/TOOLS until “SABBATH” is displayed.</li>
<li>Press the “1” keypad. Sabbath Mode can be activated for baking.</li>
<li>Press CANCEL to save the setting and exit to display the time of day.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> To disable the Sabbath Mode, repeat steps 1 through 3 to change the status from “SABBATH ON” to “SABBATH OFF.”</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To Activate Sabbath Mode: </strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Press BAKE for the desired oven.</li>
<li>Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will be displayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range.</li>
<li>Press START for the selected oven. For timed cooking in Sabbath Mode, press COOK TIME, and then press the number keypads to set the desired cook time. Press START for the selected oven.</li>
<li>(Optional) If Sabbath Mode is to be used for both ovens, repeat steps 1 through 3 for the second oven.</li>
<li>Press CLOCK/TOOLS. Three tones will sound. Then press “7.” “SAb” will appear in the display</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To Adjust Temperature (when Sabbath Mode is running in only one oven):</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Press the number keypad as instructed by the scrolling text to select the new temperature.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> The temperature adjustment will not appear on the display, and no tones will sound. The scrolling text will be shown on the display as it was before the keypad was pressed.</li>
<li>Press START for the selected oven.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To Adjust Temperature (when Sabbath Mode is running in both ovens):</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Press BAKE for the desired oven.</li>
<li>Press the number keypad as instructed by the scrolling text to select the new temperature.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> The temperature adjustment will not appear on the display, and no tones will sound. The scrolling text will be shown on the display as it was before the keypad was pressed. 3. Press START for the selected oven.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To Deactivate Sabbath Mode: </strong></p>
<p>Press CLOCK/TOOLS, and then press “7” to return to regular baking, or press CANCEL for the desired oven to turn off the oven(s)</p>
<h5>Aluminum Foil</h5>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> To avoid permanent damage to the oven bottom finish, do not line the oven bottom with any type of foil or liner. For best cooking results, do not cover entire oven rack with foil because air must be able to move freely.</p>
<h5>Positioning Racks and Bakeware</h5>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> To avoid permanent damage to the porcelain finish, do not place food or bakeware directly on the oven door or bottom.</p>
<p><strong>Racks</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Position racks before turning on the oven.</li>
<li>Do not position racks with bakeware on them.</li>
<li>Make sure racks are level.</li>
<li>Place food so it will not rise into the broil element. Allow at least ¹⁄₂” (1.3 cm) between pans and the broil element.</li>
</ul>
<p>To move a rack, pull it out to the stop position, raise the front edge, and then lift it out. Use the following illustrations and charts as a guide for positioning racks.</p>
<p><strong>Rack Positions<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_2-200-300x295-1.webp" /></strong></p>
<p><strong>Broiling</strong></p>
<table width="601">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="213"><strong>Food</strong></td>
<td width="136"><strong>Rack Position</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="213">Broiled meats, poultry, fish</td>
<td width="136">4</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="213">Broiling/searing meats, hamburgers, steaks</td>
<td width="136">5</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Baking</strong></p>
<table width="589">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="218"><strong>Food</strong></td>
<td width="131"><strong>Rack</strong> <strong>Position</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="218">Large roasts, roasted meats or poultry</td>
<td width="131">1 or 2</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="218">Most baked goods, casseroles</td>
<td width="131">2 or 3</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Baking Layer Cakes on 1 Rack </strong></p>
<p>Place the cakes on the rack as shown.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_3-202-300x126-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Multiple Rack Cooking </strong></p>
<p>2-rack: Use rack positions 2 and 4 for regular baking.<br />
2-rack (convection only): Use rack positions 2 and 4 for convection baking.</p>
<p><strong>Baking Layer Cakes on 2 Racks </strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_4-185-300x213-1.webp" /></p>
<p>For best results when baking cakes on 2 racks, use rack positions 2 and 4 with the Convection Bake function. Place the cakes on the racks as shown.</p>
<p><strong>Baking Cookies on 2 Racks </strong></p>
<p>For best results when baking cookies on 2 racks, use rack positions 2 and 4 with the Convection Bake function.</p>
<p><strong>Bakeware</strong></p>
<p>To cook food evenly, hot air must be able to circulate. Allow 2″ (5.0 cm) of space around bakeware and oven walls. Use the following chart as a guide.</p>
<table width="625">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="72"><strong>Number of Pan(s)</strong></td>
<td width="277"><strong>Position on Rack</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="72">1</td>
<td width="277">Center of rack.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="72">2</td>
<td width="277">Side by side.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="72">3 or 4</td>
<td width="277">Refer to the previous illustration.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>NOTE: Bakeware materials and color may affect results. Dark, dull, non-stick or glass pans may require shorter baking times, in contrast insulated or stainless steel pans may require longer baking times. Follow bakeware manufacturer’s recommendations.</p>
<h5>Baking Stone</h5>
<p>The Baking Stone is ideal for baking and reheating. Because the Baking Stone absorbs excess moisture, heat is concentrated for crispier pizza and more thorough baking of bread and cookies. It is oven safe to 550°F (288°C).</p>
<p><strong>For Best Results: </strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Place Baking Stone centered on Rack 1.</li>
<li>Use a regular bake cycle.</li>
<li>Avoid clustering food on the Baking Stone.</li>
<li>You may use parchment paper with the Baking Stone to aid in removing food.</li>
<li>For best bottom browning, preheat oven with Baking Stone<br />
prior to use. Preheating with the Baking Stone may take longer<br />
than usual.</li>
<li>Thaw frozen foods in the refrigerator prior to baking. Refrigerated food can be placed directly in the oven after it is preheated.</li>
<li>Not intended for multi-rack baking.</li>
<li>Follow recipe temperature and baking time. Short baking times may need an extra 1-2 minutes.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Tips for Use: </strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Always use a heat-resistant oven mitt or pad when handling.</li>
<li>Seasoning is not needed.<br />
The stone will discolor with age. This will enhance the performance.</li>
<li>Avoid placing any other pan or rack on top of the Baking Stone.</li>
<li>Baking Stone is metal utensil safe.</li>
<li>When placing Baking Stone on a surface, first cover surface with a sturdy material to avoid scratches.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>To Avoid Damage to Your Stone: </strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Avoid extreme temperature changes.</li>
<li>Do not use Baking Stone if damaged or chipped.</li>
<li>Do not use on a direct heat source or under a broiler.</li>
<li>Do not touch the closed oven door or sides of oven with Baking Stone.</li>
<li>Avoid bumping or dropping the Baking Stone, which can break.</li>
</ul>
<h5>Oven Vent(s)</h5>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_5-177-300x291-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Single and Double Oven</strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>A</strong>. Control panel</li>
<li><strong>B</strong>. Oven vent</li>
<li><strong>C</strong>. Single oven or upper double oven</li>
<li><strong>G</strong>. Bottom vent</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Double Oven </strong></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>D</strong>. Upper oven</li>
<li><strong>E</strong>. Oven vent</li>
<li><strong>F</strong>. Lower oven</li>
<li><strong>G</strong>. Bottom vent</li>
</ul>
<p>The oven vent(s) should not be blocked or covered since they allow the inlet of fresh air into the cooling system. Also, the bottom vent should not be blocked or covered since it allows the inlet of fresh air into the cooling system and the outlet of hot air from the cooling system. Blocking or covering vents will cause poor air circulation, affecting cooking, cleaning and cooling results.</p>
<h5>Baking and Roasting</h5>
<p><strong>Preheating</strong></p>
<p>When beginning a Bake, Convect Bake or Convect Roast cycle, the oven will begin preheating after Start is pressed. The oven will take approximately 13 to 19 minutes to reach 350°F (177°C) with all of the oven racks provided with your oven inside the oven cavity. Higher temperatures will take longer to preheat. The preheat cycle rapidly increases the oven temperature. The actual oven temperature will go above your set temperature to offset the heat lost when your oven door is opened to insert food. This ensures that when you place your food in the oven, the oven will begin at the proper temperature. Insert your food when the preheat tone sounds. Do not open the door during preheat before the tone sounds.</p>
<p><strong>Oven Temperature </strong></p>
<p>While in use, the oven elements will cycle on and off as needed to maintain a consistent temperature, but they may run slightly hot or cool at any point in time due to this cycling. Opening the oven door while in use will release the hot air and cool the oven which could impact the cooking time and performance. It is recommended to use the oven light to monitor cooking progress.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> On models with convection, the convection fan may run in the non-convection bake mode to improve oven performance. Before baking and roasting, position racks according to the “Positioning Racks and Bakeware” section. When roasting, it is not necessary to wait for the oven preheat cycle to end before putting food in unless it is recommended in the recipe.</p>
<h5><strong>Broiling</strong></h5>
<p>When broiling, preheat the oven for 2 minutes before putting food in unless recommended otherwise in the recipe. Position food on grid in a broiler pan, and then place it in the center of the oven rack. Close the oven door to ensure proper broiling temperature.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> Odors and smoke are normal the first few times the oven is used or if the oven is heavily soiled.</p>
<p>Changing the temperature when broiling allows more precise control when cooking. The lower the broil setting, the slower the cooking. Thicker cuts and unevenly shaped pieces of meat, fish and poultry may cook better at lower broil settings. Place the food in the upper or lower oven. Refer to the “Positioning Racks and Bakeware” section for more information.</p>
<p>On lower settings, the broil element will cycle on and off to maintain the proper temperature.</p>
<ul>
<li>For best results, use a broiler pan and grid. It is designed todrain juices and help avoid spatter and smoke. If you would like to purchase a broiler pan, one may be ordered. Please refer to the “Accessories” section for more information.</li>
</ul>
<h5>Convection Cooking – Upper Oven Only</h5>
<p>During convection cooking, the fan provides hot air circulation throughout the oven. The movement of heated air around the food can help to speed up cooking by penetrating the cooler outer surfaces. Food cooks more evenly, browning and crisping outer surfaces while sealing moisture inside.</p>
<p>During the Convect function, the ring element, bake and broil elements, and the fan operate to heat the oven cavity. If the oven door is opened during convection cooking or preheating, the fan turns off immediately and the element(s) will turn off after 30 seconds. Once the door is closed, the element(s) will turn back on.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> It is normal for the convection fan to run during non convection cycles as well as during preheat.</p>
<ul>
<li>It is important not to cover foods so that surface areas remain exposed to the circulating air, allowing browning and crisping.</li>
<li>Keep heat loss to a minimum by only opening the oven door when necessary. It is recommended to use the oven light to monitor cooking progress.</li>
<li>Choose cookie sheets without sides and roasting pans with lower sides to allow air to move freely around the food.</li>
<li>Test baked goods for doneness a few minutes before the minimum cooking time with a method such as a toothpick.</li>
<li>Use a meat thermometer to determine the doneness of meats and poultry. Check the temperature of pork and poultry in 2 or 3 different places, including the thickest part.</li>
<li>Before convection cooking, position the rack(s) according to the “Positioning Racks and Bakeware” section.</li>
<li>When using more than one rack, position bakeware/cookware on the racks to allow movement of the fan circulated air around the food. See the “Positioning Racks and Bakeware” section.</li>
<li>If the oven is full, extra cooking time may be needed.</li>
<li>For optimal cooking results, do not cover food.</li>
<li>When roasting poultry and meat, use a broiler pan and grid. It is not necessary to wait for the oven to preheat, unless recommended in the recipe.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>To order a broiler pan, see the “Assistance or Service” section.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_6-167-300x71-1.webp" /><br />
<em>A. Broiler grid</em><br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_7-163-300x81-1.webp" /><br />
<em>B. Broiler pan </em></strong></p>
<p><strong>Convection Baking </strong></p>
<p>Use Convect Bake for single or multiple rack baking. When convection baking, reduce your recipe baking temperature by 25°F (15°C)</p>
<p><strong>To Set Convect Bake: </strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Press CONVECT MODES until “CONVECT BAKE” is displayed.</li>
<li>Press START for the selected oven.</li>
<li>Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will be displayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range.</li>
<li>Press START for the selected oven. The oven will begin preheating. There are two preheat modes on Convect Bake function. Use Rapid Preheating when using a single rack only, and use the standard Preheating when using multiple racks. It is possible to switch between “Rapid Preheating” and “Preheating” by pressing Start for the selected oven during the preheating.</li>
<li>Place the food in the oven and close the oven door when preheat is completed.</li>
<li>Press CANCEL for the selected oven when finished.</li>
<li>Remove food from the oven.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> The temperature may be changed at any time by pressing the number keypads to enter the desired temperature and then pressing Start for the selected oven. Changing the temperature once food is placed in the oven could affect the performance.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Convection Broil </strong></p>
<p>The oven door must be closed when using Convect Broil.<br />
It is not necessary to preheat the oven for Convect Broil.</p>
<ol>
<li>Place the food in the oven and close the oven door.</li>
<li>Press CONVECT MODES until “CONVECT BROIL” is displayed.</li>
<li>Press START for the selected oven.</li>
<li>Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will be displayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range.</li>
<li>Press START for the selected oven.</li>
<li>Press CANCEL for the selected oven when finished.</li>
<li>Remove food from the oven.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Convection Roasting </strong></p>
<p>When convection roasting, enter your normal roasting temperature.<br />
The roasting time should be 15-30% less than in conventional<br />
cooking.<br />
It is not necessary to preheat the oven for Convect Roast.</p>
<ol>
<li>Place the food in the oven and close the oven door.</li>
<li>Press CONVECT MODES until “CONVECT ROAST” is displayed.</li>
<li>Press START for the selected oven.</li>
<li>Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will be displayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range.</li>
<li>Press START for the selected oven.</li>
<li>Press CANCEL for the selected oven when finished.</li>
<li>Remove food from the oven.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> The temperature may be changed at any time by pressing the number keypads to enter the desired temperature and then pressing Start for the selected oven. Changing the temperature once food is placed in the oven could affect the performance.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Convection Recipe </strong></p>
<p>When using Convection Recipe, enter your normal cooking temperature. The oven door must be closed when using Convection Recipe.<br />
It is not necessary to preheat the oven for Convection Recipe MEAT option.</p>
<ol>
<li>For Convection Recipe MEAT only: Place food in the oven and close the oven door.</li>
<li>Press CONVECT MODES until “CONVECT RECIPE” is displayed.</li>
<li>Press START.</li>
<li>Press CONVECT MODES to cycle between the options. Press<br />
START to select the displayed option.</li>
<li>Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will be displayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range.</li>
<li>Press the number keypads to enter the desired cook time, and then press START. For MEAT and OTHERS options only: The cook time will automatically be adjusted to 80% of the time entered, and the adjusted cook time will appear on the display, but temperature will not be adjusted.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> Preheating can cause overcooking. If preheat is required for the recipe, add 15 minutes to the cook time. Place food in the oven at appropriate time.</li>
<li>For BAKED FOODS and OTHERS options only: The preheating will start and once complete the unit will sound a tone. Place the food in the oven and close the oven door.</li>
<li>At the end of the cooking time set, the oven will turn off automatically, the end of cycle tone will sound and “Cooking Complete” will appear in the text area. It’s also possible to press CANCEL to finish the cycle.</li>
<li>Remove food from the oven.</li>
</ol>
<h5>Proofing Bread</h5>
<p>Proofing bread prepares the dough for baking by activating the yeast. Follow the recipe directions as a guide. Standard Proof should be used for fresh dough, thawed dough, and for the first and second rise. Rapid Proof (on some models) operates at a slightly higher temperature than Standard Proof, and it can be used for the second rise of formed dough.</p>
<p><strong>To Proof: </strong></p>
<p>Before first proofing, place the dough in a lightly greased bowl and cover loosely with wax paper, coated with shortening. Place in position 2, and then close the oven door.</p>
<ol>
<li>Press PROOF for the desired oven until the desired proof is displayed (“Standrd” or “Rapid”).</li>
<li>Press START for the selected oven. Let the dough rise until nearly doubled in size. Proofing time may vary depending on dough type and quantity.</li>
<li>Press CANCEL for the selected oven when finished proofing. Before second proofing, shape the dough, place it in baking pan(s) and then cover loosely. Follow the same placement and control steps above. Before baking, remove the cover.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> If the oven temperature is greater than 110°F (43°C), the display will indicate “Oven Cooling” until the temperature is below 110°F (43°C)</li>
</ol>
<h5>Cook Time</h5>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/warning-icon-10-300x265-2.webp" /> WARNING: Food Poisoning Hazard</strong><br />
Do not let food sit in oven more than one hour before or after cooking. Doing so can result in food poisoning or sickness.</p>
<p><strong>To Set a Timed Cook: </strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Press the keypad for any cooking function except Broil, Convect Broil or Proof.</li>
<li>Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will be displayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range.</li>
<li>Press COOK TIME.</li>
<li>Press the number keypads to enter the length of time to cook.</li>
<li>Press START for the selected oven. The display will count down the time. When the time ends, the oven will shut off automatically. The temperature and/or time setting can be changed at any time by repeating steps 2 through 5.</li>
<li>Press CANCEL for the selected oven to clear the display.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To Set a Delayed Timed Cook: </strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Press DELAY START.</li>
<li>For double ovens only: Press the number “1” or “2” keypad to select the desired oven.</li>
<li>Press the number keypads to enter the number of hours and/or minutes you want to delay the start time.</li>
<li>Press the keypad for any cooking function except Broil, Convect Broil or Proof.</li>
<li>Press the number keypads to set the desired temperature. If the temperature entered is not in the range of the temperatures allowed, the minimum or maximum allowed temperature will bedisplayed. Enter a temperature in the allowable range.</li>
<li>Press START for the selected oven or COOK TIME.</li>
<li>Press the number keypads to enter the length of time to cook.</li>
<li>Press START for the selected oven.<br />
When the start time is reached, the oven will automatically turn on. The temperature and/or time settings can be changed after the delay countdown by repeating steps 1 through 7. When resetting the time and temperature, it is necessary to press Start for the selected oven between steps 4 and 5 to continue making changes. When the set cook time ends, the oven will shut off automatically.</li>
<li>Press CANCEL for the selected oven to clear the display.</li>
</ol>
<h4>OVEN CARE</h4>
<h5>Self-Cleaning Cycle</h5>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_8-148-300x237-1.webp" /> WARNING: Burn Hazard </strong></p>
<p>Do not touch the oven during the Self-Cleaning cycle.</p>
<p>Keep children away from oven during Self-Cleaning cycle.</p>
<p>Failure to follow these instructions can result in burns.</p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> The health of some birds is extremely sensitive to the fumes given off during the Self-Cleaning cycle. Exposure to the fumes may result in death to certain birds. Always move birds to another closed and well-ventilated room.</p>
<p>Keep the kitchen well-ventilated during the Self-Cleaning cycle to help get rid of heat, odors and smoke.</p>
<p>Do not block the oven vent(s) during the Self-Cleaning cycle. Air must be able to move freely. Depending on your model, see “Oven Vent” or “Oven Vents” section.</p>
<p>Do not clean, rub, damage or move the oven door gasket.</p>
<p><strong>Prepare Oven: </strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Remove the broiler pan, grid, cookware and bakeware, all cooking utensils, oven racks and aluminum foil and, on some models, the temperature probe from the oven.</li>
<li>Use a damp cloth to clean inside door edge and the 1½” (38 mm) area around the inside oven cavity frame, being certain not to move or bend the gasket.</li>
<li>Wipe out any loose soil to reduce smoke and avoid damage. At high temperatures, foods react with porcelain. Staining, etching, pitting or faint white spots can result. This will not affect cooking performance.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Oven temperature must be below 500°F (260°C) to program a clean cycle.</li>
<li>For double ovens only: Only 1 oven can be cleaned at a time.</li>
<li>For double ovens only: Both oven doors will lock when either oven is running the Self-Cleaning cycle.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>How the Cycle Works </strong></p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> The heating and cooling of porcelain on steel in theoven may result in discoloring, loss of gloss, hairline cracks and popping sounds.</p>
<p>The Self-Cleaning cycle uses very high temperatures, burning soil to a powdery ash.</p>
<p>Once the oven has completely cooled, remove ash with a damp cloth. To avoid breaking the glass, do not apply a cool damp cloth to the inner door glass before it has completely cooled. The oven light will not work during the Self-Cleaning cycle. To stop the Self-Cleaning cycle at anytime, press CANCEL for the selected oven. If the temperature is too high, the oven doors will remain locked.</p>
<p>When “LOCK” shows in the display, the doors of the oven cannot be opened. To avoid damage to the doors, do not force the doors open when “LOCK” is displayed.</p>
<p>Before self-cleaning, make sure the doors are completely closed or the doors will not lock and the Self-Cleaning cycle will not begin.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> 12 hours must pass before the next Self-Clean can begin, and for double ovens only: only one oven can use the Self-Clean cycle at a time</p>
<p>The oven is preset for a 4-hour clean cycle; however, the time can be changed. Suggested clean times are 3 hours for light soil and between 4 hours and 5 hours for average to heavy soil.</p>
<p><strong>Use the following chart as a guide to determine the desired cleaning level.</strong></p>
<table width="650">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="101"><strong>Cleaning</strong> <strong>Level</strong></td>
<td width="248"><strong>Total</strong> <strong>Cleaning</strong> <strong>Time</strong></p>
<p><strong>(Includes a 30 Minute Cool Down Time)</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="101">1 (Quick)</td>
<td width="248">3 hours</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="101">2</td>
<td width="248">3 hours 20 minutes</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="101">3</td>
<td width="248">3 hours 40 minutes</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="101">4 (reg)</td>
<td width="248">4 hours</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="101">5</td>
<td width="248">4 hours 30 minutes</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="101">6 (Maxi)</td>
<td width="248">5 hours</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>To Self-Clean: </strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Close the oven doors, and then press SELF CLEAN.</li>
<li>For double ovens only: Press the number “1” or “2” keypad to select the desired oven to clean.</li>
<li>Choose the clean level desired by pressing the appropriate number keypad as instructed by the scrolling text.</li>
<li>Press START for the selected oven. The oven doors will automatically lock. When the Self-Clean cycle is complete and the oven cools, the oven doors will unlock.</li>
<li>When the oven is completely cooled, remove ash with a damp cloth.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To Delay Start Self-Clean: </strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Close the oven doors, and then press DELAY START.</li>
<li>For double ovens only: Press the number “1” or “2” keypad to select the desired oven to clean.</li>
<li>Press the number keypads to enter the desired amount of time by which you want to delay the start.</li>
<li>Press SELF CLEAN.</li>
<li> Choose the clean level desired by pressing the appropriate number keypad as instructed by the scrolling text.</li>
<li>Press START for the selected oven. The oven doors will automatically lock after the Delay Start countdown.<br />
When the Self-Clean cycle is complete and the oven cools, the oven doors will unlock.</li>
<li>When the oven is completely cooled, remove ash with a damp cloth.</li>
</ol>
<h5>General Cleaning</h5>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> Before cleaning, make sure all controls are off and the oven is cool. Always follow label instructions on cleaning products. For additional information, you can visit the Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) section of our website at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.com./" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.com.</a> In Canada, refer to the Customer Service section at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.ca/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.ca</a>. Soap, water and a soft cloth or sponge are suggested first unless otherwise noted.</p>
<p><strong>EXTERIOR PORCELAIN ENAMEL SURFACES</strong> (on some models)</p>
<p>Food spills containing acids, such as vinegar and tomato, should be cleaned as soon as the entire oven is cool. These spills may affect the finish.</p>
<p><strong>Cleaning Method: </strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Glass cleaner, mild liquid cleaner or nonabrasive scrubbing pad: Gently clean around the model/serial/rating plate because scrubbing may remove numbers.</li>
<li>affresh® Kitchen and Appliance Cleaner Part Number W10355010 (not included): See the “Accessories” section for more information.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>STAINLESS STEEL (on some models) </strong></p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> To avoid damage to stainless steel surfaces, do not use soap-filled scouring pads, abrasive cleaners, steel-wool pads, gritty washcloths or abrasive paper towels. Damage may occur to stainless steel surfaces, even with one-time or limited use.</p>
<p><strong>Cleaning Method: </strong></p>
<p>Rub in direction of grain to avoid damaging.</p>
<ul>
<li>affresh® Stainless Steel Cleaner Part Number W10355016: See the “Accessories” section for more information.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>METALLIC PAINT (on some models) </strong></p>
<p>Do not use abrasive cleaners, cleaners with bleach, rust removers, ammonia or sodium hydroxide (lye) because paint surface may stain.</p>
<p><strong>CONTROL PANEL AND OVEN DOOR EXTERIOR </strong></p>
<p>To avoid damage to the control panel, do not use abrasive cleaners, steel-wool pads, gritty washcloths or abrasive paper towels.</p>
<p><strong>Cleaning Method: </strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Glass cleaner and soft cloth or sponge: Apply glass cleaner to soft cloth or sponge, not directly on panel.</li>
<li>affresh® Kitchen and Appliance Cleaner Part Number W10355010 (not included): See the “Accessories” section for more information.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>OVEN RACKS </strong></p>
<p><strong>Cleaning Method: </strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Steel-wool pad.</li>
<li>For racks that have discolored and are harder to slide, a light coating of vegetable oil applied to the rack guides will help them slide.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>BAKING STONE </strong></p>
<p><strong>Cleaning Method: </strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Before cleaning, allow Baking Stone to cool. Hand wash and rinse with warm water.</li>
<li>Use a plastic scraper to remove baked-on foods.</li>
<li>Do not use soap or detergent.</li>
<li>Do not soak or clean in a dishwasher.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>OVEN CAVITY </strong></p>
<p>Do not use oven cleaners. Food spills should be cleaned after the oven cools. At high temperatures, foods react with porcelain and staining, etching, pitting or faint white spots can result.</p>
<p><strong>Cleaning Method: </strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Self-Cleaning cycle: See “Self-Cleaning Cycle” first.</li>
</ul>
<h5>Oven Lights</h5>
<p>The oven lights are standard 40-watt appliance bulbs. Before replacing, make sure the oven is cool and the controls are turned Off.</p>
<p><strong>To Replace: </strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Disconnect power.</li>
<li>Turn the glass bulb cover in the back of the oven counterclockwise to remove.</li>
<li>Turn bulb counterclockwise to remove from socket.</li>
<li>Replace bulb, and the</li>
</ol>
<h4>PROBLEM SOLVER</h4>
<p>First try the solutions suggested here. If you need further assistance or more recommendations that may help you avoid a service call, refer to the warranty page in this manual and scan the code there with your  mobile device, or visit <a href="http://kitchenaid.custhelp.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">http://kitchenaid.custhelp.com</a>. In Canada, visit <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.ca/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">http://www.kitchenaid.ca</a>.</p>
<p><strong>Contact us by mail with any questions or concerns at the address below: </strong></p>
<p><strong>In the U.S.A.: </strong></p>
<p>KitchenAid Brand Home Appliances<br />
Customer eXperience Center<br />
553 Benson Road<br />
Benton Harbor, MI 49022-2692</p>
<p><strong>In Canada: </strong></p>
<p>KitchenAid Brand Home Appliances<br />
Customer eXperience Centre<br />
200 – 6750 Century Ave.<br />
Mississauga, Ontario L5N 0B7</p>
<p><strong>Please include a daytime phone number in your correspondence. </strong></p>
<table width="989">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="166"><strong>PROBLEM</strong></td>
<td width="557"><strong>POSSIBLE CAUSES AND/OR SOLUTIONS</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="166"><strong>Nothing will operate</strong></td>
<td width="557"><strong>Oven isn’t wired properly – </strong>See the Installation Instructions.</p>
<p><strong>Household</strong> <strong>fuse</strong> <strong>is</strong> <strong>blown,</strong> <strong>or</strong> <strong>a</strong> <strong>circuit</strong> <strong>breaker</strong> <strong>is</strong> <strong>tripped</strong> <strong>–</strong> Replace the fuse or reset the circuit breaker. If the problem continues, call an electrician.</p>
<p><strong>The control displays an F9 or F9 E0 error code – </strong>The electrical outlet in the home may be miswired. Contact a qualified electrician to verify the electrical supply.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="166"><strong>Oven will not operate</strong></td>
<td width="557"><strong>Delay Start is set – </strong>See the “Cook Time” section.</p>
<p><strong>Control Lock is on – </strong>Press and hold START or START LOWER for 3 seconds to unlock.</p>
<p><strong>Control is in Demo Mode – </strong>See the “Electronic Oven Controls” section. Demo Mode is used for display models in a showroom.</p>
<p><strong>Electronic oven control set incorrectly – </strong>See the “Electronic Oven Controls” section.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="166"><strong>Oven temperature too high or too low</strong></td>
<td width="557"><strong>Oven</strong> <strong>temperature</strong> <strong>needs</strong> <strong>adjustment</strong> <strong>– </strong>See “Oven Temperature Control” in the “Electronic Oven Controls” section.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="166"><strong>Display shows messages</strong></td>
<td width="557"><strong>Power</strong> <strong>failure</strong> <strong>(display</strong> <strong>shows</strong> <strong>flashing</strong> <strong>time)</strong> <strong>–</strong> Press CANCEL or CANCEL UPPER to clear the display. On some models, reset the clock, if needed. See the “Clock/Tools” keypad feature in the “Feature Guide” section.</p>
<p><strong>Error code (display shows letter followed by number) – </strong>Press CANCEL or CANCEL UPPER to clear the display. See “Control Display” in the “Electronic Oven Controls” section. If it reappears, call for service. See the “Warranty” section for contact information.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="166"><strong>Clean cycle did not work on all spills</strong></td>
<td width="557"><strong>Several cooking cycles between Clean cycles or spills on oven walls and doors – </strong>Run additional Clean cycles. The affresh® Kitchen and Appliance Cleaner can be used for stubborn soils. See the “Accessories” and “Self-Cleaning Cycle” sections for more information.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table width="988">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="166"><strong>Oven cooking results not what expected</strong></td>
<td width="557"><strong>The set temperature was incorrect – </strong>Double-check the recipe in a reliable cookbook.</p>
<p><strong>Oven</strong> <strong>temperature</strong> <strong>needs adjustment – </strong>See “Oven Temperature Control” in the “Electronic Oven Controls” section.</p>
<p><strong>Oven was not preheated – </strong>See the “Baking and Roasting” section.</p>
<p><strong>Racks were positioned improperly – </strong>See the “Positioning Racks and Bakeware” section.</p>
<p><strong>Not enough air circulation around bakeware – </strong>See the “Positioning Racks and Bakeware” section.</p>
<p><strong>Batter distributed unevenly in pan – </strong>Check that batter is level in the pan.</p>
<p><strong>Darker</strong> <strong>browning</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>food</strong> <strong>caused</strong> <strong>by</strong> <strong>dull</strong> <strong>or</strong> <strong>dark</strong> <strong>bakeware</strong> <strong>–</strong> Lower the oven temperature 25°F (15°C) or move rack to a higher position in the oven.</p>
<p><strong>Lighter browning of food caused by shiny or light colored bakeware – </strong>Move rack to a lower position in the oven.</p>
<p><strong>Incorrect length of cooking time was used – </strong>Adjust cooking time.</p>
<p><strong>Oven door was not closed – </strong>Be sure that the bakeware does not keep the door from closing.</p>
<p><strong>Oven door was opened during cooking – </strong>Oven peeking releases oven heat and can result in longer cooking times.</p>
<p><strong>Rack is too close to bake burner, making baked items too brown on bottom – </strong>Move rack to higher position in the oven.</p>
<p><strong>Pie crusts browning too quickly – </strong>Use aluminum foil to cover the edge of the crust and/or reduce baking temperature.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>ACCESSORIES</h4>
<p>For accessories in the U.S.A., you can visit our website at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.com</a> or call us at 1-800-422-1230. In Canada, visit our website at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.ca/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.ca</a> or call us at 1-800-807-6777.</p>
<p><strong>affresh® Stainless Steel Cleaning Wipes </strong>(stainless steel models)<br />
<strong>Order Part Number</strong> W10355049</p>
<p><strong>affresh® Stainless Steel Cleaner</strong> (stainless steel models)<br />
<strong>Order Part Number</strong> W10355016</p>
<p><strong>affresh® Kitchen and Appliance Cleaner</strong><br />
<strong>Order Part Numbe</strong>r W10355010</p>
<p><strong>Granite Cleaner and Polish</strong><br />
Order Part Number W10275756</p>
<p><strong>Standard Flat Oven Rack</strong><br />
Order Part Number 4448716</p>
<p><strong>Porcelain Broiler Pan and Grid</strong><br />
Order Part Number 4396923</p>
<h4>KITCHENAID® BUILT-IN OVEN &amp; MICROWAVE LIMITED WARRANTY</h4>
<p>ATTACH YOUR RECEIPT HERE. PROOF OF PURCHASE IS REQUIRED TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE.<br />
Please have the following information available when you call the Customer eXperience Center:</p>
<ul>
<li>Name, address and telephone number</li>
<li>Model number and serial number</li>
<li>A clear, detailed description of the problem</li>
<li>Proof of purchase including dealer or retailer name and address</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>IF YOU NEED SERVICE: </strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Before contacting us to arrange service, please determine whether your product requires repair. Some questions can be addressed without service. Please take a few minutes to review the Troubleshooting or Problem Solver section of the Use and Care Guide, scan the QR code on the right to access additional resources, or visit <a href="http://kitchenaid.custhelp.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">http://kitchenaid.custhelp.com</a>.</li>
<li>All warranty service is provided exclusively by our authorized KitchenAid Service Providers. In the U.S. and Canada, direct all requests for warranty  service to: KitchenAid Customer eXperience Center</li>
</ol>
<p>In the U.S.A., call 1-800-422-1230. In Canada, call 1-800-807-6777.<br />
If outside the 50 United States or Canada, contact your authorized KitchenAid dealer to determine whether another warranty applies.</p>
<p><a href="http://kitchenaid.custhelp.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_9-134.webp" /></a><br />
<a href="http://kitchenaid.custhelp.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">http://kitchenaid.custhelp.com</a></p>
<p><strong>TEN YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY </strong></p>
<h5><strong>WHAT IS COVERED</strong></h5>
<p><strong>FIRST YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY (PARTS &amp; LABOR) </strong></p>
<p>For one year from the date of purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated and maintained according to instructions attached or furnished with the product, KitchenAid brand of Whirlpool Corporation or Whirlpool Canada LP (hereafter “KitchenAid”) will pay for factory specified replacement part  and repair labor to correct defects in materials and workmanship that existed when this major appliance was purchased, or at its sole discretion replace the product. In the event of product replacement, your product will be warranted for the remaining term of the original unit’s warranty period.</p>
<p><strong>SECOND THROUGH FIFTH YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY (CERTAIN COMPONENTS PARTS ONLY – LABOR NOT INCLUDED)</strong></p>
<p>In the second through fifth years from the date of original purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated and maintained according to instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid will pay for factory specified parts for the following components to correct non-cosmetic defects in materials or workmanship in these parts that prevent function of this major appliance and that existed when this major appliance was purchased. This is a limited 5-year warranty on the below named parts only and does not include repair labor.</p>
<ul>
<li>Electric element</li>
<li>Solid state touch control system parts</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>SECOND THROUGH TENTH YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY (MICROWAVE OVENS ONLY)</strong></p>
<p>In the second through tenth years from the date of original purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated and maintained according to instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid will pay for factory specified parts for the stainless steel oven cavity/inner door if the partrusts through due to defects in materials or workmanship.</p>
<p>YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE PRODUCT REPAIR AS PROVIDED HEREIN. Service must be provided by a KitchenAid designated service company. This limited warranty is valid only in the United States or Canada and applies only when the major appliance is used in the country in which it was purchased. This limited warranty is effective from the date of original consumer purchase. Proof of original purchase date is required to obtain service under this limited warranty.</p>
<h5>WHAT IS NOT COVERED</h5>
<ol>
<li>Commercial, non-residential or multiple-family use, or use inconsistent with published user, operator or installation instructions.</li>
<li>In-home Instruction on how to use your product.</li>
<li>Service to correct improper product maintenance or installation, installation not in accordance with electrical or plumbing codes or correction of household electrical or plumbing (i.e. house wiring, fuses or water inlet hoses).</li>
<li>Consumable parts (i.e. light bulbs, batteries, air or water filters, etc.).</li>
<li>Defects or damage caused by the use of non-genuine KitchenAid parts or accessories.</li>
<li>Conversion of your product from natural gas or L.P. gas.</li>
<li>Damage from accident, misuse, abuse, fire, floods, acts of God or use with products not approved by KitchenAid.</li>
<li>Repairs to parts or systems to correct product damage or defects caused by unauthorized service, alteration or modification of the appliance.</li>
<li>Cosmetic damage including scratches, dents, chips, and other damage to appliance finishes unless such damage results from defects in materials and workmanship and is reported to KitchenAid within 30 days.</li>
<li>Discoloration, rust or oxidation of surfaces resulting from caustic or corrosive environments including but not limited to high salt concentrations, high moisture or humidity or exposure to chemicals.</li>
<li>Food loss due to product failure.</li>
<li>Pick-up or delivery. This product is intended for in-home repair.</li>
<li>Travel or transportation expenses for service in remote locations<br />
where an authorized KitchenAid servicer is not available.</li>
<li>Removal or reinstallation of inaccessible appliances or built-in fixtures (i.e. trim, decorative panels, flooring, cabinetry, islands,  countertops, drywall, etc.) that interfere with servicing, removal or replacement of the product.</li>
<li>Service or parts for appliances with original model/serial numbers removed, altered or not easily determined.</li>
</ol>
<p>The cost of repair or replacement under these excluded circumstances shall be borne by the customer.</p>
<p><strong>DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES </strong></p>
<p>IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO ONE YEAR OR THE SHORTEST PERIOD ALLOWED BY LAW. Some states and provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of implied warranties of merchantability or fitness, so this limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province.</p>
<p><strong>DISCLAIMER OF REPRESENTATIONS OUTSIDE OF WARRANTY </strong></p>
<p>KitchenAid makes no representations about the quality, durability, or need for service or repair of this major appliance other than the representations contained in this warranty. If you want a longer or more comprehensive warranty than the limited warranty that comes with this major appliance, you should ask KitchenAid or your retailer about buying an extended warranty.</p>
<p><strong>LIMITATION OF REMEDIES; EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES </strong></p>
<p>YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE PRODUCT REPAIR AS PROVIDED HEREIN. KITCHENAID SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states and provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province.</p>
<form id="commentform" class="comment-form" action="https://manuals.plus/wp-comments-post.php" method="post" novalidate="">
<p class="form-submit">
</form>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>KitchenAid Enclosure Blender KSBC1B2 Manual</title>
		<link>https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/ksbc1b2-blender/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[ItsManual]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 23 Aug 2023 05:09:25 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[KitchenAid]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://usemanuals.com/?p=206072</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[KitchenAid Enclosure Blender PARTS AND FEATURES Ingredient cap with measuring cup Lid Blender jar Talon TM blade Power cord socket and removable power cord (not shown) Cord cleat (not shown): To store the cord. Base On/off switch (not shown) Open handle for easy stackability Removable blender jar pad Control dial Pulse toggle switch Start/Stop toggle switch Status indicator light Tamper Front cover with Handle Back cover Thumb Screw IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS When using electrical appliances, basic safety precautions should always be followed, including the following: Read all instructions. To protect against risk of electrical shock, do not put Blender in water or other liquid. This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced physical, sensory, or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge, unless they are closely supervised and instructed concerning use of the appliance by a person responsible for their safety. Close supervision is necessary when any appliance is used by or near children. Children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance. Turn the appliance OFF, then unplug from the outlet when not in use, before assembling or disassembling parts and before cleaning. To unplug, grasp the plug and pull from the outlet. Never pull from the power cord. Avoid contact with moving parts. Do not operate any appliance with a damaged cord or plug or after the appliance malfunctions, or is dropped or damaged in any manner. Contact the manufacturer at their customer service telephone number for information on examination, repair or adjustment. Do not use outdoors. Do not let cord hang over edge of table or counter. Keep hands and utensils, other than the tamper provided, out of the container while blending to reduce the risk of severe injury to persons or damage to the blender. The cover must remain in place when using the tamper through the cover opening. A scraper may be used but must be used only when the blender is not running. Blades are sharp. Handle carefully. Always operate Blender with cover in place. The use of attachments, including canning blender jars, not recommended by KitchenAid may cause a risk of injury to persons. Do not use appliance for other than intended use. When blending hot liquids or ingredients, Ingredient Cap should remain in place over the lid opening. Always start on lowest speed and slowly ramp to desired speed when blending hot liquids or ingredients. GETTING STARTED First, clean all parts and accessories (see “Care and Cleaning” section). Place the blender in a dry and clean area. BLENDER FUNCTION GUIDE The Blender has a preset recipe program: Icy Drinks, Variable speeds, and Pulse functions. Setting Description Blending Time (in min: sec) Suggested Items to Blend Icy Drinks Incorporates icy drink ingredients at low speed, then ramps up to high speed for a complete  blend. 0:22 Ice, whole fruits or vegetables, or frozen fruits. Drinks such as Margaritas, Daiquiris, and blended ice coffee  drinks. Low The Blender will run on low speed until the Start/stop is pressed, or will stop after 6 minutes. N/A Med The Blender will run on medium speed until the Start/stop is pressed, or will stop after 6 minutes. N/A High The Blender will run on high speed until the Start/stop is pressed, or will stop after 6 minutes. N/A Pulse H/L Use Pulse during manual operation to add a boost of power. N/A Variable Times Starts at a slow speed and ramps up to a high speed for optimal blending results. 0:05-0:60 PRODUCT ASSEMBLY GETTING STARTED Plug into a grounded 3 prong outlet. Do not remove ground prong. Do not use an adapter. Do not use an extension cord. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, fire, or electrical shock. USING THE COMMERCIAL BLENDER IMPORTANT : When moving your Blender, always close the Front cover and support/lift from the Blender base. Base will become disengaged from jar if carried by Blender jar or Blender jar handle only. Do not lift by the cover or cover handle. CARE AND CLEANING NOTE: Do not immerse the Blender base or cord in water. Do not use abrasive cleansers or scouring pads to avoid scratching. NOTE: Handle must be removed from the front cover prior to cleaning by removing the two screws inside the front cover. SANITIZING THE BLENDER JAR Remove all contents from the blender jar. Fill ¾ of the jar with a sanitizing solution mix of 1.5 tsp. (7.4 mL) institutional or household bleach in 60 oz (1.75 L) water. Place the lid, and securely place the blender jar onto the blender base. Run the blender on the High Speed setting for 35 seconds. Turn off to let the sanitizing mix sit in the blender jar for an additional 2 minutes. Pour out the solution. Do not rinse the blender jar. Place the lid on the blender jar. Make sure the empty blender jar is fully in place on the blender base. Run the empty Blender for an additional 10 seconds. Do not rinse the jar after sanitizing. Allow the blender jar to air dry. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Plug into a grounded 3 prong outlet. Do not remove ground prong. Do not use an adapter. Do not use an extension cord. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, fire, or electrical shock. Problem Solution Status indicator light is off while unit is plugged in and On/Off switch is in On position: After 10 minutes of no activity, the blender will go into Sleep mode. Flip START/STOP toggle switch up or down to bring the blender back into Standby mode.       Status indicator light is flashing orange color: Indicates error mode. This can be caused by:   using  a spatula or any other utensil that could obstruct   the blade to freely spin, or having an ice cube or hard food in a location that locks up the blade. Unplug the blender and remove the jar from the base, and clear the items. Place the jar back on the base, and then turn on the blender to continue regular use. Blender stops after continuously running for 6 minutes: This is normal operation for variable speed functions. Refer to “Blender function guide” for    details.   Blender  stops  while blending: If blender stops prior to the completion of the selected function, contact an authorized service center for assistance.     If the ingredients of a recipe aren’t blending: An air pocket can be created around the blade causing the ingredients to miss the blade. Use the tamper to push ingredients down into the blade. Refer to “Using the commercial blender” section. For certain recipes, adding more liquid may also assist in incorporating the ingredients.   Blender jar overflows: Unplug and remove the jar pad from the housing to make sure the base is fully dry. The control dial can be detached by pulling it off with force. Wipe dry, and then replace it back.   Troubleshooting does not solve the problem: See the “Warranty and service” section. Contact an Authorized Service Center for assistance. Do not return the Blender to the retailer – retailers do not provide service. WARRANTY AND SERVICE KITCHENAID® COMMERCIAL BLENDER WARRANTY FOR THE 50 UNITED STATES, THE DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, AND CANADA This warranty extends to the purchaser and any succeeding owner for Commercial Blenders operated in the 50 United States, the District of Columbia, and Canada. Length of Warranty: Two Year Full Warranty for Blender Base, Front cover, and Back cover and One Year Full Warranty for Blender Jar from date of purchase. KitchenAid Will Pay for Your Choice of: Hassle-Free Replacement of your Commercial Blender. See the next page for details on how to arrange for service, or call the Customer experience Center toll-free at 1-855-845-9684. OR The replacement parts and repair labor costs to correct defects in materials and workmanship. Service must be provided by an Authorized KitchenAid Service Center. See the KitchenAid® Commercial Blender Warranty for Puerto Rico for details on how to arrange for  service. KitchenAid Will Not Pay for: A. Damage resulting from accident, alteration, misuse or abuse. B. Replacement parts or repair labor costs for Blender operated outside the 50 United States and District of Columbia. C. Replacement of the jar or base unit due to cosmetic issues. DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES; LIMITATION OF REMEDIES IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE EXCLUDED TO THE EXTENT LEGALLY PERMISSIBLE. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT  MAY BE IMPOSED BY LAW ARE LIMITED TO ONE YEAR, OR THE SHORTEST PERIOD ALLOWED BY LAW. SOME STATES AND PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THIS PRODUCT FAILS TO WORK AS WARRANTED, CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SHALL BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT ACCORDING TO THE TERMS OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. KITCHENAID AND KITCHENAID CANADA DO NOT ASSUME ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state or province to   province. KITCHENAID® COMMERCIAL BLENDER BASE WARRANTY FOR PUERTO RICO A limited two year warranty extends   to the purchaser and any succeeding owner for Commercial Blender Bases operated in Puerto Rico. During the warranty period, all service must be handled by an Authorized KitchenAid Service Center.  Please bring the Commercial Blender Base, or ship it prepaid and insured, to the nearest Authorized Service Center. Call toll-free 1-855-845-9684 to learn the location of a Service Center near you. Your repaired Commercial Blender Base will be returned to you prepaid and insured. HASSLE-FREE REPLACEMENT WARRANTY — 50 UNITED STATES AND DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA We’re so confident the quality of our products meets the exacting standards of KitchenAid that, if your Commercial Blender Base should fail within the first two years of ownership, KitchenAid will arrange to deliver an identical or comparable replacement to your door free of charge and arrange to have your original Commercial Blender Base returned to us. Your replacement unit will also be covered by our two year limited warranty. Please follow these instructions to receive this quality service. If your Commercial Blender Base should fail within the first two years of ownership, simply call our toll-free Customer experience Center at 1-855-845-9684 Monday through Friday, 8 a.m. to 8 p.m. (Eastern Time). Give the consultant your complete shipping address. (No P.O. Box numbers, please.) When you receive your replacement Commercial Blender Base, use the carton and packing materials to pack up your original Commercial Blender Base. HASSLE-FREE REPLACEMENT WARRANTY — CANADA We’re so confident the quality of our products meets the exacting standards of the KitchenAid brand that, if your Commercial Blender Base should fail within the first two years of ownership, KitchenAid Canada will replace your Commercial Blender Base with an identical or comparable replacement. Your replacement unit will also be covered by our two year limited warranty. Please follow these instructions to receive this quality service. If your Commercial Blender Base should fail within the first two years of ownership, take the Commercial Blender Base or ship collect to an Authorized KitchenAid Service Centre. In the carton include your name and complete shipping address along with a copy of the proof of purchase (register receipt, credit card slip, etc.). Your replacement Commercial Blender Base will be returned prepaid and insured. If you are unable to obtain satisfactory service in this manner call our toll-free Customer experience Centre at 1-800-807-6777. Or write to us at: Customer eXperience Centre KitchenAid Canada 200 – 6750 Century Ave. Mississauga, ON L5N 0B7 KITCHENAID® COMMERCIAL BLENDER JAR WARRANTY FOR PUERTO RICO A limited one year warranty extends to the purchaser and any succeeding owner for Commercial Blender Jars operated in Puerto Rico. During the warranty period, all service must be handled by an Authorized KitchenAid Service Center. Please bring the Commercial Blender Jar, or ship it prepaid and insured, to the nearest Authorized Service Center. Call toll-free 1-855-845-9684 to learn the location of a Service Center near you. Your repaired Commercial Blender Jar will be returned to you prepaid and insured. HASSLE-FREE REPLACEMENT WARRANTY — 50 UNITED STATES AND DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA We’re so confident the quality of our products meets the exacting standards of KitchenAid that, if your Commercial Blender Jar should fail within the first one year of ownership, KitchenAid will arrange to deliver an identical or comparable replacement to your door free of charge and arrange to have your original Commercial Blender Jar returned to us. Your replacement unit will also be covered by our one year limited warranty. Please follow these instructions to receive this quality service. If your Commercial Blender Jar should fail within the first one year of ownership, simply call our toll-free Customer experience Center at 1-855-845-9684 Monday through Friday, 8 a.m. to 8 p.m. (Eastern Time). Give the consultant your complete shipping address. (No P.O. Box numbers, please.) When you receive your replacement Commercial Blender Jar, use the carton and packing materials to pack up your original Commercial Blender Jar. HASSLE-FREE REPLACEMENT WARRANTY – CANADA We’re so confident the quality of our products meets the exacting standards of the KitchenAid brand that, if your Commercial Blender Jar should fail within the first one year of ownership, KitchenAid Canada will replace your Commercial Blender Jar with an identical or comparable replacement. Your replacement unit will also be covered by our one year limited warranty. Please follow these instructions to receive this quality service. If your Commercial Blender Jar should fail within the first one year of ownership, take the Commercial Blender Jar or ship collect to an Authorized KitchenAid Service Centre. In the carton include your name and complete shipping address along with a copy of the proof of purchase (register receipt, credit card slip, etc.). Your replacement Commercial Blender Jar will be returned prepaid and insured. If you are unable to obtain satisfactory service in this manner call our toll-free Customer experience Centre at 1-800-807-6777. Or write to us at: Customer experience Centre KitchenAid Canada 200 – 6750 Century Ave. Mississauga, ON L5N 0B7 ARRANGING FOR SERVICE AFTER THE WARRANTY EXPIRES, OR ORDERING ACCESSORIES AND REPLACEMENT PARTS In the United States and Puerto Rico: For service information, or to order accessories or replacement parts, call toll-free at 1-855-845-9684 or write to: Customer eXperience Center, KitchenAid Small Appliances, P.O. Box 218, St. Joseph, MI 49085-0218 Outside the United States and Puerto Rico: Consult your local KitchenAid dealer or the store where you purchased the Commercial Blender for information on how to obtain service. For service information in Canada: Call toll-free 1-800-807-6777. Or write to: Customer experience Centre KitchenAid Canada 200 – 6750 Century Ave. Mississauga, ON L5N 0B7 [...]<p><a class="btn btn-secondary understrap-read-more-link" href="https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/ksbc1b2-blender/">Read More...</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h3><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/unnamed-file-87.webp" /></h3>
<h4>KitchenAid Enclosure Blender</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/product-190.webp" /></p>
<h4>PARTS AND FEATURES</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/image-1-153.webp" /></p>
<ol>
<li>Ingredient cap with measuring cup</li>
<li>Lid</li>
<li>Blender jar</li>
<li>Talon TM blade</li>
<li>Power cord socket and removable power cord (not shown)</li>
<li>Cord cleat (not shown): To store the cord.</li>
<li>Base</li>
<li>On/off switch (not shown)</li>
<li>Open handle for easy stackability</li>
<li>Removable blender jar pad</li>
<li>Control dial</li>
<li>Pulse toggle switch</li>
<li>Start/Stop toggle switch</li>
<li>Status indicator light</li>
<li>Tamper</li>
<li>Front cover with Handle</li>
<li>Back cover</li>
<li>Thumb Screw</li>
</ol>
<h4>IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS</h4>
<p>When using electrical appliances, basic safety precautions should always be followed, including the following:</p>
<ol>
<li>Read all instructions.</li>
<li>To protect against risk of electrical shock, do not put Blender in water or other liquid.</li>
<li>This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced physical, sensory, or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge, unless they are closely supervised and instructed concerning use of the appliance by a person responsible for their safety. Close supervision is necessary when any appliance is used by or near children. Children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance.</li>
<li>Turn the appliance OFF, then unplug from the outlet when not in use, before assembling or disassembling parts and before cleaning. To unplug, grasp the plug and pull from the outlet. Never pull from the power cord.</li>
<li>Avoid contact with moving parts.</li>
<li>Do not operate any appliance with a damaged cord or plug or after the appliance malfunctions, or is dropped or damaged in any manner. Contact the manufacturer at their customer service telephone number for information on examination, repair or adjustment.</li>
<li>Do not use outdoors.</li>
<li>Do not let cord hang over edge of table or counter.</li>
<li>Keep hands and utensils, other than the tamper provided, out of the container while blending to reduce the risk of severe injury to persons or damage to the blender. The cover must remain in place when using the tamper through the cover opening. A scraper may be used but must be used only when the blender is not running.</li>
<li>Blades are sharp. Handle carefully.</li>
<li>Always operate Blender with cover in place.</li>
<li>The use of attachments, including canning blender jars, not recommended by KitchenAid may cause a risk of injury to persons.</li>
<li>Do not use appliance for other than intended use.</li>
<li>When blending hot liquids or ingredients, Ingredient Cap should remain in place over the lid opening. Always start on lowest speed and slowly ramp to desired speed when blending hot liquids or ingredients.</li>
</ol>
<h4>GETTING STARTED</h4>
<p>First, clean all parts and accessories (see “Care and Cleaning” section). Place the blender in a dry and clean area.</p>
<h5>BLENDER FUNCTION GUIDE</h5>
<p>The Blender has a preset recipe program: Icy Drinks, Variable speeds, and Pulse functions.</p>
<table width="796">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="61">Setting</td>
<td width="187">Description</td>
<td width="72">Blending Time</p>
<p>(in min: sec)</td>
<td width="137">Suggested Items to Blend</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="61">Icy Drinks</td>
<td width="187">Incorporates icy drink ingredients at low speed, then ramps up to high speed for a complete  blend.</td>
<td width="72">0:22</td>
<td width="137">Ice, whole fruits or vegetables, or frozen fruits. Drinks such as Margaritas, Daiquiris, and blended ice coffee  drinks.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="61">Low</td>
<td width="187">The Blender will run on low speed until the Start/stop is pressed, or will stop after 6 minutes.</td>
<td width="72">N/A</td>
<td width="137"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="61">Med</td>
<td width="187">The Blender will run on medium speed until the Start/stop is pressed, or will stop after 6 minutes.</td>
<td width="72">N/A</td>
<td width="137"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="61">High</td>
<td width="187">The Blender will run on high speed until the Start/stop is pressed, or will stop after 6 minutes.</td>
<td width="72">N/A</td>
<td width="137"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="61">Pulse H/L</td>
<td width="187">Use Pulse during manual operation to add a boost of power.</td>
<td width="72">N/A</td>
<td width="137"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="61">Variable Times</td>
<td width="187">Starts at a slow speed and ramps up to a high speed for optimal blending results.</td>
<td width="72">0:05-0:60</td>
<td width="137"></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>PRODUCT ASSEMBLY</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/image-2-176.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>GETTING STARTED</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/image-3-149.webp" /></p>
<ul>
<li>Plug into a grounded 3 prong outlet.</li>
<li>Do not remove ground prong.</li>
<li>Do not use an adapter.</li>
<li>Do not use an extension cord.</li>
<li>Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, fire, or electrical shock.</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/image-4-130.webp" /></p>
<h4>USING THE COMMERCIAL BLENDER</h4>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT :</strong> When moving your Blender, always close the Front cover and support/lift from the Blender base. Base will become disengaged from jar if carried by Blender jar or Blender jar handle only. Do not lift by the cover or cover handle.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/image-5-115.webp" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/image-6-102.webp" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/image-7-91.webp" /></p>
<h4>CARE AND CLEANING</h4>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Do not immerse the Blender base or cord in water. Do not use abrasive cleansers or scouring pads to avoid scratching.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/image-8-82.webp" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/image-9-71.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Handle must be removed from the front cover prior to cleaning by removing the two screws inside the front cover.</p>
<p><strong>SANITIZING THE BLENDER JAR</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Remove all contents from the blender jar.</li>
<li>Fill ¾ of the jar with a sanitizing solution mix of 1.5 tsp. (7.4 mL) institutional or household bleach in 60 oz (1.75 L) water. Place the lid, and securely place the blender jar onto the blender base.</li>
<li>Run the blender on the High Speed setting for 35 seconds.</li>
<li>Turn off to let the sanitizing mix sit in the blender jar for an additional 2 minutes.</li>
<li>Pour out the solution. Do not rinse the blender jar.</li>
<li>Place the lid on the blender jar. Make sure the empty blender jar is fully in place on the blender base. Run the empty Blender for an additional 10 seconds. Do not rinse the jar after sanitizing.</li>
<li>Allow the blender jar to air dry.</li>
</ol>
<h4>TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE</h4>
<ul>
<li>Plug into a grounded 3 prong outlet.</li>
<li>Do not remove ground prong.</li>
<li>Do not use an adapter.</li>
<li>Do not use an extension cord.</li>
<li>Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, fire, or electrical shock.</li>
</ul>
<table width="1035">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="167"><strong>Problem</strong></td>
<td width="290"><strong>Solution</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="167">Status indicator light is off while unit is plugged in and On/Off switch is in On position:</td>
<td width="290">After 10 minutes of no activity, the blender will go into Sleep mode. Flip START/STOP toggle switch up or down to bring the blender back into Standby mode.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="167"><strong> </strong></p>
<p><strong> </strong></p>
<p><strong> </strong></p>
<p>Status indicator light is flashing orange color:</td>
<td width="290">Indicates error mode. This can be caused by:   using  a spatula or any other utensil that could obstruct   the</p>
<p>blade to freely spin, or having an ice cube or hard food in a location that locks up the blade.</p>
<p>Unplug the blender and remove the jar from the base, and clear the items. Place the jar back on the base, and then turn on the blender to continue regular use.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="167">Blender stops after continuously running for 6 minutes:</td>
<td width="290">This is normal operation for variable speed functions. Refer to “Blender function guide” for    details.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="167"><strong> </strong></p>
<p>Blender  stops  while blending:</td>
<td width="290">If blender stops prior to the completion of the selected function, contact an authorized service center for assistance.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="167"><strong> </strong></p>
<p><strong> </strong></p>
<p>If the ingredients of a recipe aren’t blending:</td>
<td width="290">An air pocket can be created around the blade causing the ingredients to miss the blade. Use the tamper to push ingredients down into the blade. Refer to “Using the commercial blender” section. For certain recipes, adding more liquid may also assist in incorporating the ingredients.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="167"><strong> </strong></p>
<p>Blender jar overflows:</td>
<td width="290">Unplug and remove the jar pad from the housing to make sure the base is fully dry. The control dial can be detached by pulling it off with force. Wipe dry, and then replace it back.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="167"><strong> </strong></p>
<p>Troubleshooting does not solve the problem:</td>
<td width="290">See the “Warranty and service” section. Contact an Authorized Service Center for assistance.</p>
<p>Do not return the Blender to the retailer – retailers do not provide service.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>WARRANTY AND SERVICE</h4>
<p>KITCHENAID® COMMERCIAL BLENDER WARRANTY FOR THE 50 UNITED STATES, THE DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, AND CANADA</p>
<p>This warranty extends to the purchaser and any succeeding owner for Commercial Blenders operated in the 50 United States, the District of Columbia, and Canada.</p>
<table width="1279">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>Length of Warranty:</strong></td>
<td width="320">Two Year Full Warranty for Blender Base, Front cover, and Back cover and One Year Full Warranty for Blender Jar from date of purchase.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>KitchenAid Will Pay</strong> <strong>for Your Choice of:</strong></td>
<td width="320">Hassle-Free Replacement of your Commercial Blender.<br />
See the next page for details on how to arrange for service, or call the Customer experience Center toll-free at <strong>1-855-845-9684</strong>. OR The replacement parts and repair labor costs to correct defects in materials and workmanship. Service must be provided by an Authorized KitchenAid Service Center. See the KitchenAid® Commercial Blender Warranty for Puerto Rico for details on how to arrange for  service.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>KitchenAid Will</strong> <strong>Not Pay for:</strong></td>
<td width="320">A. Damage resulting from accident, alteration, misuse or abuse.<br />
B. Replacement parts or repair labor costs for Blender operated outside the 50 United States and District of Columbia.<br />
C. Replacement of the jar or base unit due to cosmetic issues.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" width="456"><strong>DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES; LIMITATION OF REMEDIES</strong></p>
<p>IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE EXCLUDED TO THE EXTENT LEGALLY PERMISSIBLE. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT  MAY BE IMPOSED BY LAW ARE LIMITED TO ONE YEAR, OR THE SHORTEST PERIOD ALLOWED BY LAW. SOME STATES AND PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.</p>
<p>IF THIS PRODUCT FAILS TO WORK AS WARRANTED, CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SHALL BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT ACCORDING TO THE TERMS OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. KITCHENAID AND KITCHENAID CANADA DO NOT ASSUME ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state or province to   province.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>KITCHENAID® COMMERCIAL BLENDER BASE WARRANTY FOR PUERTO RICO</strong></p>
<p>A limited two year warranty extends   to the purchaser and any succeeding owner for Commercial Blender Bases operated in Puerto Rico. During the warranty period, all service must be handled by an Authorized KitchenAid Service Center.  Please bring the Commercial Blender Base, or ship it prepaid and insured, to the nearest Authorized Service Center. Call toll-free <strong>1-855-845-9684 </strong>to learn the location of a Service Center near you. Your repaired Commercial Blender Base will be returned to you prepaid and insured.</p>
<p><strong>HASSLE-FREE REPLACEMENT WARRANTY — 50 UNITED STATES AND DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA</strong></p>
<p>We’re so confident the quality of our products meets the exacting standards of KitchenAid that, if your Commercial Blender Base should fail within the first two years of ownership, KitchenAid will arrange to deliver an identical or comparable replacement to your door free of charge and arrange to have your original Commercial Blender Base returned to us. Your replacement unit will also be covered by our two year limited warranty. Please follow these instructions to receive this quality service.<br />
If your Commercial Blender Base should fail within the first two years of ownership, simply call our toll-free Customer experience Center at 1-855-845-9684 Monday through Friday, 8 a.m. to 8 p.m. (Eastern Time). Give the consultant your complete shipping address. (No P.O. Box numbers, please.)<br />
When you receive your replacement Commercial Blender Base, use the carton and packing materials to pack up your original Commercial Blender Base.</p>
<p><strong>HASSLE-FREE REPLACEMENT WARRANTY — CANADA</strong></p>
<p>We’re so confident the quality of our products meets the exacting standards of the KitchenAid brand that, if your Commercial Blender Base should fail within the first two years of ownership, KitchenAid Canada will replace your Commercial Blender Base with an identical or comparable replacement. Your replacement unit will also be covered by our two year limited warranty. Please follow these instructions to receive this quality service.<br />
If your Commercial Blender Base should fail within the first two years of ownership, take the Commercial Blender Base or ship collect to an Authorized KitchenAid Service Centre. In the carton include your name and complete shipping address along with a copy of the proof of purchase (register receipt, credit card slip, etc.). Your replacement Commercial Blender Base will be returned prepaid and insured. If you are unable to obtain satisfactory service in this manner call our toll-free Customer<br />
experience Centre at 1-800-807-6777. Or write to us at:<br />
Customer eXperience Centre<br />
KitchenAid Canada<br />
200 – 6750 Century Ave.<br />
Mississauga, ON L5N 0B7</p>
<p><strong>KITCHENAID® COMMERCIAL BLENDER JAR WARRANTY FOR PUERTO RICO</strong></p>
<p>A limited one year warranty extends to the purchaser and any succeeding owner for Commercial Blender Jars operated in Puerto Rico. During the warranty period, all service must be handled by an Authorized KitchenAid Service Center. Please bring the Commercial Blender Jar, or ship it prepaid and insured, to the nearest Authorized Service Center. Call toll-free 1-855-845-9684 to learn the location of a Service Center near you.<br />
Your repaired Commercial Blender Jar will be returned to you prepaid and insured.</p>
<p><strong>HASSLE-FREE REPLACEMENT WARRANTY — 50 UNITED STATES AND DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA</strong></p>
<p>We’re so confident the quality of our products meets the exacting standards of KitchenAid that, if your Commercial Blender Jar should fail within the first one year of ownership, KitchenAid will arrange to deliver an identical or comparable replacement to your door free of charge and arrange to have your original Commercial Blender Jar returned to us. Your replacement unit will also be covered by our one year limited warranty. Please follow these instructions to receive this quality service.<br />
If your Commercial Blender Jar should fail within the first one year of ownership, simply call our toll-free Customer experience Center at 1-855-845-9684 Monday through Friday, 8 a.m. to 8 p.m. (Eastern Time). Give the consultant your complete shipping address. (No P.O. Box numbers, please.)<br />
When you receive your replacement Commercial Blender Jar, use the carton and packing materials to pack up your original Commercial Blender Jar.</p>
<p><strong>HASSLE-FREE REPLACEMENT WARRANTY – CANADA</strong></p>
<p>We’re so confident the quality of our products meets the exacting standards of the KitchenAid brand that, if your Commercial Blender Jar should fail within the first one year of ownership, KitchenAid Canada will replace your Commercial Blender Jar with an identical or comparable replacement. Your replacement unit will also be covered by our one year limited warranty. Please follow these instructions to receive this quality service.<br />
If your Commercial Blender Jar should fail within the first one year of ownership, take the Commercial Blender Jar or ship collect to an Authorized KitchenAid Service Centre. In the carton include your name and complete shipping address along with a copy of the proof of purchase (register receipt, credit card slip, etc.). Your replacement Commercial Blender Jar will be returned prepaid and insured. If you are unable to obtain satisfactory service in this manner call our toll-free Customer experience Centre at 1-800-807-6777.<br />
Or write to us at:<br />
Customer experience Centre<br />
KitchenAid Canada<br />
200 – 6750 Century Ave.<br />
Mississauga, ON L5N 0B7</p>
<p><strong>ARRANGING FOR SERVICE AFTER THE WARRANTY EXPIRES, OR ORDERING ACCESSORIES AND REPLACEMENT PARTS</strong></p>
<p>In the United States and Puerto Rico:<br />
For service information, or to order accessories or replacement parts, call toll-free at 1-855-845-9684 or write to:<br />
Customer eXperience Center,<br />
KitchenAid Small Appliances,<br />
P.O. Box 218, St. Joseph, MI 49085-0218</p>
<p><strong>Outside the United States and Puerto Rico:</strong></p>
<p>Consult your local KitchenAid dealer or the store where you purchased the Commercial Blender for information on how to obtain service.</p>
<p><strong>For service information in Canada:</strong></p>
<p>Call toll-free 1-800-807-6777.<br />
Or write to:<br />
Customer experience Centre<br />
KitchenAid Canada<br />
200 – 6750 Century Ave.<br />
Mississauga, ON L5N 0B7<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/unnamed-file-87.webp" /></p>
<form id="commentform" class="comment-form" action="https://manuals.plus/wp-comments-post.php" method="post" novalidate="">
<p class="form-submit">
</form>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>KitchenAid KHMB732 7 Speed Cordless Hand Mixer Manual</title>
		<link>https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/khmb732-hand-mixer/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[ItsManual]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Sat, 22 Jul 2023 09:00:22 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[KitchenAid]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://usemanuals.com/?p=170392</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[KitchenAid KHMB732 7 Speed Cordless Hand Mixer PARTS AND FEATURES Upright stance Motor body Stainless steel turbo beatersTM II Eject button Battery status indicator Charging port Speed controller Handle Charger adapter Charger adapter pin PRODUCT SAFETY When using electrical appliances, basic safety precautions should always be followed, including the following: Read all instructions. To protect against risk of electrical shock, do not put the Motor body of Cordless Hand Mixer, Charger adapter, cord, or electrical plug in water or other liquid. This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced physical, sensory, or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge, unless they are closely supervised and instructed concerning use of the appliance by a person responsible for their safety. Close supervision is necessary when any appliance is used by or near children. Children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance. Turn the appliance OFF before assembling or disassembling parts and before cleaning. To unplug the charger, grasp the plug and pull from the outlet. Never pull from the power cord. Do not use an extension cord. Plug charger directly into an electric outlet. Use only with the charger provided with the appliance. Do not attempt to use this charger with any other product. Likewise, do not attempt to charge this appliance with any other charger. Do not incinerate this appliance even if it is severely damaged. The batteries can explode in a fire. Avoid contacting moving parts. Keep hands, hair clothing, as well as spatulas and other utensils away from beaters and accessories during operation to reduce the risk of injury to persons or damage to the Cordless Hand Mixer. Do not operate any appliance or Charger adapter with a damaged cord or plug or after the appliance malfunctions, or is dropped or damaged in any manner. Contact the manufacturer at their customer service telephone number for information on examination, repair, or adjustment. The use of attachments not recommended or sold by KitchenAid may cause fire, electric shock, or injury. Do not use the appliance outdoors. Do not let cord hang over edge of table or counter. Never leave the appliance unattended while it is in operation. Do not let cord contact hot surface, including the stove. Remove beaters or accessories from the Cordless Hand Mixer before washing. Refer to the “Care and Cleaning” section for instructions on cleaning the surfaces in contact with food. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Charger adapter: Input: 120 Volts 60 Hz Cordless Hand Mixer: Voltage: 12 Volts NOTE: If the plug does not fit fully in the outlet, contact a qualified electrician. Do not modify the plug in any way. LITHIUM-ION BATTERY OPERATED PRODUCT DISPOSAL Always dispose the battery operated products according to federal, state, and local regulations. Contact a recycling agency in your area for recycling locations. GETTING STARTED BEFORE FIRST USE Charge the battery until the Battery status indicator turns solid green. Clean all the parts. (see “Care and Cleaning” section). Remove all packaging materials, if present. BATTERY STATUS Battery Status % Battery Status Full Charge* Quick Charge** Green 30 % to 100 % 200 cookies 1 cake batter Yellow 15 % – 30 % (Consider Charging) Red Lower than 15 % (Need to charge soon) Full Charge: The Cordless Hand Mixer will be fully charged in 2 hours. The Battery status indicator pulses when it charges and turns to solid green with a full charge. The Cordless Hand Mixer will prepare approximately 200 cookies, based on 4 batches of chocolate chip cookies when following the recommended battery maintenance. Quick Charge: In 10 minutes the Cordless Hand Mixer will quick charge. The Cordless Hand Mixer will stir up a cake batter recipe with one quick charge when following the recommended battery maintenance. NOTE: Make sure to charge the battery, when the Battery status indicator is yellow. NOTE: It is best to store the Cordless Hand Mixer at room temperature. BATTERY CHARGING PRODUCT ASSEMBLY IMPORTANT: Make sure that the Speed controller is at “O” position before attaching and removing Stainless steel turbo beatersTM II. There are two Stainless steel turbo beatersTM II. One is without a collar (A) and another with a collar (B). Insert the Stainless steel turbo beatersTM II without a collar (A) into the smaller opening (C) and Stainless steel turbo beatersTM II with a collar (B) into the larger opening (D). Align and push to lock into place. Both the Stainless steel turbo beatersTM II will click in. PRODUCT USAGE NOTE: Make sure the Cordless Hand Mixer is charged before use. Always start mixing at the lowest speed, and by sliding the Speed controller, increase the speed according to the recipes. To increase the speed, slide the Speed controller forward ( ). To decrease the speed, slide the Speed controller backward ( ). When finished, slide the Speed controller to “O” position. CARE AND CLEANING IMPORTANT: Make sure the Speed controller is at “O” before attaching or removing Stainless steel turbo beatersTM II. Press the Eject button to release the Stainless steel turbo beatersTM II from the Cordless Hand Mixer. Always remove the Stainless steel turbo beatersTM II from the Cordless Hand Mixer before cleaning. Wash in dishwasher, or by hand in warm, soapy water. Rinse and wipe dry. Wipe the Cordless Hand Mixer with a damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth. NOTE: To avoid damage to the Cordless Hand Mixer, do not immerse in water. For detailed information about the Cordless Hand Mixer: Visit www.kitchenaid.com/quickstart for additional instructions with videos, inspiring recipes, and tips on how to use and clean your Cordless Hand Mixer. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Problem Solution If the Cordless Hand Mixer fails to start: Check if the product is charged. Charge the battery when the Battery status indicator is red or when the Battery is completely drained. If the Cordless Hand Mixer is not getting  charged: If you have a circuit breaker box, make sure that the circuit is closed. If the problem cannot be corrected: See the “Warranty and Service” sections. Do not return the Cordless Hand Mixer to the retailer. Retailers do not provide service. WARRANTY AND SERVICE KITCHENAID® CORDLESS HAND MIXER WARRANTY FOR THE 50 UNITED STATES, THE DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, PUERTO RICO, AND CANADA This warranty extends to the purchaser and any succeeding owner for the Cordless Hand Mixer operated in the 50 United States, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and Canada. Length of Warranty: One Year Full Warranty from date of purchase. KitchenAid Will Pay for Your Choice of: Hassle-Free Replacement of your Cordless Hand Mixer See the next page for details on how to arrange for service, or call the Customer eXperience Center toll-free at 1.800.541.6390. OR The replacement parts and repair labor costs to correct defects in materials and workmanship. Service must be provided by an Authorized KitchenAid Service Center. KitchenAid Will Not Pay for: A. Repairs when your Cordless Hand Mixer is used in other than normal single family home use. B. Damage resulting from accident, alteration, misuse or abuse. C. Any shipping or handling costs to deliver your Cordless Hand Mixer to an Authorized Service Center. D. Replacement parts or repair labor costs for the Cordless Hand Mixers operated outside the 50 United States, District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and Canada. DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES; LIMITATION OF REMEDIES IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE EXCLUDED TO THE EXTENT LEGALLY PERMISSIBLE. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY BE IMPOSED BY LAW ARE LIMITED TO ONE YEAR, OR THE SHORTEST PERIOD ALLOWED BY LAW. SOME STATES AND PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THIS PRODUCT FAILS TO WORK AS WARRANTED, CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SHALL BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT ACCORDING TO THE TERMS OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. KITCHENAID AND KITCHENAID CANADA DO NOT ASSUME ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state or province to province. [...]<p><a class="btn btn-secondary understrap-read-more-link" href="https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/khmb732-hand-mixer/">Read More...</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h3><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/logo-236-2.webp" /></h3>
<h4>KitchenAid KHMB732 7 Speed Cordless Hand Mixer</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/product-296.webp" /></p>
<h4>PARTS AND FEATURES</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-1-130.webp" /></p>
<ol>
<li>Upright stance</li>
<li>Motor body</li>
<li>Stainless steel turbo beatersTM II</li>
<li>Eject button</li>
<li>Battery status indicator</li>
<li>Charging port</li>
<li>Speed controller</li>
<li>Handle</li>
<li>Charger adapter</li>
<li>Charger adapter pin</li>
</ol>
<h4>PRODUCT SAFETY</h4>
<p><img fetchpriority="high" decoding="async" class="aligncenter wp-image-458651 ezlazyloaded" src="images/7.webp" sizes="" srcset="" alt="image" width="943" height="579" data-ezsrcset="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2021/08/image-79-1024x630.png?ezimgfmt=ng:webp/ngcb1 1024w,https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2021/08/image-79-300x185.png?ezimgfmt=ng:webp/ngcb1 300w,https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2021/08/image-79-768x472.png?ezimgfmt=ng:webp/ngcb1 768w,https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2021/08/image-79.png?ezimgfmt=ng:webp/ngcb1 1055w" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2021/08/image-79-1024x630.png?ezimgfmt=rs:612x377/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" /></p>
<p>When using electrical appliances, basic safety precautions should always be followed, including the following:</p>
<ol>
<li>Read all instructions.</li>
<li>To protect against risk of electrical shock, do not put the Motor body of Cordless Hand Mixer, Charger adapter, cord, or electrical plug in water or other liquid.</li>
<li>This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced physical, sensory, or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge, unless they are closely supervised and instructed concerning use of the appliance by a person responsible for their safety. Close supervision is necessary when any appliance is used by or near children. Children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance.</li>
<li>Turn the appliance OFF before assembling or disassembling parts and before cleaning. To unplug the charger, grasp the plug and pull from the outlet. Never pull from the power cord.</li>
<li>Do not use an extension cord. Plug charger directly into an electric outlet.</li>
<li>Use only with the charger provided with the appliance. Do not attempt to use this charger with any other product. Likewise, do not attempt to charge this appliance with any other charger.</li>
<li>Do not incinerate this appliance even if it is severely damaged. The batteries can explode in a fire.</li>
<li>Avoid contacting moving parts. Keep hands, hair clothing, as well as spatulas and other utensils away from beaters and accessories during operation to reduce the risk of injury to persons or damage to the Cordless Hand Mixer.</li>
<li>Do not operate any appliance or Charger adapter with a damaged cord or plug or after the appliance malfunctions, or is dropped or damaged in any manner. Contact the manufacturer at their customer service telephone number for information on examination, repair, or adjustment.</li>
<li>The use of attachments not recommended or sold by KitchenAid may cause fire, electric shock, or injury.</li>
<li>Do not use the appliance outdoors.</li>
<li>Do not let cord hang over edge of table or counter.</li>
<li>Never leave the appliance unattended while it is in operation.</li>
<li>Do not let cord contact hot surface, including the stove.</li>
<li>Remove beaters or accessories from the Cordless Hand Mixer before washing.</li>
<li>Refer to the “Care and Cleaning” section for instructions on cleaning the surfaces in contact with food.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS</strong></p>
<p><strong>Charger adapter:</strong><br />
<strong>Input:</strong> 120 Volts 60 Hz<br />
<strong>Cordless Hand Mixer:</strong><br />
<strong>Voltage:</strong> 12 Volts</p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> If the plug does not fit fully in the outlet, contact a qualified electrician. Do not modify the plug in any way.</p>
<p><strong>LITHIUM-ION BATTERY OPERATED PRODUCT DISPOSAL</strong><br />
Always dispose the battery operated products according to federal, state, and local regulations. Contact a recycling agency in your area for recycling locations.</p>
<h4>GETTING STARTED</h4>
<p><strong>BEFORE FIRST USE</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Charge the battery until the Battery status indicator turns solid green.</li>
<li>Clean all the parts. (see “Care and Cleaning” section).</li>
<li>Remove all packaging materials, if present.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>BATTERY STATUS</strong></p>
<table width="1009">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="63">Battery Status</td>
<td width="217">% Battery Status</td>
<td width="79">Full Charge*</td>
<td width="98">Quick Charge**</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="63">Green</td>
<td width="217">30 % to 100 %</td>
<td rowspan="3" width="79">200 cookies</td>
<td rowspan="3" width="98">1 cake batter</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="63">Yellow</td>
<td width="217">15 % – 30 % (Consider Charging)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="63">Red</td>
<td width="217">Lower than 15 % (Need to charge soon)</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Full Charge:</strong><br />
The Cordless Hand Mixer will be fully charged in 2 hours. The Battery status indicator pulses when it charges and turns to solid green with a full charge.<br />
The Cordless Hand Mixer will prepare approximately 200 cookies, based on 4 batches of chocolate chip cookies when following the recommended battery maintenance.</p>
<p><strong>Quick Charge:</strong><br />
In 10 minutes the Cordless Hand Mixer will quick charge. The Cordless Hand Mixer will stir up a cake batter recipe with one quick charge when following the recommended battery maintenance.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Make sure to charge the battery, when the Battery status indicator is yellow.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> It is best to store the Cordless Hand Mixer at room temperature.</p>
<h4>BATTERY CHARGING</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-2-125-1024x452-1.webp" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-3-111.webp" /></p>
<h4>PRODUCT ASSEMBLY</h4>
<ol>
<li><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> Make sure that the Speed controller is at “O” position before attaching and removing Stainless steel turbo beatersTM II.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-4-99.webp" /></li>
<li>There are two Stainless steel turbo beatersTM II. One is without a collar (A) and another with a collar (B).<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-5-83.webp" /></li>
<li>Insert the Stainless steel turbo beatersTM II without a collar (A) into the smaller opening (C) and Stainless steel turbo beatersTM II with a collar (B) into the larger opening (D). Align and push to lock into place. Both the Stainless steel turbo beatersTM II will click in.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-6-75.webp" /></p>
<h4>PRODUCT USAGE</h4>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Make sure the Cordless Hand Mixer is charged before use.</p>
<ol>
<li>Always start mixing at the lowest speed, and by sliding the Speed controller, increase the speed according to the recipes.</li>
<li>To increase the speed, slide the Speed controller forward ( ). To decrease the speed, slide the Speed controller backward ( ).<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-7-70-1024x317-1.webp" /></li>
<li>When finished, slide the Speed controller to “O” position.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-8-58.webp" /></p>
<h4>CARE AND CLEANING</h4>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> Make sure the Speed controller is at “O” before attaching or removing Stainless steel turbo beatersTM II.</p>
<ol>
<li>Press the Eject button to release the Stainless steel turbo beatersTM II from the Cordless Hand Mixer.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-9-47.webp" /></li>
<li>Always remove the Stainless steel turbo beatersTM II from the Cordless Hand Mixer before cleaning. Wash in dishwasher, or by hand in warm, soapy water. Rinse and wipe dry.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-10-66-1.webp" /></li>
<li>Wipe the Cordless Hand Mixer with a damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/image-11-62-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> To avoid damage to the Cordless Hand Mixer, do not immerse in water.</p>
<p>For detailed information about the Cordless Hand Mixer:<br />
Visit <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.com/quickstart" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.com/quickstart</a> for additional instructions with videos, inspiring recipes, and tips on how to use and clean your Cordless Hand Mixer.</p>
<h4>TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE</h4>
<table width="934">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="167"><strong>Problem</strong></td>
<td width="289"><strong>Solution</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="167">If the Cordless Hand Mixer fails to start:</td>
<td width="289">Check if the product is charged.<br />
Charge the battery when the Battery status indicator is red or when the Battery is completely drained.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="167">If the Cordless Hand Mixer is not getting  charged:</td>
<td width="289">If you have a circuit breaker box, make sure that the circuit is closed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="167">If the problem cannot be corrected:</td>
<td width="289">See the “Warranty and Service” sections.<br />
Do not return the Cordless Hand Mixer to the retailer. Retailers do not provide service.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>WARRANTY AND SERVICE</h4>
<p>KITCHENAID® CORDLESS HAND MIXER WARRANTY FOR THE 50 UNITED STATES, THE DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, PUERTO RICO, AND CANADA</p>
<p>This warranty extends to the purchaser and any succeeding owner for the Cordless Hand Mixer operated in the 50 United States, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and Canada.</p>
<table width="1337">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>Length of Warranty:</strong></td>
<td width="320">One Year Full Warranty from date of purchase.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>KitchenAid Will Pay</strong> <strong>for Your Choice of:</strong></td>
<td width="320">Hassle-Free Replacement of your Cordless Hand Mixer See the next page for details on how to arrange for service, or call the Customer eXperience Center<br />
toll-free at <strong>1.800.541.6390.<br />
</strong>OR<br />
The replacement parts and repair labor costs to correct defects in materials and workmanship.<br />
Service must be provided by an Authorized KitchenAid Service Center.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>KitchenAid Will</strong> <strong>Not Pay for:</strong></td>
<td width="320">A. Repairs when your Cordless Hand Mixer is used in other than normal single family home use.</p>
<p>B. Damage resulting from accident, alteration, misuse or abuse.</p>
<p>C. Any shipping or handling costs to deliver your Cordless Hand Mixer to an Authorized Service Center.</p>
<p>D. Replacement parts or repair labor costs for the Cordless Hand Mixers operated outside the 50 United States, District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and Canada.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" width="456"><strong>DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES; LIMITATION OF REMEDIES</strong></p>
<p>IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE EXCLUDED TO THE EXTENT LEGALLY PERMISSIBLE. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY</p>
<p>BE IMPOSED BY LAW ARE LIMITED TO ONE YEAR, OR THE SHORTEST PERIOD ALLOWED BY LAW. SOME STATES AND PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.</p>
<p>IF THIS PRODUCT FAILS TO WORK AS WARRANTED, CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SHALL BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT ACCORDING TO THE TERMS OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. KITCHENAID AND KITCHENAID CANADA DO NOT ASSUME ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL</p>
<p>DAMAGES. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state or province to province.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/logo-236-2.webp" /></p>
<form id="commentform" class="comment-form" action="https://manuals.plus/wp-comments-post.php" method="post" novalidate="">
<p class="form-submit">
</form>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>KitchenAid Pro Line Series Blender Manual</title>
		<link>https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/pro-line-blender/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[ItsManual]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 19 Jul 2023 05:39:28 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[KitchenAid]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://usemanuals.com/?p=166707</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[GET DISCOVER MORE AT For exciting recipes, demo videos, product registration, and more, our quick start page has what you need to help you get the most from your new product.       KitchenAid.com &#124; KitchenAid.ca &#124; USA: 1.800.541.6390 &#124; Canada: 1.800.807.6777 W10874752B KSB7068 10/16 ®/™ © 2016 KitchenAid. All rights reserved. Used under license in Canada. GET STARTED QUICK START GUIDE The KitchenAid® Pro Line® Series Blender allows you to customize your blending for any recipe you make, with the turn of a dial. For complete instructions and videos, go online to kitchenaid.com/quickstart. 1. Flip power switch on the back of the blender base to the On (I) position. 2. Put the items to blend into jar, in this order: liquids, soft foods, leafy greens, and ice or frozen items. NOTE: Do not fill blender jar past the top-most measurement mark. 3. With ingredient-measuring cap firmly in place, secure lid on the blender jar. Next, place blender jar on the base so it is fully aligned on the jar pad. 4. Flip the START/STOP switch up or down to start blending. Once status indicator light turns a solid white, turn control dial to your desired speed. 5. To use the Flex Edge tamper while blending, leave lid in place and remove ingredient-measuring cap. Stir or press contents down towards the blade. 6. After blending, flip the START/STOP switch up or down. Allow Blender to stop completely before removing lid and pouring your blended ingredients. [...]<p><a class="btn btn-secondary understrap-read-more-link" href="https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/pro-line-blender/">Read More...</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h4>GET</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/GET-BLENDING-300x186-1.webp" /></p>
<h4>DISCOVER MORE</h4>
<h5>AT</h5>
<p>For exciting recipes, demo videos, product registration, and more, our quick start page has what you need to help you get the most from your new product.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/RECIPES-300x298-1.webp" />  <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/GUIDES-300x297-1.webp" /> <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/VIDEOS-300x298-1.webp" />  <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/SUPPORT-2-300x297-1.webp" /> <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/REGISTER-1-300x297-1.webp" /><a href="http://kitchenaid.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">KitchenAid.com</a> | <a href="http://kitchenaid.ca/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">KitchenAid.ca</a> | USA: 1.800.541.6390 | Canada: 1.800.807.6777</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-logo-1-300x31-1.webp" /></p>
<p>W10874752B<br />
KSB7068<br />
10/16<br />
®/™ © 2016 KitchenAid. All rights reserved. Used under license in Canada.</p>
<h4>GET STARTED</h4>
<h5>QUICK START GUIDE</h5>
<p>The KitchenAid® Pro Line® Series Blender allows you to customize your blending for any recipe you make, with the turn of a dial.</p>
<p>For complete instructions and videos, go online to <a href="http://kitchenaid.com/quickstart" target="_blank" rel="noopener">kitchenaid.com/quickstart</a>.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/GET-STARTED-1-300x168-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>1.</strong> Flip power switch on the back of the blender base to the On (<strong>I</strong>) position.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/GET-STARTED-2-300x169-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>2.</strong> Put the items to blend into jar, in this order: liquids, soft foods, leafy greens, and ice or frozen items.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> Do not fill blender jar past the top-most measurement mark.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/GET-STARTED-3-300x168-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>3.</strong> With ingredient-measuring cap firmly in place, secure lid on the blender jar. Next, place blender jar on the base so it is fully aligned on the jar pad.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/GET-STARTED-4-300x169-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>4.</strong> Flip the START/STOP switch up or down to start blending. Once status indicator light turns a solid white, turn control dial to your desired speed.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/GET-STARTED-5-300x169-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>5.</strong> To use the Flex Edge tamper while blending, leave lid in place and remove ingredient-measuring cap. Stir or press contents down towards the blade.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/GET-STARTED-6-300x169-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>6.</strong> After blending, flip the START/STOP switch up or down. Allow Blender to stop completely before removing lid and pouring your blended ingredients.</p>
<form id="commentform" class="comment-form" action="https://manuals.plus/wp-comments-post.php" method="post" novalidate="">
<p class="form-submit">
</form>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>KitchenAid KDTM404KPS Dishwasher Manual</title>
		<link>https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/kdtm404kps-dishwasher/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[ItsManual]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 12 Jul 2023 09:19:19 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[KitchenAid]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://usemanuals.com/?p=159718</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[&#160; LEARN MORE In an effort to conserve natural resources, this dishwasher includes a condensed User Guide. Complete User Instructions can be downloaded at www.kitchenaid.com/customer-service/manuals. For future reference, please make a note of your product model and serial numbers. These can be located on a label in the tub along the left outer edge. Model Number________________________________ Serial Number______________________________________ Register your dishwasher at www.kitchenaid.com. In Canada, register your dishwasher at www.kitchenaid.ca. Para una version de estas instrucciones en español, visite www.kitchenaid.com. Your safety and the safety of others are very important We have provided many important safety messages in this manual and on your appliance. Always read and obey all safety messages. This is the safety alert symbol. This symbol alerts you to potential hazards that can kill or hurt you and others. All safety messages will follow the safety alert symbol and either the word “DANGER” or “WARNING.” These words mean: You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t immediately follow instructions. You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t follow instructions. All safety messages will tell you what the potential hazard is, tell you how to reduce the chance of injury and tell you what can happen if the instructions are not followed. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WARNING: When using the dishwasher, follow basic precautions, including the following: Read all instructions before using the dishwasher. Use the dishwasher only for its intended function. Use only detergents or rinse agents recommended for use in a dishwasher, and keep them out of the reach of children. When loading items to be washed: Locate sharp items so that they are not likely to damage the door seal; and Load sharp knives with handles up to reduce the risk of cut-type injuries. Do not wash plastic items unless they are marked “dishwasher safe” or the equivalent. For plastic items not so marked, check the manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not touch the heating element during or immediately after use. Do not operate the dishwasher unless all enclosure panels are properly in place. Do not tamper with controls. Do not abuse, sit on, or stand on the door, lid, or dish racks of the dishwasher. To reduce the risk of injury, do not allow children to play in or in the dishwasher. Under certain conditions, hydrogen gas may be produced in a hot water system that has not been used for two weeks or more. HYDROGEN GAS IS EXPLOSIVE. If the hot water system has not been used for such a period, before using the dishwasher turn on all hot water faucets and let the water flow from each for several minutes. This will release any accumulated hydrogen gas. As the gas is flammable, do not smoke or use an open flame during this time. Remove the door or lid to the washing compartment when removing an old dishwasher from service or discarding it. WARNING Tip Over Hazard Do not use the dishwasher until completely installed. Do not push down on the open door. Doing so can result in serious injury or cuts. GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS For a grounded, cord-connected dishwasher The dishwasher must be grounded. In the event of a malfunction or breakdown, grounding will reduce the risk of electric shock by providing a path of least resistance to electric current. The dishwasher is equipped with a cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet that is installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances. WARNING: Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician or service representative if you are in doubt whether the dishwasher is properly grounded. Do not modify the plug provided with the dishwasher; if it will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. For a permanently connected dishwasher The dishwasher must be connected to a grounded metal, permanent wiring system, or an equipment-grounding conductor must be run with the circuit conductors and connected to the equipment-grounding terminal or lead on the dishwasher. KEY USAGE TIPS Filtration system and maintenance Your dishwasher has the latest technology in dishwasher filtration. This filtration system minimizes sound and optimizes water and energy conservation while providing superior cleaning. The filter system consists of two parts, an upper filter assembly, and a lower filter. IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to the dishwasher, do not operate your dishwasher without filters properly installed. Be sure the lower filter is securely in place and the upper filter assembly is locked into place. If the upper assembly turns freely, it is not locked into place. The filters may need to be cleaned when Visible objects or soils are on the upper filter assembly. Dishes feel gritty to the touch. See the “Filtration System” section in the full online User Instructions for the complete removal and maintenance schedule. IMPORTANT: Do not use a wire brush, scouring pad, etc., as they may damage the filters. Rinse the filter under running water until the soils are removed. If you have hard-to-remove soils or calcium deposits because of hard water, a soft brush may be required. Drying – Rinse aid is essential You must use a drying agent such as a rinse aid for good drying performance. Rinse aid along with the Heat Dry, Extended Heat Dry option will provide the best drying and avoid excessive moisture in the dishwasher interior. Energy efficiency Energy efficiency is gained by extending cycle time and reducing the amount of wattage and water used during your dishwasher’s cycle. For exceptional cleaning, cycles are longer due to the soak and pauses. Efficient dishwashers run longer to save water and energy, just as driving a car slower saves on gas. Your first cycle will run longer to calibrate the optical water sensor. Premium Top Rack Adjuster You can raise or lower the top rack to fit tall items in either the top or bottom rack. Adjusters are located on each side of the top rack. To raise the rack: Press both rack adjuster thumb levers and lift the rack until it is in the up position and level. To lower the rack: Press both rack adjuster thumb levers and slide the rack to its down position and level. NOTE: The top rack must be level. Touch START/RESUME every time you add a dish IMPORTANT: If anyone opens the door (such as, for adding a dish, even during the Delay option), Start/Resume must be touched each time to resume the cycle. Push the door firmly closed within 4 seconds of touching Start/Resume. If the door is not closed within 4 seconds, the Start keypad light will flash, an audible tone will be heard, and the cycle will not start. OPERATING YOUR DISHWASHER Prepare and load the dishwasher IMPORTANT: Remove leftover food, bones, toothpicks, and other hard items from dishes. Remove labels from containers before washing. Make sure when the dishwasher door is closed no items are blocking the detergent dispenser. Items should be loaded with soiled surfaces facing down and inward to the spray as shown in the graphics above. This will improve cleaning and drying results. Angle the dirtiest dish surface downward, allowing space for water to flow up through the rack and between dishes. Avoid overlapping items, like bowls or plates that may trap food. Place plastics, small plates, and glasses in the upper rack. Wash only items marked “dishwasher safe.” To avoid thumping/clattering noises during operation, load dishes so they do not touch one another. Make sure lightweight load items are secured in racks. Use the slots in the covers and suggested loading patterns to keep your silverware separated for an optimum wash. If your silverware does not fit into the designated slots, lift and slide the cover off to remove them and mix silverware types to keep them separated. When loading silverware, always place sharp items pointing down and avoid “nesting” as shown. Check that all arms spin freely Items in the rack can block the spray arms. Add detergent Premeasured Detergents High-quality premeasured tablets and packs are recommended for improved performance. Quality tablets and packs have been proven better than powder, liquid, or gel detergents at reducing filming on dishes. Using tablets and packs over time will start to reduce or eliminate white film. They are suitable for all water hardness and soil levels. Also, by using a rinse aid, you can minimize the repeat buildup of the white film (not all packs and tablets contain rinse aid). Always place premeasured detergents in the main compartment and close the lid. NOTE: Follow the instructions on the package when using other dishwasher detergent types. See the complete User Instructions for more details about powders, liquids, and gels. Use automatic dishwasher detergent only. Add detergent just before starting a cycle. Fresh automatic dishwasher detergent results in better cleaning. Store a tightly closed detergent container in a cool, dry place. Place the selected detergent in the dispenser. Place your finger, as shown, and slide the lid closed. Press firmly until it clicks. Push OPEN, as shown, and the lid will slide open. Add rinse aid Your dishwasher is designed to use rinse aid for good drying performance. Without a rinse aid, your dishes and dishwasher interior will have excessive moisture. The heating and drying options will not perform as well without rinse aid. Rinse aid keeps water from forming droplets that can dry as spots or streaks. It also improves drying by allowing water to drain off of dishes after the final rinse. Rinse aid does not adhere to dishware, and when used, it is dispensed during each cycle. To add rinse aid, open the dispenser lid by gently pushing in the center of the lid with your thumb while lifting up on the edge. Pour rinse aid into the opening until the indicator level shows that it is full. Close the dispenser by pushing down gently on the lid.NOTE: For most water conditions, the factory setting will give good results. If you are experiencing poor drying performance, try a higher setting. Turn the arrow adjuster to the next higher number to increase the amount of rinse aid. Select a cycle Efficient dishwashers run longer to save water and energy, just as driving a car slower saves on gas. Typical cycle time is approximately 21/2 hours but can take less or more time to complete depending on selections. Push the door firmly closed and touch START to repeat the same cycle and options as in the previous wash cycle, or select another cycle appropriate for your load. See the Cycle Guide. Select options You can customize your cycles by selecting the options desired. See the Cycle Guide. If you change your mind, touch the option keypad again to turn off the option. Not all options are available for every cycle. If an invalid option is selected for a given cycle, the lights will flash. Adding options may increase the cycle time. Start or resume a cycle NOTE: If needed, run hot water at the sink nearest your dishwasher until the water is hot. Turn off the water. With the door firmly closed, touch START. IMPORTANT: If the door is opened for more than a few seconds after the cycle is started (even during the Delay time), the Start keypad must be touched again after the door is closed. If the Start keypad is not touched, the Start keypad light with flash, and audible tone will be heard, and the cycle will not resume. Follow the progress of your dishwasher The display will indicate cycle progress such as Washing, Drying, Clean, and sanitizing. The cycle has completed when the Clean light is lit. Refer to the Control chart in the Cycle Guide section for the operation of the Sanitized indicator. CYCLE GUIDE IMPORTANT: The sensor in your dishwasher monitors the soil level. Cycle time and/or water usage can vary as the sensor adjusts the cycle for the best wash performance. If the incoming water is less than the recommended temperature or food soils are heavy, the cycle will automatically compensate by adding time, heat, and water as needed. The government energy certifications are not based on this cycle. See the Normal cycle description for the government energy certification cycle. Using the ProWash™ cycle may increase your energy usage. No other washing and drying temperature options were selected, and the dishwasher was not subjected to truncated testing. Rinse aid was not used, and there was no detergent used in the prewash. DISHWASHER CARE Cleaning the Exterior Clean the exterior of the dishwasher with only a soft, damp cloth, and mild detergent. If your dishwasher has a stainless steel exterior, it may have a coating that is resistant to fingerprints. Avoid using abrasive cleaning products on the exterior of the dishwasher. Cleaning and Maintaining the Interior Many detergents may leave white spots or a white residue on dishware and on the interior of the dishwasher. Over time this residue can become unsightly and could affect dishwasher performance. Use of a dishwasher cleaning product, such as affresh® Dishwasher Cleaner, can help to remove the residue. Monthly use of affresh® Dishwasher Cleaner is recommended to help maintain the dishwasher. Follow package directions. NOTE: KitchenAid recommends the use of high-quality, premeasured detergent tablets or packs and the use of a rinse aid for dishwasher cleaning and daily care. If you have a drain air gap, check and clean it if the dishwasher isn’t draining well. To Reduce the Risk of Property Damage During Vacation or Extended Time Without Use: When you will not be using the dishwasher during the summer months, turn off the water and power supply to the dishwasher. Make sure the water supply lines are protected against freezing conditions. Ice formations in the supply lines can increase water pressure and cause damage to your dishwasher or home. Damage from freezing is not covered by the warranty. When storing your dishwasher in the winter, avoid water damage by having your dishwasher winterized by authorized service personnel. TROUBLESHOOTING First, try the solutions suggested here. If you need further assistance or more recommendations that may help you to avoid a service call, refer to the warranty page in this manual or visit producthelp.kitchenaid.com. In Canada, visit kitchenaid.ca. For internet connectivity questions, in the U.S.A. or Canada, call 1-877-559-2603. Contact us by mail with any questions or concerns at the address below: In the U.S.A.: KitchenAid Brand Home Appliances Customer Experience Center 553 Benson Road Benton Harbor, MI 49022-2692 In Canada: KitchenAid Brand Home Appliances Customer Experience Centre 200 – 6750 Century Ave. Mississauga, Ontario L5N 0B7 Please include a daytime phone number in your correspondence &#160; [...]<p><a class="btn btn-secondary understrap-read-more-link" href="https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/kdtm404kps-dishwasher/">Read More...</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h4></h4>
<h4></h4>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<p><strong>LEARN MORE</strong><br />
In an effort to conserve natural resources, this dishwasher includes a condensed User Guide. Complete User Instructions can be downloaded at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.com/customer-service/manuals" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.com/customer-service/manuals</a>. For future reference, please make a note of your product model and serial numbers. These can be located on a label in the tub along the left outer edge.<br />
Model Number________________________________ Serial Number______________________________________<br />
Register your dishwasher at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.com</a>. In Canada, register your dishwasher at<a href="http://www.kitchenaid.ca/" target="_blank" rel="noopener"> www.kitchenaid.ca</a>.<br />
Para una version de estas instrucciones en español, visite<a href="http://www.kitchenaid.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener"> www.kitchenaid.com</a>.</p>
<p><strong>Your safety and the safety of others are very important</strong><br />
We have provided many important safety messages in this manual and on your appliance. Always read and obey all safety messages.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-1.webp" />This is the safety alert symbol. This symbol alerts you to potential hazards that can kill or hurt you and others. All safety messages will follow the safety alert symbol and either the word “DANGER” or “WARNING.” These words mean:</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-2.webp" />You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t immediately follow instructions.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-3.webp" />You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t follow instructions.</p>
<p>All safety messages will tell you what the potential hazard is, tell you how to reduce the chance of injury and tell you what can happen if the instructions are not followed.</p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS</strong><br />
<strong>WARNING:</strong> When using the dishwasher, follow basic precautions, including the following:</p>
<ul>
<li>Read all instructions before using the dishwasher.</li>
<li>Use the dishwasher only for its intended function.</li>
<li>Use only detergents or rinse agents recommended for use in a dishwasher, and keep them out of the reach of children.</li>
<li>When loading items to be washed:
<ol>
<li>Locate sharp items so that they are not likely to damage the door seal; and</li>
<li>Load sharp knives with handles up to reduce the risk of cut-type injuries.</li>
</ol>
</li>
<li>Do not wash plastic items unless they are marked “dishwasher safe” or the equivalent. For plastic items not so marked, check the manufacturer’s recommendations.</li>
<li>Do not touch the heating element during or immediately after use.</li>
<li>Do not operate the dishwasher unless all enclosure panels are properly in place.</li>
<li>Do not tamper with controls.</li>
<li>Do not abuse, sit on, or stand on the door, lid, or dish racks of the dishwasher.</li>
<li>To reduce the risk of injury, do not allow children to play in or in the dishwasher.</li>
<li>Under certain conditions, hydrogen gas may be produced in a hot water system that has not been used for two weeks or more. HYDROGEN GAS IS EXPLOSIVE. If the hot water system has not been used for such a period, before using the dishwasher turn on all hot water faucets and let the water flow from each for several minutes. This will release any accumulated hydrogen gas. As the gas is flammable, do not smoke or use an open flame during this time.</li>
<li>Remove the door or lid to the washing compartment when removing an old dishwasher from service or discarding it.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>WARNING</strong><br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-4.webp" />Tip Over Hazard Do not use the dishwasher until completely installed. Do not push down on the open door. Doing so can result in serious injury or cuts.</p>
<h4>GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS</h4>
<p><strong>For a grounded, cord-connected dishwasher</strong><br />
The dishwasher must be grounded. In the event of a malfunction or breakdown, grounding will reduce the risk of electric shock by providing a path of least resistance to electric current. The dishwasher is equipped with a cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet that is installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances.<br />
<strong>WARNING</strong>: Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician or service representative if you are in doubt whether the dishwasher is properly grounded. Do not modify the plug provided with the dishwasher; if it will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.</p>
<p><strong>For a permanently connected dishwasher</strong><br />
The dishwasher must be connected to a grounded metal, permanent wiring system, or an equipment-grounding conductor must be run with the circuit conductors and connected to the equipment-grounding terminal or lead on the dishwasher.</p>
<h4>KEY USAGE TIPS</h4>
<p><strong>Filtration system and maintenance</strong><br />
Your dishwasher has the latest technology in dishwasher filtration. This filtration system minimizes sound and optimizes water and energy conservation while providing superior cleaning. The filter system consists of two parts, an upper filter assembly, and a lower filter.</p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> To avoid damage to the dishwasher, do not operate your dishwasher without filters properly installed. Be sure the lower filter is securely in place and the upper filter assembly is locked into place. If the upper assembly turns freely, it is not locked into place.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-5.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>The filters may need to be cleaned when</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Visible objects or soils are on the upper filter assembly.</li>
<li>Dishes feel gritty to the touch.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-6.webp" /></li>
</ul>
<p>See the “Filtration System” section in the full online User Instructions for the complete removal and maintenance schedule.<br />
<strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> Do not use a wire brush, scouring pad, etc., as they may damage the filters. Rinse the filter under running water until the soils are removed. If you have hard-to-remove soils or calcium deposits because of hard water, a soft brush may be required.</p>
<p><strong>Drying – Rinse aid is essential</strong><br />
You must use a drying agent such as a rinse aid for good drying performance. Rinse aid along with the Heat Dry, Extended Heat Dry option will provide the best drying and avoid excessive moisture in the dishwasher interior.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-7.webp" /></p>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-8.webp" />Energy efficiency</strong><br />
Energy efficiency is gained by extending cycle time and reducing the amount of wattage and water used during your dishwasher’s cycle. For exceptional cleaning, cycles are longer due to the soak and pauses. Efficient dishwashers run longer to save water and energy, just as driving a car slower saves on gas. Your first cycle will run longer to calibrate the optical water sensor.</p>
<h4>Premium Top Rack Adjuster</h4>
<p>You can raise or lower the top rack to fit tall items in either the top or bottom rack. Adjusters are located on each side of the top rack.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-9.webp" /><br />
<strong>To raise the rack:</strong><br />
Press both rack adjuster thumb levers and lift the rack until it is in the up position and level. To lower the rack: Press both rack adjuster thumb levers and slide the rack to its down position and level.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> The top rack must be level. Touch START/RESUME every time you add a dish</p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> If anyone opens the door (such as, for adding a dish, even during the Delay option), Start/Resume must be touched each time to resume the cycle. Push the door firmly closed within 4 seconds of touching Start/Resume. If the door is not closed within 4 seconds, the Start keypad light will flash, an audible tone will be heard, and the cycle will not start.</p>
<h4>OPERATING YOUR DISHWASHER</h4>
<ol>
<li>Prepare and load the dishwasher<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-10.webp" /><br />
<strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> Remove leftover food, bones, toothpicks, and other hard items from dishes. Remove labels from containers before washing.</p>
<ul>
<li>Make sure when the dishwasher door is closed no items are blocking the detergent dispenser.</li>
<li>Items should be loaded with soiled surfaces facing down and inward to the spray as shown in the graphics above. This will improve cleaning and drying results. Angle the dirtiest dish surface downward, allowing space for water to flow up through the rack and between dishes.</li>
<li>Avoid overlapping items, like bowls or plates that may trap food.</li>
<li>Place plastics, small plates, and glasses in the upper rack.</li>
<li>Wash only items marked “dishwasher safe.”</li>
<li>To avoid thumping/clattering noises during operation, load dishes so they do not touch one another. Make sure lightweight load items are secured in racks.</li>
<li>Use the slots in the covers and suggested loading patterns to keep your silverware separated for an optimum wash.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-11.webp" /></li>
<li>If your silverware does not fit into the designated slots, lift and slide the cover off to remove them and mix silverware types to keep them separated.</li>
<li>When loading silverware, always place sharp items pointing down and avoid “nesting” as shown.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-12.webp" /></li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Check that all arms spin freely<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-13.webp" /></li>
<li>Items in the rack can block the spray arms.</li>
</ol>
<h4>Add detergent</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-14.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Premeasured Detergents</strong><br />
High-quality premeasured tablets and packs are recommended for improved performance. Quality tablets and packs have been proven better than powder, liquid, or gel detergents at reducing filming on dishes. Using tablets and packs over time will start to reduce or eliminate white film. They are suitable for all water hardness and soil levels. Also, by using a rinse aid, you can minimize the repeat buildup of the white film (not all packs and tablets contain rinse aid). Always place premeasured detergents in the main compartment and close the lid.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: Follow the instructions on the package when using other dishwasher detergent types. See the complete User Instructions for more details about powders, liquids, and gels.</p>
<ul>
<li>Use automatic dishwasher detergent only. Add detergent just before starting a cycle.</li>
<li>Fresh automatic dishwasher detergent results in better cleaning. Store a tightly closed detergent container in a cool, dry place. Place the selected detergent in the dispenser. Place your finger, as shown, and slide the lid closed. Press firmly until it clicks. Push OPEN, as shown, and the lid will slide open.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-15.webp" /></li>
</ul>
<h4>Add rinse aid</h4>
<ul>
<li>Your dishwasher is designed to use rinse aid for good drying performance. Without a rinse aid, your dishes and dishwasher interior will have excessive moisture. The heating and drying options will not perform as well without rinse aid.</li>
<li>Rinse aid keeps water from forming droplets that can dry as spots or streaks. It also improves drying by allowing water to drain off of dishes after the final rinse. Rinse aid does not adhere to dishware, and when used, it is dispensed during each cycle.</li>
<li>To add rinse aid, open the dispenser lid by gently pushing in the center of the lid with your thumb while lifting up on the edge.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-16.webp" /></li>
<li>Pour rinse aid into the opening until the indicator level shows that it is full.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-17.webp" /></li>
<li>Close the dispenser by pushing down gently on the lid.NOTE: For most water conditions, the factory setting will give good results.</li>
<li>If you are experiencing poor drying performance, try a higher setting. Turn the arrow adjuster to the next higher number to increase the amount of rinse aid.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-18.webp" /></li>
</ul>
<h4>Select a cycle</h4>
<p>Efficient dishwashers run longer to save water and energy, just as driving a car slower saves on gas. Typical cycle time is approximately 21/2 hours but can take less or more time to complete depending on selections. Push the door firmly closed and touch START to repeat the same cycle and options as in the previous wash cycle, or select another cycle appropriate for your load. See the Cycle Guide.</p>
<p><strong>Select options</strong><br />
You can customize your cycles by selecting the options desired. See the Cycle Guide. If you change your mind, touch the option keypad again to turn off the option. Not all options are available for every cycle. If an invalid option is selected for a given cycle, the lights will flash. Adding options may increase the cycle time.</p>
<p><strong>Start or resume a cycle</strong><br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> If needed, run hot water at the sink nearest your dishwasher until the water is hot. Turn off the water. With the door firmly closed, touch START.<br />
<strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> If the door is opened for more than a few seconds after the cycle is started (even during the Delay time), the Start keypad must be touched again after the door is closed. If the Start keypad is not touched, the Start keypad light with flash, and audible tone will be heard, and the cycle will not resume.</p>
<p><strong>Follow the progress of your dishwasher</strong><br />
The display will indicate cycle progress such as Washing, Drying, Clean, and sanitizing. The cycle has completed when the Clean light is lit. Refer to the Control chart in the Cycle Guide section for the operation of the Sanitized indicator.</p>
<h4>CYCLE GUIDE</h4>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> The sensor in your dishwasher monitors the soil level. Cycle time and/or water usage can vary as the sensor adjusts the cycle for the best wash performance. If the incoming water is less than the recommended temperature or food soils are heavy, the cycle will automatically compensate by adding time, heat, and water as needed. The government energy certifications are not based on this cycle. See the Normal cycle description for the government energy certification cycle. Using the ProWash™ cycle may increase your energy usage. No other washing and drying temperature options were selected, and the dishwasher was not subjected to truncated testing. Rinse aid was not used, and there was no detergent used in the prewash.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-20.webp" /><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-21.webp" /><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-22.webp" /></p>
<h4>DISHWASHER CARE</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-KDTM404KPS-Dishwasher-FIG-19.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Cleaning the Exterior</strong><br />
Clean the exterior of the dishwasher with only a soft, damp cloth, and mild detergent. If your dishwasher has a stainless steel exterior, it may have a coating that is resistant to fingerprints. Avoid using abrasive cleaning products on the exterior of the dishwasher.</p>
<p><strong>Cleaning and Maintaining the Interior</strong><br />
Many detergents may leave white spots or a white residue on dishware and on the interior of the dishwasher. Over time this residue can become unsightly and could affect dishwasher performance. Use of a dishwasher cleaning product, such as affresh® Dishwasher Cleaner, can help to remove the residue. Monthly use of affresh® Dishwasher Cleaner is recommended to help maintain the dishwasher. Follow package directions.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: KitchenAid recommends the use of high-quality, premeasured detergent tablets or packs and the use of a rinse aid for dishwasher cleaning and daily care. If you have a drain air gap, check and clean it if the dishwasher isn’t draining well.</p>
<p>To Reduce the Risk of Property Damage During Vacation or Extended Time Without Use:</p>
<ul>
<li>When you will not be using the dishwasher during the summer months, turn off the water and power supply to the dishwasher.</li>
<li>Make sure the water supply lines are protected against freezing conditions. Ice formations in the supply lines can increase water pressure and cause damage to your dishwasher or home. Damage from freezing is not covered by the warranty.</li>
<li>When storing your dishwasher in the winter, avoid water damage by having your dishwasher winterized by authorized service personnel.</li>
</ul>
<h4>TROUBLESHOOTING</h4>
<p>First, try the solutions suggested here. If you need further assistance or more recommendations that may help you to avoid a service call, refer to the warranty page in this manual or visit producthelp.kitchenaid.com. In Canada, visit kitchenaid.ca. For internet connectivity questions, in the U.S.A. or Canada, call 1-877-559-2603. Contact us by mail with any questions or concerns at the address below:</p>
<p><strong>In the U.S.A.:</strong><br />
KitchenAid Brand Home Appliances<br />
Customer Experience Center<br />
553 Benson Road<br />
Benton Harbor, MI 49022-2692</p>
<p><strong>In Canada:</strong><br />
KitchenAid Brand Home Appliances<br />
Customer Experience Centre<br />
200 – 6750 Century Ave.<br />
Mississauga, Ontario L5N 0B7</p>
<p>Please include a daytime phone number in your correspondence</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>KitchenAid Induction Hob 400011286583 Manual</title>
		<link>https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/hob-400011286583/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[ItsManual]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Sun, 09 Jul 2023 14:49:30 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[KitchenAid]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://usemanuals.com/?p=151221</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[KitchenAid Induction Hob Quick Guide THANK YOU FOR BUYING A KITCHENAID PRODUCT In order to receive a more complete assistance, please register your product on www.kitchenaid.eu/register Before using the appliance carefully read the Safety Instruction. Product description  Hob  Control panel Control Panel  On/ off button  Indicator light – hob switched on  “Gourmet Library” button (special functions)  Indicator light – key lock active Key lock Cooking zone selection display Cooking zone off button  Slide touchscreen  Quick heat button “Manage functions” display Accessories POTS AND PANSOnly use pots and pans made from ferromagnetic material which are suitable for use with induction hobs. To determine whether a pot is suitable, check for the symbol (usually stamped on the bottom). A magnet may be used to check whether pots are magnetic. The quality and the structure of the pot base can alter cooking performance. Some indications for the diameter of the base do not correspond to the actual diameter of the ferromagnetic surface. EMPTY POTS OR POTS WITH A THIN BASE Do not use empty pots or pans when the hob is on. The hob is equipped with an internal safety system that constantly monitors the temperature, activating the “automatic off” function where high temperatures are detected. When used with empty pots or pots with thin bases, the temperature may rise very quickly, and the “automatic off” function may be triggered with a slight delay, damaging the pot or pan. If this occurs, do not touch anything, and wait for all components to cool down. If any error messages appear, call the service centre. MINIMUM DIAMETER OF POT/PAN BASE FOR THE DIFFERENT COOKING AREAS To ensure that the hob functions properly, the pot must cover one or more of the reference points indicated on the surface of the hob, and must be of a suitable minimum diameter. Positioning of accessory Minimum diameter centred on 1 point 10 cm 2 points covered 19 cm 3 points covers fish kettle/wire rack 4 points covered (horizontal) fish kettle/wire rack 4 points (2 + 2) covered (vertical) 24 cm First time use The hob settings can be changed at any time. To change the settings, click on the  symbol that   appears on the manage functions display. From the settings menu, you can:  select the language;  adjust the brightness;  adjust the volume of the sound alerts;  adjust the button tones;  adjust the power of the hob;  restore the factory settings of the hob; check the software version installed. If a power failure occurs, the settings are maintained. ADJUSTING THE POWER OF THE HOB The maximum power level of the hob can be set from the settings menu, in accordance with requirements, or with the timer duration. The power levels available are: 2.5kW – 4.0kW – 6.0kW – 7.4kW. Daily use SWITCHING THE HOB ON/OFF To switch the hob on, press the on button for approx. 1 second until the displays light up. The hob will be automatically deactivated after 30 seconds if you do not select a function within this time. The hob turns off if you press any button for more than 10 seconds. To switch off, press the same button until the displays switch off. All the cooking zones are deactivated. If the hob has been in use, when you switch it off, all cooking zones will be deactivated, and the residual heat indicator “H” will remain lit until the cooking zones have cooled down. SELECTING THE COOKING ZONE The desired cooking zone can be selected from the left-hand display, by pressing the corresponding pane. On all the not selecetd zones a lightly stripe will appear.SELECTING THE FLEXIBLE AREA The flexible area is the area in which several of the cooking zones overlap, and can be used as a single cooking zone. To create a flexible area: Select multiple panes or slide your finger across, gradually joining the panes together. To divide a flexible area: Press and hold the pane corresponding to the zone that you want to separate for 3 seconds. Alternatively, press the “divide zone” button that appears in the manage functions display. When the cooking zone is divided, the same level of power is set for each of the separate zones. If all the selected cooking zones are not covered by the pot in 30 seconds, a dense striped will appear on the left-hand display. It’s possible to reactivate that area with the “place a pot” command usign the right-hand display.ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING COOKING ZONES AND ADJUSTING POWER To activate the cooking zones: Switch on the hob. If a recipient is already in place, the hob automatically detects it. Select the suggested zone to choose the power.  Place the pot in the chosen cooking zone, ensuring that it is covering one or more of the reference points on the surface of the hob. Using this position will allow you to benefit from maximum power output. Please note: Do not cover the display or the slide touchscreen with accessories. If a utensil is covering one of the displays, the hob may not function properly. On the right display, the message «CHECK TOUCH AREA, remove the object within one minute» will appear. Remove the object and wait until the message disappears. If the problem persists, disconnect and reconnect the power to the cooktop. In the cooking zones close to the control panel, it is advisable to keep pots and pans inside the markings (taking both the bottom of the pan and the upper edge into consideration, as this tends to be larger). This prevents excessive overheating of the touchpad. When grilling or frying, please use the rear cooking zones wherever possible. Select the cooking zone or flexible area from the left-hand display. Set the desired power level by pressing or moving your finger horizontally across the slide touchscreen. The power level set will appear in the pane of the cooking zone selected. Each cooking zone offers a range of different heat settings, from “1” (minimum power) to “18” (maximum power). Using the slide touchscreen, you can also select the quick heat function, which will appear on the display with the letter “P”. Please note: If the pot is not suitable for induction cooking, is not positioned correctly or is not of an appropriate size, the cooking zone pane will flash. If no pot is detected within 30 seconds of making the selection, the cooking zone switches off. To deactivate the cooking zones: Select the cooking zone in the left-hand display and press the “OFF” button at the top of the slide touchscreen. If the cooking zone is still hot, the residual heat indicator “H” will appear in the corresponding pane.PLACE A POT When using a cooking area composed of several zones, the pot can be placed anywhere on the active area. The hob will automatically recognize the actual positioning of the pot. If you wish to add an additional pot to the active cooking area, use the “Place a pot” command to allow the hob to detect the new pot. KEY LOCK To prevent accidental activation of the hob during cleaning, or to prevent the controls from being changed accidentally whilst cooking, press the “Key lock” button for 3 seconds: a beep and a warning light indicate that this function has been activated. The control panel will be locked, with the exception of the off button. To reactivate the controls, press the “Key Lock” button again for 3 seconds. The warning light  switches off and the hob is active again. TIMER When the hob is off, you can use the right-hand display as a timer. To activate the timer:  Switch on the hob.  Press the hourglass icon that appears on the manage functions display.  Use the ”+”/”–” buttons to set the time. When the set time has elapsed, an acoustic signal sounds. To change or deactivate the timer: Press the hourglass icon that appears on the manage functions display. Use the ”+” and ”–” buttons to reset the desired time, or press the “STOP” button to turn off the timer. SETTING THE COOKING TIME The cooking zones can be programmed to switch off automatically. To set the cooking time: Select the cooking zone and set the required power level. Press the stopwatch icon that appears on the manage functions display. Use the ”+”/”–” buttons to set the time. Once the set time has elapsed, an acoustic signal sounds and the cooking zone switches off automatically. To change or deactivate the cooking timer  Select the active cooking zone. Press the stopwatch icon that appears on the manage functions display. Use the ”+” and ”–” buttons to reset the desired time, or press the “STOP” button to cancel the set cooking time. A cooking time can be set for each zone or flexible area by following the same steps. RESIDUAL HEAT INDICATOR When the letter “H” appears in one of the cooking zone selection display panes, this means that the corresponding cooking zone is still hot. When the cooking zone has cooled, the “H” disappears. Special functions GOURMET LIBRARY The “Gourmet Library” button allows users to access a number of special features: Sous Chef  French Plaque  Dynamic Surface In the right-hand manage functions display, you can navigate between the special functions and select the option you want. With the arrows, you can scroll through the available options. Use the button OK to confirm your choice, and the double arrow to return to the previous menu. SOUS CHEF This function allows you to select one of the pre-set functions which help you to cook a range of different types of food in the best possible manner. The hob assists the user by providing ideal conditions for heating and seasoning the pot. It also provides instructions to be followed during the different stages of cooking, in order to achieve optimum results. To activate the Sous Chef function: Press the “Gourmet Library” button. Select “Sous Chef” from the manage functions display and confirm. Select the category of food that you plan to cook and confirm. Select the cooking method and confirm. Select the cooking conditions and confirm. Four cooking zones will now be available. Place the pot in position, ensuring that it is covering at least two of the reference points on the surface of the hob. The “Moka” cooking mode is the only one which allows just one reference point to be covered. Below is an example of positioning for a number of accessories. Select the desired cooking zone from the left-hand display. An “A” will appear in the selected zone. In the right-hand display, the instructions to follow will appear (e.g.”Add Oil” or “Add food”). At the end of each stage, the user must confirm in order to proceed with cooking.  If necessary, the pre-set power level can be changed at any time, using the ”+” and ”–” buttons.  When cooking is complete, press the “STOP” button to turn off the cooking zone. If multiple zones have been used during cooking, you must first select the cooking zone you want to switch off. Please note: The “Sous Chef” function can be activated even when one or more cooking zones are already active. To activate the Sous Chef function for more than one cooking zone: After activating the “Sous Chef” function for the first cooking zone, press the “Gourmet Library” button again, and repeat the activation process for a new cooking zone. Zones that are already active cannot be selected. Please note: You can use up to 4 zones with the “Sous Chef” function, provided that the power level setting selected allows for this. The zones cannot be combined to form a larger area. To cook traditionally when the Sous Chef function is active: When the “Sous Chef” function is active, you can select the cooking zone that you wish to activate from the left-hand display, and set the power level for this zone, before proceeding with using this in the normal way. Selectable options FOOD CATEGORY COOKING METHOD Meat Grilling, Pan frying, Boiling Fish Grilling, Pan frying, Boiling Vegetables Grilling, Pan frying, Boiling Sauces and soups Sauces (Tomato, Béchamel) Soups (Searing, Simmering, Creamy soups) Desserts Custard, Panna cotta, Melted chocolate, Pancake, Rice pudding Eggs Fried eggs, Omelette, Boiling (Boiled eggs, Soft-boiled), Frittata, Scrambled Cheese Grilling, Pan frying, Fondue Pasta Boiling, Pan frying, Risotto, Rice pudding Beverages Milk, Water, Moka Custom Boiling, Grilling, Pan frying, Simmering, Melting MAIN COOKING METHODS (Each method may include additional options) MELTING To bring food to the ideal temperature for melting and to maintain the condition of the food without risk of burning. This method does not damage delicate foods such as chocolate, and prevents them from sticking to the pot. The rate of cooking can be adjusted at any time using the ”+” and ”–” buttons on the right-hand display. SIMMERING For slow-cook dishes and for slowly evaporating liquid, maintaining the condition of the food without risk of burning. This method does not damage food, and prevents it from sticking to the pot. The quality and type of pot can affect performance or cooking times. The rate of cooking can be adjusted at any time using the ”+” and ”–” buttons on the right-hand display. BOILING To efficiently heat water and alert the user when it begins to boil, via an audible and visual signal. While awaiting confirmation from the user, the system keeps the water at a controlled simmer, preventing spills and wasted energy. Whilst this function is active, an audible alarm warns the user if the pot is empty (no water) or if it has boiled dry. Only add salt after the boiling alert has sounded. PAN FRYING To preheat or season an empty pot or pan. An audible and visual signal indicates that the ideal temperature has been reached for food to be added to the pot or pan. While awaiting confirmation from the user, the system keeps the accessory at a controlled heat, preventing the pan from reaching damaging temperatures and avoiding energy wastage. For optimum conditions, use this function with pots and seasoning at room temperature. Dedicated accessories must be used for this function. Do not use the lid – to protect against splashes, a splash guard is recommended. It is advisable to use oils that are suitable for frying when cooking with this function, such as seed oils of various types. When using different oils, always take extra care to supervise cooking during first use. GRILLING This function allows for optimum grilling of a range of foods, according to their thickness. When the ideal temperature has been reached for food to be added, the hob beeps. The hob then stabilizes the temperature throughout cooking, keeping it constant. Once the user has confirmed that food has been added, cooking begins. It is advisable to prepare the food during the heating stage, adding it as soon as you hear the beep. For optimum conditions, use this function with pots and seasoning at room temperature. If you are not using the wire rack designed for this purpose, take extra care when first using the grill function, as the quality of the base may affect heating times. Accessories with very thin bases can reach very high temperatures in a short time. MOKA This function allows “moka” stove-top coffee makers to be heated automatically. The heating cycle can be activated by selecting the function in the menu, and a beep will sound when the coffee is ready. The function is programmed to switch off automatically, preventing spills. When using for the first time, always check that the conditions described are met. For optimum conditions, use this function with the coffee maker and water at room temperature. For these functions, the use of dedicated accessories is recommended:  for boiling: WMF SKU: 07.7524.6380  for pan frying: WMF SKU: 05.7528.4021  for grilling: WMF SKU: 05.7650.4291  for Moka, Bialetti: MOKA INDUZIONE 3TZ ANTRACITE Please note: Try not to move the pot or pan during the first minute of heating, in order to allow the hob to function optimally. FRENCH PLAQUE This function divides the hob into four cooking zones, activating these simultaneously at a pre-set power level. It allows you to move pots from one area to another, to allow you to continue cooking at different temperatures. To activate the French Plaque function: Place the pot in position.  Press the “Gourmet Library” button. Select “French Plaque” from the manage functions display and confirm. The four cooking zone panes appear on the left-hand display, with the corresponding power level (low, medium, high).  If you wish to add more pots, use the “Add pot” command To exit this function, press “STOP”. To change the power of a cooking zone:  Select cooking zone. Select the desired power level by dragging your finger across the slide touch screen, which will remain visible for 1 second.  The word corresponding to the power level selected (low, medium, high) reappears. Please note: The changed settings are saved until you change them again or reset them. DYNAMIC SURFACE This function allows you to use the entire hob as a single cooking area. To activate the Dynamic Surface function: Place the pot in position.  Press the “Gourmet Library” button. Select “Dynamic Surface” from the manage functions display and confirm. Set the desired power level from the slide touchscreen. The power level set appears on the left- hand display. If you wish to add more pots, use the “Place a pot” command To exit this function, press “STOP”. Cooking table POWER LEVEL TYPE OF COOKING RECOMMENDED USE Indicating cooking experience and habits Max. heat setting P Fast heating Ideal for rapidly increasing the temperature of food to a fast boil (for water) or for rapidly heating cooking liquids. 14 – 18 Frying, boiling Ideal for browning, starting to cook, frying deep-frozen products, bringing liquids to the boil quickly. Browning, sautéing, boiling, grilling Ideal for sautéing, maintaining a lively boil, cooking and grilling. 10 – 14 Browning, cooking, stewing, sautéing, grilling Ideal for sautéing, maintaining a gentle boil, cooking and grilling, and preheating accessories. Cooking, stewing, sautéing, grilling, cooking until creamy Ideal for stewing, maintaining a gentle boil, cooking and grilling (for longer periods). 5 – 9 Cooking, simmering, thickening, creaming Ideal for slower-cook recipes (rice, sauces, roast, fish) with liquids (e.g. water, wine, broth, milk), and for creaming pasta. Ideal for slow-cook recipes (quantities under 1 litre: rice, sauces, roasts, fish) with liquids (e.g. water, wine, broth, milk). 1 – 4 Melting, thawing Ideal for softening butter, gently melting chocolate, thawing small items. Keeping food warm, creaming risotto Ideal for keeping small portions of just-cooked food or serving dishes warm and for creaming risotto. Zero power Off – Hob in stand-by or off mode (possible end-of-cooking residual heat, indicated by an “H”). Maintenance and cleaning WARNING  Do not use steam cleaning equipment.  Before cleaning, make sure the cooking zones are switched off and that the residual heat indicator (“H”) is not displayed. Important:  Do not use abrasive sponges or scouring pads as they may damage the glass.  After each use, clean the hob (when it is cool) to remove any deposits and stains from food residue. Sugar or foods with a high sugar content can damage the hob and must be immediately removed.  Salt, sugar and sand could scratch the glass surface.  Use a soft cloth, absorbent kitchen paper or a special hob cleaner (follow the Manufacturer’s instructions).  Spills of liquid in the cooking zones can cause the pots to move or vibrate.  After cleaning the hob, dry thoroughly. The hob has been treated with a finish that makes it easy to clean and keeps the surface shiny for a long time. To clean Kitchenaid hobs, follow these recommendations:  Use a soft cloth (microfibre is best) dampened with water or with everyday glass cleaning detergent.  For best results, leave a wet cloth on the glass hob surface for a few minutes. Troubleshooting  Check that the electricity supply has not been shut off.  If you are unable to turn the hob off after using it, disconnect it from the power supply.  If alphanumeric codes appear on the display when the hob is switched on, consult the following table for instructions. Please note: The presence of water, liquid spilled from pots or any objects resting on any of the hob buttons can accidentally activate or deactivate the control panel lock function. ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION C81, C82 The control panel switches off because of excessively high temperatures. The internal temperature of electronic parts is too high. Wait for the hob to cool down before using it again. F02, F04 The connection voltage is wrong. The sensor detects a discrepancy between the appliance voltage and that of the mains supply. Disconnect the hob from the mains and check the electrical connection. F01, F06, F12, F13, F25, F34, F35, F36, F37, F41, F47, F58, F61, F76 Disconnect the hob from the power supply. Wait a few seconds then reconnect the hob to the power supply. If the problem persists, call the service centre and specify the error code that appears on the display. Sounds produced during operation Hobs may produce noises during normal operation. During the pot recognition phase, the hob produces a click sound, while during cooking, hissing or crackling sounds may be heard. Hisses and crackles actually come from the pots, and are produced by specific features of the base of the pot being used (for example, when a base is made from several layers of material, or is irregular). These noises may vary depending on the accessories used and the amount of food that these contain, and do not indicate any type of defect. Verified cooking A table below has been created specially to make it possible for inspection bodies to use our products. Verified cooking Verified cooking positions Heat distribution, “Pancakes” test acc. to EN 60350-2 §7.3 Heat performance, “French fries” test acc. to EN 60350-2 §7.4 Melting and keep warm, “chocolate” Simmering, “rice pudding” ECO-DESIGN: The test was carried out in accordance with regulations, by selecting all of the cooking zones on the hob to form a single area, or by using the Dynamic Surface function. Please refer to our website www.kitchenaid.eu for complete instructions for use. In addition, you will find a lot more useful information about your products, such as inspiring recipes created and tested by our brand ambassadors or the nearest KitchenAid cookery school. [...]<p><a class="btn btn-secondary understrap-read-more-link" href="https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/hob-400011286583/">Read More...</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h3></h3>
<h4>KitchenAid Induction Hob</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-product.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Quick Guide<br />
</strong>THANK YOU FOR BUYING A KITCHENAID PRODUCT<br />
In order to receive a more complete assistance, please register your product on <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.eu/register" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.eu/register</a></p>
<ul>
<li>Before using the appliance carefully read the Safety Instruction.</li>
</ul>
<h4>Product description</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-01.webp" /></p>
<ol>
<li> Hob</li>
<li> Control panel</li>
</ol>
<h5>Control Panel</h5>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-02.webp" /></p>
<ol>
<li> On/ off button</li>
<li> Indicator light – hob switched on</li>
<li> “Gourmet Library” button (special functions)</li>
<li> Indicator light – key lock active</li>
<li>Key lock</li>
<li>Cooking zone selection display</li>
<li>Cooking zone off button</li>
<li> Slide touchscreen</li>
<li> Quick heat button</li>
<li>“Manage functions” display</li>
</ol>
<h5>Accessories</h5>
<p><strong>POTS AND PANS<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-03.webp" /></strong>Only use pots and pans made from ferromagnetic material which are suitable for use with induction hobs. To determine whether a pot is suitable, check for the symbol (usually stamped on the bottom). A magnet may be used to check whether pots are magnetic. The quality and the structure of the pot base can alter cooking performance. Some indications for the diameter of the base do not correspond to the actual diameter of the ferromagnetic surface.</p>
<p><strong>EMPTY POTS OR POTS WITH A THIN BASE</strong><br />
Do not use empty pots or pans when the hob is on. The hob is equipped with an internal safety system that constantly monitors the temperature, activating the “automatic off” function where high temperatures are detected. When used with empty pots or pots with thin bases, the temperature may rise very quickly, and the “automatic off” function may be triggered with a slight delay, damaging the pot or pan. If this occurs, do not touch anything, and wait for all components to cool down. If any error messages appear, call the service centre.<br />
MINIMUM DIAMETER OF POT/PAN BASE FOR THE DIFFERENT COOKING AREAS<br />
To ensure that the hob functions properly, the pot must cover one or more of the reference points indicated on the surface of the hob, and must be of a suitable minimum diameter.</p>
<table width="1085">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="200"><strong>Positioning of accessory</strong></td>
<td width="197"><strong>Minimum diameter</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="200">centred on 1 point</td>
<td width="197">10 cm</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="200">2 points covered</td>
<td width="197">19 cm</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="200">3 points covers</td>
<td width="197">fish kettle/wire rack</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="200">4 points covered (horizontal)</td>
<td width="197">fish kettle/wire rack</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="200">4 points (2 + 2) covered (vertical)</td>
<td width="197">24 cm</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h5>First time use</h5>
<p>The hob settings can be changed at any time. To change the settings, click on the  symbol that   appears on the manage functions display.<br />
From the settings menu, you can:</p>
<ul>
<li> select the language;</li>
<li> adjust the brightness;</li>
<li> adjust the volume of the sound alerts;</li>
<li> adjust the button tones;</li>
<li> adjust the power of the hob;</li>
<li> restore the factory settings of the hob;</li>
<li>check the software version installed.</li>
</ul>
<p>If a power failure occurs, the settings are maintained.</p>
<p><strong>ADJUSTING THE POWER OF THE HOB</strong><br />
The maximum power level of the hob can be set from the settings menu, in accordance with requirements, or with the timer duration. The power levels available are: 2.5kW – 4.0kW – 6.0kW – 7.4kW.<br />
Daily use</p>
<p><strong>SWITCHING THE HOB ON/OFF</strong><br />
To switch the hob on, press the on button for approx. 1 second until the displays light up. The hob will be automatically deactivated after 30 seconds if you do not select a function within this time. The hob turns off if you press any button for more than 10 seconds. To switch off, press the same button until the displays switch off. All the cooking zones are deactivated. If the hob has been in use, when you switch it off, all cooking zones will be deactivated, and the residual heat indicator “H” will remain lit until the cooking zones have cooled down.</p>
<p><strong>SELECTING THE COOKING ZONE</strong><br />
The desired cooking zone can be selected from the left-hand display, by pressing the corresponding pane. On all the not selecetd zones a lightly stripe will appear.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-04.webp" /><strong>SELECTING THE FLEXIBLE AREA</strong><br />
The flexible area is the area in which several of the cooking zones overlap, and can be used as a single cooking zone.</p>
<p><strong>To create a flexible area:</strong><br />
Select multiple panes or slide your finger across, gradually joining the panes together. <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-05.webp" /><strong>To divide a flexible area:</strong><br />
Press and hold the pane corresponding to the zone that you want to separate for 3 seconds. Alternatively, press the “divide zone” button that appears in the manage functions display. When the cooking zone is divided, the same level of power is set for each of the separate zones. If all the selected cooking zones are not covered by the pot in 30 seconds, a dense striped will appear on the left-hand display. It’s possible to reactivate that area with the “place a pot” command usign the right-hand display.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-06.webp" /><strong>ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING COOKING ZONES AND ADJUSTING POWER</strong><br />
To activate the cooking zones:</p>
<ol>
<li>Switch on the hob. If a recipient is already in place, the hob automatically detects it. Select the suggested zone to choose the power.</li>
<li> Place the pot in the chosen cooking zone, ensuring that it is covering one or more of the reference points on the surface of the hob.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-07.webp" />
<ul>
<li>Using this position will allow you to benefit from maximum power output.<br />
<strong>Please note:</strong> Do not cover the display or the slide touchscreen with accessories. If a utensil is covering one of the displays, the hob may not function properly. On the right display, the message «CHECK TOUCH AREA, remove the object within one minute» will appear. Remove the object and wait until the message disappears. If the problem persists, disconnect and reconnect the power to the cooktop.<br />
In the cooking zones close to the control panel, it is advisable to keep pots and pans inside the markings (taking both the bottom of the pan and the upper edge into consideration, as this tends to be larger). This prevents excessive overheating of the touchpad. When grilling or frying, please use the rear cooking zones wherever possible.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-08.webp" /></li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Select the cooking zone or flexible area from the left-hand display.</li>
<li>Set the desired power level by pressing or moving your finger horizontally across the slide touchscreen.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-10.webp" />The power level set will appear in the pane of the cooking zone selected.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-09.webp" />Each cooking zone offers a range of different heat settings, from “1” (minimum power) to “18” (maximum power). Using the slide touchscreen, you can also select the quick heat function, which will appear on the display with the letter “P”.<br />
<strong>Please note:</strong> If the pot is not suitable for induction cooking, is not positioned correctly or is not of an appropriate size, the cooking zone pane will flash. If no pot is detected within 30 seconds of making the selection, the cooking zone switches off.</p>
<p><strong>To deactivate the cooking zones:</strong><br />
Select the cooking zone in the left-hand display and press the “OFF” button at the top of the slide touchscreen. If the cooking zone is still hot, the residual heat indicator “H” will appear in the corresponding pane.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-11.webp" /><strong>PLACE A POT</strong><br />
When using a cooking area composed of several zones, the pot can be placed anywhere on the active area. The hob will automatically recognize the actual positioning of the pot. If you wish to add an additional pot to the active cooking area, use the “Place a pot” command to allow the hob to detect the new pot.</p>
<p><strong>KEY LOCK</strong><br />
To prevent accidental activation of the hob during cleaning, or to prevent the controls from being changed accidentally whilst cooking, press the “Key lock” button for 3 seconds: a beep and a warning light indicate that this function has been activated. The control panel will be locked, with the exception of the off button.<br />
To reactivate the controls, press the “Key Lock” button again for 3 seconds. The warning light  switches off and the hob is active again.</p>
<p><strong>TIMER</strong><br />
When the hob is off, you can use the right-hand display as a timer.</p>
<p><strong>To activate the timer:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li> Switch on the hob.</li>
<li> Press the hourglass icon that appears on the manage functions display.</li>
<li> Use the ”+”/”–” buttons to set the time.</li>
<li>When the set time has elapsed, an acoustic signal sounds.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To change or deactivate the timer:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Press the hourglass icon that appears on the manage functions display.</li>
<li>Use the ”+” and ”–” buttons to reset the desired time, or press the “STOP” button to turn off the timer.</li>
</ol>
<h5>SETTING THE COOKING TIME</h5>
<p>The cooking zones can be programmed to switch off automatically.</p>
<p><strong>To set the cooking time:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Select the cooking zone and set the required power level.</li>
<li>Press the stopwatch icon that appears on the manage functions display.</li>
<li>Use the ”+”/”–” buttons to set the time.</li>
<li>Once the set time has elapsed, an acoustic signal sounds and the cooking zone switches off automatically.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To change or deactivate the cooking timer</strong></p>
<ol>
<li> Select the active cooking zone.</li>
<li>Press the stopwatch icon that appears on the manage functions display.</li>
<li>Use the ”+” and ”–” buttons to reset the desired time, or press the “STOP” button to cancel the set cooking time.</li>
</ol>
<p>A cooking time can be set for each zone or flexible area by following the same steps.</p>
<p><strong>RESIDUAL HEAT INDICATOR</strong><br />
When the letter “H” appears in one of the cooking zone selection display panes, this means that the corresponding cooking zone is still hot. When the cooking zone has cooled, the “H” disappears.</p>
<h4>Special functions</h4>
<p>GOURMET LIBRARY<br />
The “Gourmet Library” button allows users to access a number of special features:</p>
<ul>
<li>Sous Chef</li>
<li> French Plaque</li>
<li> Dynamic Surface</li>
</ul>
<p>In the right-hand manage functions display, you can navigate between the special functions and select the option you want. With the arrows, you can scroll through the available options. Use the button OK to confirm your choice, and the double arrow to return to the previous menu.</p>
<p><strong>SOUS CHEF</strong><br />
This function allows you to select one of the pre-set functions which help you to cook a range of different types of food in the best possible manner. The hob assists the user by providing ideal conditions for heating and seasoning the pot. It also provides instructions to be followed during the different stages of cooking, in order to achieve optimum results.</p>
<p><strong>To activate the Sous Chef function:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Press the “Gourmet Library” button.</li>
<li>Select “Sous Chef” from the manage functions display and confirm.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-12.webp" /></li>
<li>Select the category of food that you plan to cook and confirm. <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-13.webp" /></li>
<li>Select the cooking method and confirm. <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-14.webp" /></li>
<li>Select the cooking conditions and confirm. <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-15.webp" /></li>
<li>Four cooking zones will now be available. Place the pot in position, ensuring that it is covering at least two of the reference points on the surface of the hob.<br />
The “Moka” cooking mode is the only one which allows just one reference point to be covered. Below is an example of positioning for a number of accessories.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-16.webp" /></li>
<li>Select the desired cooking zone from the left-hand display. An “A” will appear in the selected zone. <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-17.webp" /></li>
<li>In the right-hand display, the instructions to follow will appear (e.g.”Add Oil” or “Add food”). At the end of each stage, the user must confirm in order to proceed with cooking.</li>
<li> If necessary, the pre-set power level can be changed at any time, using the ”+” and ”–” buttons.</li>
<li> When cooking is complete, press the “STOP” button to turn off the cooking zone. If multiple zones have been used during cooking, you must first select the cooking zone you want to switch off.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-18.webp" /></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Please note:</strong> The “Sous Chef” function can be activated even when one or more cooking zones are already active.</p>
<p><strong>To activate the Sous Chef function for more than one cooking zone:</strong><br />
After activating the “Sous Chef” function for the first cooking zone, press the “Gourmet Library” button again, and repeat the activation process for a new cooking zone. Zones that are already active cannot be selected.<br />
<strong>Please note:</strong> You can use up to 4 zones with the “Sous Chef” function, provided that the power level setting selected allows for this.<br />
The zones cannot be combined to form a larger area.</p>
<p><strong>To cook traditionally when the Sous Chef function is active:</strong><br />
When the “Sous Chef” function is active, you can select the cooking zone that you wish to activate from the left-hand display, and set the power level for this zone, before proceeding with using this in the normal way.<br />
<strong>Selectable options</strong></p>
<table width="1078">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" width="151"><strong>FOOD CATEGORY</strong></td>
<td width="276"><strong>COOKING METHOD</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="38"><strong><em><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-19.webp" /></em></strong></td>
<td width="113">Meat</td>
<td width="276">Grilling, Pan frying, Boiling</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="38"><strong><em><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-20.webp" /></em></strong></td>
<td width="113">Fish</td>
<td width="276">Grilling, Pan frying, Boiling</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="38"><strong><em><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-21.webp" /></em></strong></td>
<td width="113">Vegetables</td>
<td width="276">Grilling, Pan frying, Boiling</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="38"><strong><em><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-22.webp" /></em></strong></td>
<td width="113">Sauces and soups</td>
<td width="276">Sauces (Tomato, Béchamel)<br />
Soups (Searing, Simmering, Creamy soups)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="38"><strong><em><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-23.webp" /></em></strong></td>
<td width="113">Desserts</td>
<td width="276">Custard, Panna cotta, Melted chocolate, Pancake, Rice pudding</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="38"><strong><em><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-24.webp" /></em></strong></td>
<td width="113">Eggs</td>
<td width="276">Fried eggs, Omelette, Boiling (Boiled eggs, Soft-boiled), Frittata, Scrambled</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="38"><strong><em><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-25.webp" /></em></strong></td>
<td width="113">Cheese</td>
<td width="276">Grilling, Pan frying, Fondue</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="38"><strong><em><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-26.webp" /></em></strong></td>
<td width="113">Pasta</td>
<td width="276">Boiling, Pan frying, Risotto, Rice pudding</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="38"><strong><em><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-27.webp" /></em></strong></td>
<td width="113">Beverages</td>
<td width="276">Milk, Water, Moka</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="38"><strong><em><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-28.webp" /></em></strong></td>
<td width="113">Custom</td>
<td width="276">Boiling, Grilling, Pan frying, Simmering, Melting</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h5>MAIN COOKING METHODS</h5>
<p>(Each method may include additional options)</p>
<p><strong>MELTING</strong><br />
To bring food to the ideal temperature for melting and to maintain the condition of the food without risk of burning. This method does not damage delicate foods such as chocolate, and prevents them from sticking to the pot. The rate of cooking can be adjusted at any time using the ”+” and ”–” buttons on the right-hand display.</p>
<p><strong>SIMMERING</strong><br />
For slow-cook dishes and for slowly evaporating liquid, maintaining the condition of the food without risk of burning. This method does not damage food, and prevents it from sticking to the pot. The quality and type of pot can affect performance or cooking times. The rate of cooking can be adjusted at any time using the ”+” and ”–” buttons on the right-hand display.</p>
<p><strong>BOILING</strong><br />
To efficiently heat water and alert the user when it begins to boil, via an audible and visual signal. While awaiting confirmation from the user, the system keeps the water at a controlled simmer, preventing spills and wasted energy. Whilst this function is active, an audible alarm warns the user if the pot is empty (no water) or if it has boiled dry.<br />
Only add salt after the boiling alert has sounded.</p>
<p><strong>PAN FRYING</strong><br />
To preheat or season an empty pot or pan. An audible and visual signal indicates that the ideal temperature has been reached for food to be added to the pot or pan. While awaiting confirmation from the user, the system keeps the accessory at a controlled heat, preventing the pan from reaching damaging temperatures and avoiding energy wastage.<br />
For optimum conditions, use this function with pots and seasoning at room temperature. Dedicated accessories must be used for this function. Do not use the lid – to protect against splashes, a splash guard is recommended. It is advisable to use oils that are suitable for frying when cooking with this function, such as seed oils of various types. When using different oils, always take extra care to supervise cooking during first use.<br />
<strong>GRILLING</strong><br />
This function allows for optimum grilling of a range of foods, according to their thickness. When the ideal temperature has been reached for food to be added, the hob beeps. The hob then stabilizes the temperature throughout cooking, keeping it constant. Once the user has confirmed that food has been added, cooking begins. It is advisable to prepare the food during the heating stage, adding it as soon as you hear the beep. For optimum conditions, use this function with pots and seasoning at room temperature. If you are not using the wire rack designed for this purpose, take extra care when first using the grill function, as the quality of the base may affect heating times. Accessories with very thin bases can reach very high temperatures in a short time.</p>
<p><strong>MOKA</strong><br />
This function allows “moka” stove-top coffee makers to be heated automatically. The heating cycle can be activated by selecting the function in the menu, and a beep will sound when the coffee is ready. The function is programmed to switch off automatically, preventing spills. When using for the first time, always check that the conditions described are met. For optimum conditions, use this function with the coffee maker and water at room temperature.</p>
<ul>
<li>For these functions, the use of dedicated accessories is recommended:</li>
<li> for boiling: WMF SKU: 07.7524.6380</li>
<li> for pan frying: WMF SKU: 05.7528.4021</li>
<li> for grilling: WMF SKU: 05.7650.4291</li>
<li> for Moka, Bialetti: MOKA INDUZIONE 3TZ ANTRACITE</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Please note:</strong> Try not to move the pot or pan during the first minute of heating, in order to allow the hob to function optimally.</p>
<p><strong>FRENCH PLAQUE</strong><br />
This function divides the hob into four cooking zones, activating these simultaneously at a pre-set power level. It allows you to move pots from one area to another, to allow you to continue cooking at different temperatures.</p>
<p><strong>To activate the French Plaque function:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Place the pot in position.</li>
<li> Press the “Gourmet Library” button.</li>
<li>Select “French Plaque” from the manage functions display and confirm.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-29.webp" /></li>
<li>The four cooking zone panes appear on the left-hand display, with the corresponding power level (low, medium, high).</li>
<li> If you wish to add more pots, use the “Add pot” command</li>
<li>To exit this function, press “STOP”.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-30.webp" /></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To change the power of a cooking zone:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li> Select cooking zone.</li>
<li>Select the desired power level by dragging your finger across the slide touch screen, which will remain visible for 1 second.</li>
<li> The word corresponding to the power level selected (low, medium, high) reappears.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Please note:</strong> The changed settings are saved until you change them again or reset them.</p>
<p><strong>DYNAMIC SURFACE</strong><br />
This function allows you to use the entire hob as a single cooking area.</p>
<p><strong>To activate the Dynamic Surface function:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Place the pot in position.</li>
<li> Press the “Gourmet Library” button.</li>
<li>Select “Dynamic Surface” from the manage functions display and confirm.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-31.webp" /></li>
<li>Set the desired power level from the slide touchscreen. The power level set appears on the left- hand display.</li>
<li>If you wish to add more pots, use the “Place a pot” command</li>
<li>To exit this function, press “STOP”.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-32.webp" /></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Cooking table</strong></p>
<table width="1424">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" width="103"><strong>POWER LEVEL</strong></td>
<td width="104"><strong>TYPE OF COOKING</strong></td>
<td width="276"><strong>RECOMMENDED USE<br />
</strong>Indicating cooking experience and habits</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="60">Max. heat setting</td>
<td width="43">P</td>
<td width="104">Fast heating</td>
<td width="276">Ideal for rapidly increasing the temperature of food to a fast boil (for water) or for rapidly heating cooking liquids.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="8" width="60"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-33.webp" /></td>
<td rowspan="2" width="43">14 – 18</td>
<td width="104">Frying, boiling</td>
<td width="276">Ideal for browning, starting to cook, frying deep-frozen products, bringing liquids to the boil quickly.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="104">Browning, sautéing, boiling, grilling</td>
<td width="276">Ideal for sautéing, maintaining a lively boil, cooking and grilling.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2" width="43">10 – 14</td>
<td width="104">Browning, cooking, stewing, sautéing, grilling</td>
<td width="276">Ideal for sautéing, maintaining a gentle boil, cooking and grilling, and preheating accessories.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="104">Cooking, stewing, sautéing, grilling, cooking until creamy</td>
<td width="276">Ideal for stewing, maintaining a gentle boil, cooking and grilling (for longer periods).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2" width="43">5 – 9</td>
<td rowspan="2" width="104">Cooking, simmering, thickening, creaming</td>
<td width="276">Ideal for slower-cook recipes (rice, sauces, roast, fish) with liquids (e.g. water, wine, broth, milk), and for creaming pasta.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="276">Ideal for slow-cook recipes (quantities under 1 litre: rice, sauces, roasts, fish) with liquids (e.g. water, wine, broth, milk).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2" width="43">1 – 4</td>
<td width="104">Melting, thawing</td>
<td width="276">Ideal for softening butter, gently melting chocolate, thawing small items.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="104">Keeping food warm, creaming risotto</td>
<td width="276">Ideal for keeping small portions of just-cooked food or serving dishes warm and for creaming risotto.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="60">Zero power</td>
<td width="43">Off</td>
<td width="104">–</td>
<td width="276">Hob in stand-by or off mode (possible end-of-cooking residual heat, indicated by an “H”).</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4><strong>Maintenance and cleaning</strong></h4>
<p><strong>WARNING</strong></p>
<ul>
<li> Do not use steam cleaning equipment.</li>
<li> Before cleaning, make sure the cooking zones are switched off and that the residual heat indicator (“H”) is not displayed.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Important:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li> Do not use abrasive sponges or scouring pads as they may damage the glass.</li>
<li> After each use, clean the hob (when it is cool) to remove any deposits and stains from food residue.</li>
<li>Sugar or foods with a high sugar content can damage the hob and must be immediately removed.</li>
<li> Salt, sugar and sand could scratch the glass surface.</li>
<li> Use a soft cloth, absorbent kitchen paper or a special hob cleaner (follow the Manufacturer’s instructions).</li>
<li> Spills of liquid in the cooking zones can cause the pots to move or vibrate.</li>
<li> After cleaning the hob, dry thoroughly.</li>
</ul>
<p>The hob has been treated with a finish that makes it easy to clean and keeps the surface shiny for a long time.</p>
<p><strong>To clean Kitchenaid hobs, follow these recommendations:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li> Use a soft cloth (microfibre is best) dampened with water or with everyday glass cleaning detergent.</li>
<li> For best results, leave a wet cloth on the glass hob surface for a few minutes.</li>
</ul>
<h4>Troubleshooting</h4>
<ul>
<li> Check that the electricity supply has not been shut off.</li>
<li> If you are unable to turn the hob off after using it, disconnect it from the power supply.</li>
<li> If alphanumeric codes appear on the display when the hob is switched on, consult the following table for instructions.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Please note:</strong> The presence of water, liquid spilled from pots or any objects resting on any of the hob buttons can accidentally activate or deactivate the control panel lock function.</p>
<table width="1340">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="86"><strong>ERROR CODE</strong></td>
<td width="132"><strong>DESCRIPTION</strong></td>
<td width="132"><strong>POSSIBLE CAUSE</strong></td>
<td width="132"><strong>SOLUTION</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="86">C81, C82</td>
<td width="132">The control panel switches off because of excessively high temperatures.</td>
<td width="132">The internal temperature of electronic parts is too high.</td>
<td width="132">Wait for the hob to cool down before using it again.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="86">F02, F04</td>
<td width="132">The connection voltage is wrong.</td>
<td width="132">The sensor detects a discrepancy between the appliance voltage and that of the mains supply.</td>
<td width="132">Disconnect the hob from the mains and check the electrical connection.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="86">F01, F06, F12, F13, F25, F34, F35, F36, F37, F41, F47, F58, F61, F76</td>
<td colspan="3" width="397">Disconnect the hob from the power supply. Wait a few seconds then reconnect the hob to the power supply. If the problem persists, call the service centre and specify the error code that appears on the display.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h5>Sounds produced during operation</h5>
<p>Hobs may produce noises during normal operation. During the pot recognition phase, the hob produces a click sound, while during cooking, hissing or crackling sounds may be heard. Hisses and crackles actually come from the pots, and are produced by specific features of the base of the pot being used (for example, when a base is made from several layers of material, or is irregular). These noises may vary depending on the accessories used and the amount of food that these contain, and do not indicate any type of defect.</p>
<p><strong>Verified cooking</strong><br />
A table below has been created specially to make it possible for inspection bodies to use our products.</p>
<table width="1379">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="200"><strong>Verified cooking</strong></td>
<td width="244"><strong>Verified cooking positions</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="200">Heat distribution, “Pancakes” test acc. to EN 60350-2 §7.3</td>
<td rowspan="4" width="244"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAid-Induction-Hob-34.webp" /></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="200">Heat performance, “French fries” test acc. to EN 60350-2 §7.4</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="200">Melting and keep warm, “chocolate”</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="200">Simmering, “rice pudding”</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>ECO-DESIGN:</strong> The test was carried out in accordance with regulations, by selecting all of the cooking zones on the hob to form a single area, or by using the Dynamic Surface function.<br />
Please refer to our website <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.eu/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.eu</a> for complete instructions for use. In addition, you will find a lot more useful information about your products, such as inspiring recipes created and tested by our brand ambassadors or the nearest KitchenAid cookery school.</p>
<form id="commentform" class="comment-form" action="https://manuals.plus/wp-comments-post.php" method="post" novalidate="">
<p class="form-submit">
</form>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>KitchenAId W10903390B Built-In Microwave Combination Ovens Manual</title>
		<link>https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/w10903390b-ovens/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[ItsManual]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Sun, 09 Jul 2023 14:27:45 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[KitchenAid]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://usemanuals.com/?p=150934</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[&#160; BUILT-IN MICROWAVE COMBINATION OVENS – MICROWAVE OVEN USER INSTRUCTIONS W10903390B THANK YOU for purchasing this high-quality product. Register your built-in oven at www.kitchenaid.com. In Canada, register your microwave oven at www.kitchenaid.ca. For future reference, please make a note of your product model and serial numbers. These can be found on the label located on the oven frame behind the top right side of the oven door. Model Number _________________________________________ Serial Number __________________________________________ BUILT-IN OVEN SAFETY Your safety and the safety of others are very important. We have provided many important safety messages in this manual and on your appliance. Always read and obey all safety messages. his is the safety alert symbol. This symbol alerts you to potential hazards that can kill or hurt you and others. All safety messages will follow the safety alert symbol and either the word “DANGER” or “WARNING.” These words mean: DANGER You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t immediately follow instructions. WARNING You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t follow instructions. All safety messages will tell you what the potential hazard is, tell you how to reduce the chance of injury, and tell you what can happen if the instructions are not followed. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS When using electrical appliances basic safety precautions should be followed, including the following: WARNING: To reduce the risk of burns, electric shock, fire, injury to persons, or exposure to excessive microwave energy:  Read all instructions before using the microwave oven. Read and follow the specific “PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID POSSIBLE EXPOSURE TO EXCESSIVE MICROWAVE ENERGY” found in this section. The microwave oven must be grounded. Connect only to properly grounded outlet. See “GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS” found in this section.  Install or locate the microwave oven only in accordance with the provided Installation Instructions.  Some products such as whole eggs in the shell and sealed containers – for example, closed glass jars – may explode and should not be heated in the microwave oven.  Use the microwave oven only for its intended use as described in this manual. Do not use corrosive chemicals or vapors in the microwave oven. This type of oven is specifically designed to heat, cook, or dry food. It is not designed for industrial or laboratory use.  Oversized foods or oversized metal utensils should not be inserted in the microwave oven as they may create a fire or risk of electric shock. Do not clean with metal scouring pads. Pieces can burn off the pad and touch electrical parts involving a risk of electric shock.  Do not store any materials, other than the manufacturer’s recommended accessories, in this oven when not in use.  Do not operate the microwave oven if it has a damaged cord or plug, if it is not working properly, or if it has been damaged or dropped.  Do not deep fry in the oven. Microwavable utensils are not suitable and it is difficult to maintain appropriate deep frying temperatures.  Do not use paper products when the appliance is operated in the “PAN BROWN” mode.  Do not cover racks or any other part of the oven with metal foil. This will cause overheating of the oven.  As with any appliance, close supervision is necessary when used by children.  The microwave oven should be serviced only by qualified service personnel. Contact the nearest authorized service company for examination, repair, or adjustment. Do not cover or block any openings on the microwave oven. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS  Liquids, such as water, coffee, or tea are able to be overheated beyond the boiling point without appearing to be boiling. Visible bubbling or boiling when the container is removed from the microwave oven is not always present. THIS COULD RESULT IN VERY HOT LIQUIDS SUDDENLY BOILING OVER WHEN THE CONTAINER IS DISTURBED OR A SPOON OR OTHER UTENSIL IS INSERTED INTO THE LIQUID. To reduce the risk of injury to persons: – Do not overheat the liquid. – Stir the liquid both before and halfway through heating it. – Do not use straight-sided containers with narrow necks. – After heating, allow the container to stand in the microwave oven for a short time before removing the container. – Use extreme care when inserting a spoon or other utensil into the container.  Liquids, such as water, coffee, or tea are able to be overheated beyond the boiling point without appearing to be boiling. Visible bubbling or boiling when the container is removed from the microwave oven is not always present. THIS COULD RESULT IN VERY HOT LIQUIDS SUDDENLY BOILING OVER WHEN THE CONTAINER IS DISTURBED OR A SPOON OR OTHER UTENSIL IS INSERTED INTO THE LIQUID. To reduce the risk of injury to persons: – Do not overheat the liquid. – Stir the liquid both before and halfway through heating it. – Do not use straight-sided containers with narrow necks. – After heating, allow the container to stand in the microwave oven for a short time before removing the container. – Use extreme care when inserting a spoon or other utensil into the container. PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID POSSIBLE EXPOSURE TO EXCESSIVE MICROWAVE ENERGY (a) Do not attempt to operate this oven with the door open since an open-door operation can result in harmful exposure to microwave energy. It is important not to defeat or tamper with the safety interlocks. (b) Do not place any object between the oven front face and the door or allow soil or cleaner residue to accumulate on sealing surfaces. (c) Do not operate the oven if it is damaged. It is particularly important that the oven door close properly and that there is no damage to the: (1) Door (bent), (2) Hinges and latches (broken or loosened), (3) Door seals and sealing surfaces. (d) The oven should not be adjusted or repaired by anyone except properly qualiﬁed service personnel. Electrical Requirements Observe all governing codes and ordinances. The microwave oven is connected to both 120 V sides of the 208/240 V circuit required for electrical connections. If the incoming voltage to the microwave oven is less than 120 V, cooking times may be longer. Have a qualified electrician check your electrical system. This device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules. GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS For a permanently connected microwave oven: The microwave oven must be connected to a grounded, metallic, permanent wiring system, or an equipment grounding conductor should be run with the circuit conductors and connected to the equipment-grounding terminal or lead on the microwave oven. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS PARTS AND FEATURES This manual covers different models. The oven you have purchased may have some or all of the items listed. The locations and appearances of the features shown here may not match those of your model. A. Electronic oven control B. convection element and fan (hidden behind the back panel) C. Light (inaccessible, in-ceiling) D. Grill element (can be lowerE. Turntable F. Metal shielded window G. Lower oven (on combination models, see separate Use and Care Guide) H. Door safety lock system I. Dual microwave emission J. Cooking guide label K. Model and serial number plate (on the right mounting rail, single oven models) Parts and Features not shown Steamer Convection grid Crisper pan and handle Baking tray Baking Tray  The baking tray can be used only with convection cooking.  To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not use in combination with microwave cooking.  The baking tray will become hot. Always use oven mitts or pot holders when handling. See the “Positioning Baking Tray” section before using it. See the “Assistance or Service” section to reorder. Turntable NOTE: By touching the Turntable On/Off keypad, it is possible to switch the turntable On and Off during some microwave cycles. The turntable can be turned On or Off during the Manual Cook, Manual Reheat, Manual Defrost, Manual Steam Cook, and all Easy Convect™ cycles. The turntable rotates in both directions to help cook food more evenly. Do not operate the microwave oven without having the turntable in place. See the “Assistance or Service” section to reorder any of the parts. The raised, curved lines in the center of the turntable bottom fit between the 3 spokes of the hub. The hub turns the turntable during microwave oven use. The rollers on the support should fit inside the turntable bottom ridge. Convection rack The convection rack provides optimal heat circulation for convection cooking. The rack will become hot. Always use oven mitts or pot holders when handling.  To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not allow the rack to touch the inside cavity walls, ceiling or floor.  Always use the turntable.  To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not store the rack in the microwave oven.  Two-level cooking is not recommended.  For best results, do not place popcorn bags on the rack.  The rack is designed specifically for this microwave oven. For best cooking results, do not attempt to use any other rack in this microwave oven.  See the “Assistance or Service” section to reorder. Crisper Pan and Handle The crisper pan, with its nonstick surface and detachable handle, has been specifically designed for microwave use and is ideal for pan-frying (pan-browning) foods in the microwave oven.  The crisper pan will become hot. Always use the handle and oven mitts or pot holders when handling. Place the gripping end on the edge of the pan, squeeze the handle, and lift the pan.  To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not allow the crisper pan or handle to touch the inside cavity walls, ceiling, or floor. Do not place a crisper pan on the convection grid. Always use the turntable as a support for the crisper pan.  To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not use another metal object with the crisper pan.  To avoid damage, do not place a hot crisper pan directly on heat-sensitive surfaces. The crisper pan is designed specifically for this microwave ven. Do not use it in any other oven.  Use only wooden or plastic cooking utensils to help avoid scratches.  See the “Assistance or Service” section to reorder. KitchenAid™ Steamer Vessel Use the Steamer Vessel with the Steam Cook feature to steam foods.  The steamer vessel will become hot. Always use oven mitts or pot holders when handling.  The steamer vessel is designed to be used only in the microwave oven. To avoid damaging steamer vessel, do not use in a conventional- or combination-type oven, with any other convection or crisp function, or on electric or gas burners.  Do not use plastic wrap or aluminum foil when covering the food.  Always place the steamer vessel on the glass turntable. Check that the turntable turns freely before starting the microwave oven.  Do not remove the lid while the base is inside the microwave oven, as the rush of steam will disrupt the sensor settings.  To avoid scratching, use plastic utensils.  Do not overfill with water. See the steam chart in the “Steam Cooking” section for the amount of water recommended. Lid: Always use the lid when steaming. Place directly over the insert and base or just the base. Insert: Use when steam cooking to keep foods such as fish and vegetables out of the water. Place insert with food directly over the base. Do not use when simmering. Base: For steam cooking, place water in the base. For simmering foods such as rice, potatoes, pasta, and vegetables, place food and water/liquid in the base. See the “Assistance or Service” section to order replacements. See the “General Cleaning” section for instructions on cleaning. Control Panel This manual covers several models. Your model may have some or all of the items listed. Refer to this manual or the Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) section of our website at www.kitchenaid.com for more detailed instructions. In Canada, refer to the Service and Support section at www.kitchenaid.ca. Keypad Feature Instructions OVEN LIGHT Oven cavity light The Oven Light keypad controls the oven light. While the oven door is closed, touch OVEN LIGHT to turn the oven light on and off. When the oven door is opened, the oven light will automatically come on. START Function start The Start keypad begins any oven function. If Start is not touched within 5 minutes after touching a keypad, the function is canceled and the time of day is displayed. MICROWAVE ADD 30 SEC Add 30Seconds The Add 30 Sec keypad will start 30 seconds of cook time at 100% power when The microwave oven is off. When a manual cook cycle is running, Add 30 Sec will add 30 seconds of cook time to the current cycle. Multiple minutes can be added by repeatedly touching Add 30 Sec. CANCEL MICROWAVE CANCEL LOWER Functioncancel The Cancel keypads stop any function for the appropriate oven except the Clock and Timer. BACK Go back a screen The Back keypad will cancel current changes and go back one screen every time it is pressed. KITCHEN TIMER Kitchen timer The Kitchen Timer keypad will set a timer that is independent of oven functions. The kitchen timer can be set in hours, minutes, and seconds, up to 99 hours. NOTE: The kitchen timer does not start or stop the oven. RECENTLY USED Recall function The Recently Used keypad allows you to quickly select a recent cycle. 1. Touch RECENTLY USED. 2. Select the desired oven cavity. 3. Select the desired recent cooking mode from the available list. NOTE: If no cooking modes have been used, there will not be any options. REMOTE ENABLE Enable RemoteApp control Press REMOTE ENABLE to enable the ability to use the KitchenAid® app. If Wi-Fi is not already enabled, the oven will attempt to connect to a local network. NOTE: Remote Enable only works for the lower oven. It does not control the microwave oven. SELF CLEAN Self-Cleaning Touch SELF CLEAN. Follow the on-screen prompts to set the self-cleaning cycle. See the “Self-Cleaning Cycle” section for more information. NOTE: Self-Clean only works for the lower oven. It does not clean the microwave oven. Welcome Guide The Welcome Guide allows you to set up your new microwave oven. This appears on your display the first time the microwave oven is powered up or after resetting the oven to factory defaults. After every selection, a tone will sound. Touch BACK at any time to return to the previous screen. Select your language and touch OK. To connect the oven to the mobile app, touch YES OR touch NOT NOW to skip this step and complete setup. Go to Step 7. Select CONNECT to automatically connect the oven to the mobile app. Download the KitchenAid app, signup, and select “Add Appliance” in the app. Follow the instructions in the app to scan the QR code from the appliance screen. To manually connect the oven to the KitchenAid app, touch FIND NETWORK. Select your home network from the list,  touch ADD A NETWORK to manually enter your home network, or touch CONNECT WITH WPS to connect to your network via WPS. If prompted, enter your Wi-Fi password.  A message will appear when the microwave oven has successfully connected to the Wi-Fi network. Touch OK.  Touch OFF and then touch OK to set the time and date manually OR touch ON and then touch OK to set the clock automatically via the Wi-Fi network. Go to Step 9.  Touch the number keypads to set the time of day. Select AM, PM, or 24-HOUR. Touch OK.  Select if Daylight Savings Time is active. Touch OK.  Select the format for displaying the date. Touch OK. Touch the number keypads to set the current date. Touch OK. Select if you want to show the clock when the oven is idle.  Touch DONE. Display Screens Clock Screen The Clock screen displays the time and date when the microwave oven is not in use. A. Status icons B. Status bar C. Kitchen timer D. Control Lock E. Home menu F. Settings menu Control Lock Touch and hold to lock the control. Only the Control Lock icon will respond when the control is locked. Home Menu Touch to set a microwave oven function or access Results mode. Kitchen Timer Shows the current kitchen timer. Touch to set or modify the kitchen timer. Settings Menu Touch to access microwave oven settings and information. Status Bar Displays current microwave oven status, such as Demo mode or locked. Status IconsIndicates a problem with the wireless connection. Indicates Remote Enable is active. Indicates +Powered Attachments are connected to the oven. Function Set Screen After selecting a microwave oven function, the Function Set screens have a variety of options to customize the cycle. Not all options are available on all microwave oven functions. Touch the option in the menu on the left to change the setting. A. Function B. Time C. Power level D. Turntable Not shown: Sensor Food/Option Amount Doneness Microwave oven temperature set Preheat Favorite Information Function Shows the current microwave function and selected oven. Sensor Indicates automatic cooking time/power level: no setting needed, just touch START to begin. Food/Option Touch to select the type of food being cooked. Amount Touch to set the amount of food being cooked. Units will change based on the type of food selected. Doneness Touch to set the doneness level of the food being cooked. Microwave oven temperature set Touch to set the microwave oven temperature. The allowed range will be displayed. Time Touch to set a length of time for the function to run. Power level Touch to set the microwave power level. Turntable Touch to set the turntable to on or off. Preheat Touch to set preheating the crisper pan or not. Favorite (optional) Touch to set the selected settings as a Favorite function. Touch again to unfavorite. Favorite microwave settings can be accessed from the Home menu. Information Touch to get specific information about the selected microwave function, how it works, what it is best used for, and how best to position racks and accessories. Status Screen While the microwave oven is in use, the display will show a timeline with information about the current microwave oven function(s). If one of the ovens is not in use, a button to use that oven will appear. A. Time of day B. Wireless strength C. Microwave oven function information D. Microwave oven timer E. Microwave oven timeline F. Lower oven settings Time of day Shows the current time of day. Wireless strength Shows the current Wi-Fi status and strength. Microwave oven function information Shows the current microwave oven function settings for the indicated cavity. Microwave oven timer Shows the remaining cook time (if set). Kitchen timer Touch to set a kitchen timer or modify an existing one. Microwave oven timeline Shows where the microwave oven is in the cooking process and when it will finish. The time in the middle of the screen is the time of day. Lower oven settings Touch to use the lower oven. See the Lower Oven User Instructions. Cooking Modes The microwave oven has a variety of cooking modes to achieve the best results every time. The cooking modes can be accessed by touching the Home icon and then selecting the desired oven or a previously saved Favorite recipe. Microwave Oven Cooking Mode  Best for Manual Cook Foods that start out wet or not solid (like batter), then firm up and gain structure or rise as they cook (like cakes or casseroles) Popcorn Bags of microwave popcorn Defrost Foods that need to be thawed before cooking Reheat Foods that have been previously cooked Soften Softening foods like butter or ice cream Melt Melting foods like chocolate or cheese Convect Bake Foods with flaky and dry crusts with moist interiors (like pastries, pies, or bread) Steam Steaming foods like vegetables or seafood Crisp Crisping or grilling foods like fries or pizza Kitchen Timer The Kitchen Timer keypad will set a timer that is independent of microwave oven functions. The kitchen timer can be set in hours, minutes, and seconds, up to 99 hours. NOTE: The kitchen timer does not start or stop the microwave oven. Touch KITCHEN TIMER. Touch HR: MIN or MIN: SEC. Touch the number keypads to set the length of time. NOTE: Touching HR: MIN or MIN: SEC, after the time has been entered, will clear the timer.  Touch the Start button on the display to start the kitchen timer. To change the kitchen timer while it is running, touch the KITCHEN TIMER, touch the number keypads to set the new length of time, and then touch UPDATE.  A sound will play when the set time ends, and a drop-down notification will appear. Touch OK to dismiss the notification. Touch BACK while setting the kitchen timer to cancel the kitchen timer. To cancel a running timer, touch KITCHEN TIMER and then the Cancel button on the display. If a Cancel keypad is touched, the respective oven will turn off. Tones/Sounds Tones are audible signals, indicating the following: Valid keypad touch  The function has been entered. The oven is preheated.  Invalid keypad touch  End of a cooking cycle  When the timer reaches zero Includes using the kitchen timer for functions other than cooking.  First oven element activation in a cooking mode  +Powered attachments connected  +Powered attachments disconnected Control is locked  Control is unlocked Control Lock The Control Lock shuts down the control panel keypads to avoid unintended use of the microwave oven. The Control Lock will remain set after a power failure if it was set before the power failure occurs. When the control is locked, only the Control Lock and Kitchen Timer keypads will function. The Control Lock is preset unlocked but can be locked. To Activate the Control Lock: Touch and hold the Control Lock icon. A countdown will appear in the gray Status bar at the top of the screen. The Control Lock icon will turn red and the Status bar will display “LOCKED” when the control is locked. To Deactivate the Control Lock: Touch and hold the Control Lock icon. A countdown will appear in the gray Status bar at the top of the screen. The Control Lock icon will no longer be red and the Status bar will be blank when the control is unlocked. Settings The Settings icon allows you access to functions and customization options for your oven. These options allow you to set the clock, change the microwave oven temperature between Fahrenheit and Celsius, turn the audible signals and prompts on and off, adjust the oven calibration, change the language, and more. Many of these options are set during the Welcome Guide. The Sabbath mode is also set using the Settings menu. Setting Available Selections Date &#38; Time  ■ Auto (Off/On)* ■ Time (AM/PM/24-Hour)* ■ Daylight Savings (Off/On)* ■ Date Format (MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/ YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD)* ■ See Date* ■ Show Clock (No &#38; Turn Off Screen/Yes &#38; Dim Screen)* Background  ■ Set Background Picture Wi-Fi  ■ Network* ■ SAID/MAC Address ■ Wireless Icon (Show [default]/Hide) ■ Wireless (On/Off)* Sounds  ■ Timers (High [default]/Medium/Low/Off) ■ Notifications (High [default]/Medium/Low/ Off) ■ Accessory In/Out (High/Medium [default]/ Low/Off) ■ Keypress (High [default]/Medium/Low/Off) ■ Mute (Sounds On [default]/Sounds Off) Temperature  ■ Temperature (Fahrenheit [default]/Celsius) Display  ■ Brightness (Low/Medium/High/Maximum [default]) Language  ■ Language (English/Français)* Attachment Registration  ■ View/Register +Powered Attachments Manage Favorites  ■ Clear All Favorites Calibrate  ■ Instructions ■ Lower Oven (0/+10°F/+20°F/+30°F/-10°F/-20°F/-30°F) (0/+6°C/+12°C/+18°C/-6°C/-12°C/-18°C) Sabbath Mode  ■ Disables all oven functions, lights, clock, and messages. Press any Cancel keypadto end Sabbath Mode. Sabbath Bake  ■ Instructions ■ Upper/Single Oven Temperature ■ Upper/Single Oven Timer ■ Lower Oven Temperature ■ Lower Oven Timer ■ Confirm (No/Yes) Demo  ■ Demo (Off [default]/On) General  ■ About (Model/Serial numbers, Software Version, SAID/MAC Address) ■ Update (Software update) Factory Reset  ■ Reset BUILT-IN MICROWAVE OVEN USE A magnetron in the oven produces microwaves that reflect off the metal floor, walls, and ceiling and pass through the turntable and appropriate cookware to the food. Microwaves are attracted to and absorbed by fat, sugar, and water molecules in the food, causing them to move, producing friction and heat which cooks the food.  To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not lean on or allow children to swing on the microwave oven door.  To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not operate the microwave oven when it is empty.  The turntable must be in place and correct side up when the microwave oven is in use. Do not use if the turntable is chipped or broken. See the “Assistance or Service” section to reorder.  Baby bottles and baby food jars should not be heated in a microwave oven.  Clothes, flowers, fruit, herbs, wood, gourds, and paper, including brown paper bags and newspaper, should not be dried in a microwave oven.  Paraffin wax will not melt in the microwave oven because it does not absorb microwaves.  Use oven mitts or pot holders when removing containers from the microwave oven.  Do not overcook potatoes. At the end of the recommended cook time, potatoes should be slightly firm. Let potatoes stand for 5 minutes. They will finish cooking while standing.  Do not cook or reheat whole eggs inside the shell. Steam buildup in whole eggs may cause them to burst. Cover poached eggs and allow a standing time. Food Characteristics When microwave cooking, the amount, size and shape, starting temperature, composition, and density of the food affect cooking results. Amount of Food The more food heated at once, the longer the cooking time needed. Check for doneness and add small increments of time if necessary. Size and Shape Smaller pieces of food will cook more quickly than larger pieces, and uniformly shaped foods cook more evenly than irregularly shaped food. Starting Temperature Room temperature foods will heat faster than refrigerated foods, and refrigerated foods will heat faster than frozen foods. Composition and Density Foods high in fat and sugar will reach a higher temperature and will heat faster than other foods. Heavy, dense foods, such as meat and potatoes, require a longer cook time than the same size of a light, porous food, such as cake. Cooking Guidelines Covering Covering food helps retain moisture, shorten cook time, and reduce spattering. Use the lid supplied with cookware. If a lid is not available, wax paper, paper towels, or plastic wrap approved for microwave ovens may be used. Plastic wrap should be turned back at one corner to provide an opening to vent steam. Condensation on the door and cavity surfaces is normal during heavy cooking. Stirring and Turning Stirring and turning redistribute heat evenly to avoid overcooking the outer edges of food. Stir from outside to the center. If possible, turn food over from bottom to top. Arranging If heating irregularly shaped or different sized foods, arrange the thinner parts and smaller sized items toward the center. If cooking several items of the same size and shape, place them in a ring pattern, leaving the center of the ring empty. Piercing Before heating, use a fork or small knife to pierce or prick foods that have a skin or membrane, such as potatoes, egg yolks, chicken livers, hot dogs, and sausage. Prick in several places to allow steam to vent. Shielding Use small, flat pieces of aluminum foil to shield the thin pieces of irregularly shaped foods, bones, and foods such as chicken wings, leg tips, and fishtails. See the “Aluminum Foil and Metal” section first. Standing Time Food will continue to cook by the natural conduction of heat even after the microwave cooking cycle ends. The length of standing time depends on the volume and density of the food. Turntable On/Off For best performance, the turntable should be on during microwave cooking. If using oversized cookware that does not turn freely on the microwave turntable, turn the turntable off. To turn off the turntable when setting a microwave function, touch TURNTABLE and then OFF. When cooking with the turntable off, food should be turned halfway through the cooking process. NOTE: The turntable cannot be turned off during any auto cooking cycle. Cookware and Dinnerware Cookware and dinnerware must fit on the turntable. Always use oven mitts or pot holders when handling because any dish may become hot from heat transferred from the food. Do not use cookware and dinnerware with gold or silver trim. Use the following chart as a guide, then test before using. Maternal “Recommendations Aluminum Foil, Metal See the “Aluminum Foil and Metal” section. Browning Dish The bottom must be at least 3/16′ (5 mm) above the turntable. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations. Ceramic Glass, Glass Acceptable for use. China, Earthenware Follow manufacturer’s recommendations. Melamine Follow manufacturer’s recommendations. Paper: Towels, Dinnerware, Napkins Use non-recycled and those approved by the manufacturer for microwave oven use. Plastic: Wraps, Bags, Covers, Dinnerware, Containers Use those approved by the manufacturer for microwave oven use. Pottery and Clay Follow manufacturer’s recommendations. Silicone Bakeware Follow manufacturer’s recommendations. Straw, Wicker, Wooden Containers Do not use in a microwave oven. Styrofoam®t Do not use in a microwave oven. Wax Paper Acceptable for use. To Test Cookware or Dinnerware for Microwave Use: Place cookware or dinnerware in the microwave oven with 1 cup (250 mL) of water beside it.  Cook at 100% cooking power for 1 minute. Do not use cookware or dinnerware if it becomes hot and the water stays cool. Aluminum Foil and Metal Always use oven mitts or pot holders when removing dishes from the microwave oven. Aluminum foil and some metal can be used in the microwave oven. If not used properly, arcing (a blue flash of light) can occur and cause damage to the microwave oven. OK for Use Racks and bakeware supplied with the microwave oven (on some models), aluminum foil for shielding, and approved meat thermometers may be used with the following guidelines:  To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not allow aluminum foil or metal to touch the inside cavity walls, ceiling or floor.  Always use the turntable.  To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not allow contact with another metal object during microwave cooking. Do Not Use Metal cookware and bakeware, gold, silver, pewter, non-approved meat thermometers, skewers, twist ties, foil liners such as sandwich wrappers, staples, and objects with gold or silver trim or a metallic glaze should not be used in the microwave oven. Positioning Baking Tray The baking tray can only be used with convection cooking and broiling (on some models). To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not use the baking tray in combination with microwave cooking. Place the baking tray on slide rails as shown below. Push in the baking tray to stop position. Check that the baking tray is level. For best cooking results, use the baking tray only in the recommended position. †® Styrofoam is a registered trademark of the Dow Chemical Company. Microwave Cooking Power Many recipes for microwave cooking specify which cooking power to use by percent, name, or number. For example, 70%=Medium-High=7. Use the following chart as a general guide for the suggested cooking power of specific foods. The power level cannot be changed in Sensor cooking modes. MICROWAVE COOKING POWER CHART Percent/ Name Number Use 100%, High (default setting) 10 Quick heating convenience foods and foods with high water content, such as soups, beverages, and most vegetables. 90% 9 Cooking small, tender pieces of meat, ground meat, poultry pieces, and fish fillets. Heating cream soups. 80% 8 Heating rice, pasta, or casseroles. Cooking and heating foods that need a cook power lower than high. For example, whole fish and meatloaf. 70%, Medium- High 7 Reheating a single serving of food. 60% 6 Cooking sensitive foods such as cheese and egg dishes, pudding, and custards. Cooking non-stirrable casseroles, such as lasagna. 50%, Medium 5 Cooking ham, whole poultry, and pot roasts. Simmering stews. 40% 4 Melting chocolate. Heating bread, rolls, and pastries. 30%, Medium- Low, Defrost 3 Defrosting bread, fish, meats, poultry, and precooked foods. 20% 2 Softening butter, cheese, and ice cream. 10%, Low 1 Taking chill out of fruit. Sensor Cook The Sensor is used in auto cooking modes. During the Sensor Cook function, a sensor automatically adjusts the cooking time and power level. The timeline will show “SENSING” and then the time countdown once the sensor identifies the cooking duration. If the microwave oven door is opened during a sensor function, the microwave oven will turn off and any additional operations will be canceled. For best cooking performance: Before using a sensor cook function, make sure power has been supplied to the microwave oven for at least 2 minutes, the room temperature is not above 95°F (35°C), and the outside of the cooking container and the microwave oven cavity is dry. Popcorn  Do not use regular paper bags or glassware.  Pop only one package of popcorn at a time.  Follow manufacturer’s instructions when using a microwave popcorn popper.  Listen for popping to slow to one pop every 1 or 2 seconds, and then stop the cycle. Do not repop unpopped kernels.  For best results, use fresh bags of popcorn. Cooking results may vary by brand and fat content.  Recommended bag sizes are 3.5 oz, 3.0 oz, and 1.75 oz. NOTE: Follow the instructions provided by the microwave popcorn manufacturer. Defrost Times and cooking powers have been preset for defrosting a number of food types. Manual Defrost requires that a cook time and power level be entered if using other than 30% cook power. For optimal results, food should be 0°F (-18°C) or colder when defrosting.  Unwrap foods and remove lids (from fruit juice) before defrosting.  Shallow packages will defrost more quickly than deep blocks. Separate food pieces as soon as possible during or at the end of the cycle for more even defrosting. Foods left outside the freezer for more than 20 minutes or frozen ready-made food should not be defrosted using an automatic Defrost setting but should be defrosted manually. Use small pieces of aluminum foil to shield parts of food such as chicken wings, leg tips, and fishtails. See the “Aluminum Foil and Metal” section first. Use the following chart as a guide when defrosting meat, poultry, fish, bread, or juice. DEFROST PREPARATION CHART MEAT Beef: ground, steaks, roast, stew The narrow or fatty areas of irregular-shaped cuts should be shielded with foil before defrosting. Do not defrost less than 1/4 lb (113 g) or two 4 oz (113 g) patties. Place all meats in a microwave-safe baking dish. Lamb: stew and chops Pork: chops, ribs, roasts, sausage POULTRY Chicken: whole and cut up Place in a microwave-safe baking dish, chicken breast-side up. Remove giblets from the whole chicken. Cornish hens Turkey: breast FISH Fillets, steaks, whole, shellfish Place in a microwave-safe baking dish. BREAD Loaves, muffins, biscuits, slices Place in a microwave-safe baking dish. JUICE Frozen juice or juice concentrate Remove from any metal containers. Place in a microwave-safe baking dish. Reheat Times and cooking powers have been preset for reheating a number of food types. Manual Reheat requires that a cook time and a power level be entered if using other than 70% cook power. Use the following chart as a guide. REHEAT CHART Food Preparation Meal Place food on the plate. Cover with plastic wrap and vent. Let stand 2-3 minutes after reheating. Beverage Do not cover. Casserole Place in a microwave-safe container. Cover with plastic wrap and vent. Stir and let stand 2-3 minutes after reheating. Pizza Place on a paper towel-lined microwave-safe plate. Soup Place in a microwave-safe container. Cover with plastic wrap and vent. Stir and let stand 2-3 minutes after reheating. Sauce Place in a microwave-safe container. Cover with plastic wrap and vent. Stir and let stand 2-3 minutes after reheating. Manual Default power level 70% Soften/Melt Soften and Melt functions may be used to soften or melt your food. Times and cooking powers have been preset for a number of food types. Use the following chart as a guide. Food Preparation Butter Unwrap and place in a microwave-safe container. Margarine Unwrap and place in a microwave-safe container. Ice Cream Place in a microwave-safe container. Chocolate Cut squares into small pieces or use chips. Place in a microwave-safe container. Cream cheese Unwrap and place in a microwave-safe container. Cheese Cut into small pieces and place in a microwave-safe container. Marshmallows Place in a microwave-safe container. EasyConvect™ Conversion A. Broil element B. convection fan C. Convection element D. Convection grid Convection cooking uses the convection element, the broil element, and the fan. Hot air is circulated throughout the oven cavity by the fan. The constantly moving air surrounds the food to heat the outer portion quickly. The convect function may be used to cook small amounts of food on a single rack. Always use the convection grid placed on the turntable or baking tray.  Do not cover turntable or convection grid or baking tray with aluminum foil. Do not use light plastic containers, plastic wrap, or paper products. All heatproof cookware or metal utensils can be used in convection cooking. Round pizza pans are excellent for convection cooking.  Use convection cooking for items such as shuffles, bread, cookies, angel food cakes, pizza, and most meats and fish.  All EasyConvect™ functions require preheating before use. Place food in the microwave oven after preheating is complete. EasyConvect™ Conversion is a function that converts a standard thermal bake cook time and temperature into an ideal cook time and temperature for convection cooking after the oven has preheated. Convection temperatures and times differ from those of standard cooking. The oven can automatically reduce standard recipe temperatures and times for convection cooking. When selecting a convection cooking mode, the option to optimize the recipe for convection will be available. To have the oven automatically adjust the set time and/or temperature for better convection cooking results, select YES. The oven will automatically adjust for convection cooking. To manually enter the set time and temperature one time, select NO. The option to optimize the recipe will be available the next time a convection cooking mode is selected. To never have the oven optimize the recipe, select NO, DON’T ASK AGAIN. The oven will not change the set time or temperature and will not ask again. This option can be reset from the Settings menu. The conversion may not be exact because foods are grouped in general categories. Use the most similar food option if your exact food is not available. Steam Cooking Steam Cook is a sensor cooking function that uses microwaves to steam food. Always use a steamer vessel. See the “KitchenAid™ Steamer Vessel” section before using. Use Steam Cook for foods such as vegetables, fish, and potatoes. Times and cooking powers have been preset for steaming a number of food types. Manual Steam Cook requires that a cook time be entered. It is recommended to add 1/2 cup (125 mL) of water to Steamer Vessel before steaming. Crisp The Crisp feature uses the broil element and microwaves to crisp and brown foods. Crisp can be used to sauté meats and vegetables, pan-fry bacon and eggs, and to crisp and brown pizza and French fries. Always use the crisper pan. See the “Crisper Pan and Handle” section before using. The crisper pan will become very hot. Use oven mitts or detachable handles to grasp and remove the pan from the oven. Do not place hot crisper pan directly on heat-sensitive surfaces. Damage may occur. Do not use plastic utensils on the crisper pan, as it becomes very hot quickly and could melt the utensils. Do not use metal utensils, as they can scratch the pan.  Do not use the crisper pan in any other microwave oven or in a standard thermal oven. Do not place the crisper pan on the convection rack or the baking tray. Always use the turntable as a support for the pan. Before Crisping, brush the crisper pan with 1/2 tsp (3 mL) of oil or spray with nonstick cooking spray. For best results, the crisper pan should be preheated for 3 minutes. Arrange food on the crisper pan, and place pan on turntable. Use the following chart as a guide. CRISPING CHART Food Cook Time(Minutes)* Preparation Bacon, 4 strips Side 1: 3:00Side 2: 1:45 Place in crisper pan in a single layer Frozen French fries,2 servings Side 1: 5:00Side 2: 2:00 Place in crisper pan in a single layer Boneless chicken breasts, 2 pieces Side 1: 4:00 Side 2: 3:00 5-6 oz (142-170 g) each Hamburger patties, 2 Side 1: 3:30 Side 2: 2:00 4 oz (113 g) each, 1/2″ (1.3 cm) thick Frozen thin crust pizza 8:00-9:00 *Times are approximate and may be adjusted for individual tastes. BUILT-IN MICROWAVE OVEN CARE General Cleaning IMPORTANT: Before cleaning, make sure all controls are off and the microwave oven is cool. Always follow label instructions on learning products. Soap, water, and a soft cloth or sponge are suggested first unless otherwise noted. STAINLESS STEEL (on some models) NOTE: To avoid damage to stainless steel surfaces, do not use soap-filled scouring pads, abrasive cleaners, cooktop polishing creme, steel-wool pads, gritty washcloths, or abrasive paper towels. Damage may occur to stainless steel surfaces, even with one-time or limited use. Rub in direction of grain to avoid damaging. Cleaning Method: Affresh® Stainless Steel Cleaner Part Number W10355016 (not included): See the “Assistance or Service” section to order. Vinegar for hard water spots. MICROWAVE OVEN DOOR EXTERIOR Cleaning Method: Glass cleaner and a soft cloth or sponge: Apply glass cleaner to soft cloth or sponge, not directly on panel. Affresh® Kitchen Appliance Cleaner Part Number W10355010(not included): See the “Assistance or Service” section to order. MICROWAVE OVEN CAVITY To avoid damage to the microwave oven cavity, do not use soap-filled scouring pads, abrasive cleaners, steel-wool pads, gritty washcloths, or some paper towels. On stainless steel models, rub in direction of the grain to avoid damage. The area where the oven door and frame touch when closed should be kept clean. Cleaning Method: Average soil Mild, nonabrasive soaps and detergents: Rinse with clean water and dry with a soft, lint-free cloth. Heavy soil Mild, nonabrasive soaps and detergents: Heat 1 cup (250 mL) of water for 2 to 5 minutes in oven. Steam will soften soil. Rinse with clean water and dry with soft, lint-free cloth. Odors  Lemon juice or vinegar: Heat 1 cup (250 mL) of water with 1 tbs (15 mL) of either lemon juice or vinegar for 2 to 5 minutes in oven. MICROWAVE OVEN CEILING The broil element does not need cleaning since the intense heat will burn off any food spatters. However, the ceiling above the broil element may need regular cleaning. Cleaning Method: Warm water, mild detergent and a sponge. To clean: Push the fastening thread gently towards the back of the ceiling and then lower it to release the broil element. Lower the front of the broil element to access the ceiling for cleaning.  Raise broil element back up and return the fastening thread back to its original location. Always return the broil element to the cooking position after cleaning. TURNTABLE Replace turntable immediately after cleaning. Do not operate the microwave oven without the turntable in place. Cleaning Method: Mild cleanser and scouring pad Dishwasher RACK Steel-wool pad Dishwasher CRISPER PAN To avoid damage to the crisper pan, do not immerse or rinse with water while the crisper pan is hot. Do not use steel-wool pads. Cleaning Method: Warm water, mild detergent, and a sponge. Heavily soiled areas can be cleaned with a scouring pad and mild cleanser. Dishwasher BAKING TRAY Dishwasher KITCHENAID™ STEAMER VESSEL Dishwasher TURNTABLE SUPPORT AND ROLLERS, HUB, CRISPER PANHANDLE Dishwasher TROUBLESHOOTING First, try the solutions suggested here. If you need further assistance or more recommendations that may help you avoid a service call, refer to the warranty page in this manual or visit http://www.kitchenaid.com/customer-service. In Canada, visit http://www.kitchenaid.ca. Contact us by mail with any questions or concerns at the address below: In the U.S.A.: KitchenAid Brand Home Appliances Customer Experience Center 553 Benson Road Benton Harbor, MI 49022-2692 In Canada: KitchenAid Brand Home Appliances Customer Experience Centre 200 – 6750 Century Ave. Mississauga, Ontario L5N 0B7 Please include a daytime phone number in your correspondence. Problem Possible Cause Solution Nothing will operate Has a household fuse blown a has the circuit breaker tripped? Replace the fuse a reset the circuit breaker. If the problem continues, all an electrician. Is the appliance wired properly? See the Installation Instructions. The microwave oven will not operate Is the door completely closed? Firmly closed0Or Is the electronic oven control set correctly? See the “Electronic Oven Control” section. On some models, is the Control Lock set? See the “Control Lock” section. On combination oven models, is the lower oven self-cleaning? The upper oven will not work diming the lower oven Sett-Cleaning Cycle Is the magnetron working properly? Try to heat 1 cup (250 mL) of cold water for 2 minutes at 100% cooking power. If water does not heat, call for service. Seethe “INarranty” section. Microwave oven makes a humming noise This is normal and occurs when the transformer% the magnetron cycles on. The microwave oven door looks wavy This is normal and will not affect performance. The turntable will not operate Is the turntable properly in place? Make sure the turntable is the correct side up and is sitting securely on the turntable support. Is the turntable support operating properly? Remove turntable. Remove and clean turntable support and rollers. Replace turntable support. Replace table. Place 1 cup (250 mL) of water on the turntable, then restart the oven. If it still is not working, call for service. See the “Warranty” section. Do not operate the oven without turntable and turntable support working properly. The turntable rotates both directions This is normal and depends on motor rotation a beginning of the cycle. Display shows messages Is the display showing a letter followed by a number? Clear the display. See the”Display(s)” section. If it reappears, call for service. See the “Warranty” section. The display shows time countdown but is not operating Is the Timer in use? See the “Timer” section. Tones are not sounding Are tones disabled? See the “Roes” section. The fan stays on after cooking is completed Depending on the temperature inside the microwave oven after a cooking cycle ends, the cooling fan may continue to run for some time in order to cool the microwave oven. The turntable may also Continue to rotate and the light may stay on during this time. This is normal. The door may be opened at any time to add a removed food, anchor to start another cooking cycle. Smoke is coming from oven vent during crisping Some smoke is normal and occurs just as in conventional crisping. Sparking during crisping This is normal and OCCURS as fat burns off from past burned off. cooling. Sparking will stop once the fat is completely Cooking times seem too long Is the cooking power set properly? See “Microwave Cooking Power” in the “Microwave Oven Use” section. Are large amounts of food being heated? Larger amounts of food need longer cooking titers. re. Is the incoming voltage less than that specified in the “Electrical Requirements” section? Have a qualified electrician check the electrical system of the house. Radio or TV Interference Is the microwave oven plugged into the same outlet? Try a different outlet. Is the radio or TV receiver near the microwave oven? Move the receiver away from the microwave oven, or adjust the radio or TV antenna. Are the microwave oven door and sealing surfaces clean? Make sure these areas are clean. ACCESSORIES For accessories in the U.S.A., you can visit our website at www.kitchenaid.com or call us at 1-800-422-1230. In Canada, visit our website at www.kitchenaid.ca or call us at 1-800-807-6777. Affresh® Stainless Steel Cleaner (stainless steel models) Order Part Number W10355016 Affresh® Stainless Steel Cleaning Wipes (stainless steel models) Order Part Number W10355049 Affresh ® Kitchen and Appliance Cleaner Order Part Number W10355010 Porcelain Broiler Pan and Grid Order Part Number 4396923 Premium Broil Pan and Roasting Rack Order Part Number W10123240 KITCHENAID ® BUILT-IN OVEN &#38; MICROWAVE LIMITED WARRANTY ATTACH YOUR RECEIPT HERE. PROOF OF PURCHASE IS REQUIRED TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE. Please have the following information available when you call the Customer eXperience Center: Name, address, and telephone number  The model number and serial number  A clear, detailed description of the problem  Proof of purchase including dealer or retailer name and address IF YOU NEED SERVICE: Before contacting us to arrange service, please determine whether your product requires repair. Some questions can be addressed without service. Please take a few minutes to review the Troubleshooting or Problem Solver section of the Use and Care Guide, or visit http://www.kitchenaid.com/customer-service. All warranty service is provided exclusively by our authorized KitchenAid Service Providers. In the U.S. and Canada, direct all requests for warranty service to: KitchenAid Customer eXperience Center In the U.S.A., call 1-800-422-1230. In Canada, call 1-800-807-6777. If outside the 50 United States or Canada, contact your authorized KitchenAid dealer to determine whether another warranty applies. TEN YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY WHAT IS COVERED FIRST-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY (PARTS AND LABOR) For one year from the date of purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated and maintained according to instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid brand of Whirlpool Corporation or Whirlpool Canada, LP (hereafter “KitchenAid”) will pay for factory specified replacement parts and repair labor to correct defects in materials or workmanship that existed when this major appliance was purchased or, at its sole discretion replace the product. In the event of product replacement, your appliance will be warranted for the remaining term of the original unit’s warranty period. SECOND THROUGH FIFTH YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY (CERTAIN COMPONENT PARTS ONLY – LABOR NOT INCLUDED) In the second through fifth years from the date of original purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated, and maintained according to instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid will pay for factory specified parts for the following components to correct non-cosmetic defects in materials or workmanship in these parts that prevent the function of this major appliance and that existed when this major appliance was purchased. This is a limited 5-year warranty on the below-named parts only and does not include repair labor. Electric element Solid-state touch control system parts SECOND THROUGH THE TENTH YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY (MICROWAVE OVENS ONLY) In the second through tenth years from the date of original purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated and maintained according to instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid will pay for factory specified parts for the stainless steel oven cavity/inner door if the part rusts through due to defects in materials or workmanship. YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE PRODUCT REPAIR AS PROVIDED HEREIN. Service must be provided by a KitchenAid designated service company. This limited warranty is valid only in the United States or Canada and applies only when the major appliance is used in the country in which it was purchased. This limited warranty is effective from the date of original consumer purchase. Proof of original purchase date is required to obtain service under this limited warranty. WHAT IS NOT COVERED Commercial, non-residential, multiple-family use, or use inconsistent with published user, operator or installation instructions.  In-home instruction on how to use your product. Service to correct improper product maintenance or installation, installation not in accordance with electrical or plumbing codes or correction of household electrical or plumbing (i.e. house wiring, fuses or water inlet hoses). Consumable parts (i.e. light bulbs, batteries, air or water filters, preservation solutions, etc.). Defects or damage caused by the use of non-genuine KitchenAid parts or accessories. Conversion of products from natural gas or propane gas. Damage from accident, misuse, abuse, fire, floods, acts of God or use with products not approved by KitchenAid.  Repairs to parts or systems to correct product damage or defects caused by unauthorized service, alteration or modification of the appliance. Cosmetic damage including scratches, dents, chips, and other damage to the appliance finishes unless such damage results from defects in materials and workmanship and is reported to KitchenAid within 30 days. Discoloration, rust or oxidation of surfaces resulting from caustic or corrosive environments including but not limited to high salt concentrations, high moisture or humidity or exposure to chemicals. Food or medicine loss due to product failure.  Pick-up or delivery. This product is intended for in-home repair.  Travel or transportation expenses for service in remote locations where an authorized KitchenAid servicer is not available.  Removal or reinstallation of inaccessible appliances or built-in fixtures (i.e. trim, decorative panels, flooring, cabinetry, islands, countertops, drywall, etc.) that interfere with servicing, removal or replacement of the product.  Service or parts for appliances with original model/serial numbers removed, altered or not easily determined. The cost of repair or replacement under these excluded circumstances shall be borne by the customer. DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO ONE YEAR OR THE SHORTEST PERIOD ALLOWED BY LAW. Some states and provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of implied warranties of merchantability or fitness, so this limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province. DISCLAIMER OF REPRESENTATIONS OUTSIDE OF WARRANTY KitchenAid makes no representations about the quality, durability, or need for service or repair of this major appliance other than the representations contained in this warranty. If you want a longer or more comprehensive warranty than the limited warranty that comes with this major appliance, you should ask KitchenAid or your retailer about buying an extended warranty. LIMITATION OF REMEDIES; EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE PRODUCT REPAIR AS PROVIDED HEREIN. KITCHENAID SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states and provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province. Notes ______________________________________________________________________ ® /™ ©2018 All rights reserved. Used under license in Canada. W10903390B [...]<p><a class="btn btn-secondary understrap-read-more-link" href="https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/w10903390b-ovens/">Read More...</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>&nbsp;</p>
<p><strong>BUILT-IN MICROWAVE</strong><br />
<strong>COMBINATION OVENS –</strong><br />
<strong>MICROWAVE OVEN USER</strong><br />
<strong>INSTRUCTIONS<br />
W10903390B<br />
</strong></p>
<p>THANK YOU for purchasing this high-quality product. Register your built-in oven at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.com</a>. In Canada, register your microwave oven at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.ca/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.ca</a>.<br />
For future reference, please make a note of your product model and serial numbers. These can be found on the label located on the oven frame behind the top right side of the oven door.<br />
Model Number _________________________________________<br />
Serial Number __________________________________________</p>
<h4>BUILT-IN OVEN SAFETY</h4>
<p><strong>Your safety and the safety of others are very important.</strong><br />
We have provided many important safety messages in this manual and on your appliance. Always read and obey all safety messages.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-.webp" />his is the safety alert symbol.<br />
This symbol alerts you to potential hazards that can kill or hurt you and others.<br />
All safety messages will follow the safety alert symbol and either the word “DANGER” or “WARNING.”<br />
These words mean:</p>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-1-1.webp" />DANGER</strong> <strong>You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t immediately follow instructions.</strong><br />
<strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-1-1.webp" />WARNING</strong> <strong>You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t follow instructions.</strong><br />
All safety messages will tell you what the potential hazard is, tell you how to reduce the chance of injury, and tell you what can happen if the instructions are not followed.</p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS<br />
</strong>When using electrical appliances basic safety precautions should be followed, including the following:</p>
<p><strong>WARNING</strong>: To reduce the risk of burns, electric shock, fire, injury to persons, or exposure to excessive microwave energy:</p>
<ul>
<li> Read all instructions before using the microwave oven.</li>
<li>Read and follow the specific “PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID POSSIBLE EXPOSURE TO EXCESSIVE MICROWAVE ENERGY” found in this section.</li>
<li>The microwave oven must be grounded. Connect only to properly grounded outlet. See “GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS” found in this section.</li>
<li> Install or locate the microwave oven only in accordance with the provided Installation Instructions.</li>
<li> Some products such as whole eggs in the shell and sealed containers – for example, closed glass jars – may explode and should not be heated in the microwave oven.</li>
<li> Use the microwave oven only for its intended use as described in this manual. Do not use corrosive chemicals or vapors in the microwave oven. This type of oven is specifically designed to heat, cook, or dry food. It is not designed for industrial or laboratory use.</li>
<li> Oversized foods or oversized metal utensils should not be inserted in the microwave oven as they may create a fire or risk of electric shock.</li>
<li>Do not clean with metal scouring pads. Pieces can burn off the pad and touch electrical parts involving a risk of electric shock.</li>
<li> Do not store any materials, other than the manufacturer’s recommended accessories, in this oven when not in use.</li>
<li> Do not operate the microwave oven if it has a damaged cord or plug, if it is not working properly, or if it has been damaged or dropped.</li>
<li> Do not deep fry in the oven. Microwavable utensils are not suitable and it is difficult to maintain appropriate deep frying temperatures.</li>
<li> Do not use paper products when the appliance is operated in the “PAN BROWN” mode.</li>
<li> Do not cover racks or any other part of the oven with metal foil. This will cause overheating of the oven.</li>
<li> As with any appliance, close supervision is necessary when used by children.</li>
<li> The microwave oven should be serviced only by qualified service personnel. Contact the nearest authorized service company for examination, repair, or adjustment.</li>
<li>Do not cover or block any openings on the microwave oven.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS</strong></p>
<ul>
<li> Liquids, such as water, coffee, or tea are able to be overheated beyond the boiling point without appearing to be boiling. Visible bubbling or boiling when the container is removed from the microwave oven is not always present.<br />
THIS COULD RESULT IN VERY HOT LIQUIDS SUDDENLY BOILING OVER WHEN THE CONTAINER IS DISTURBED OR A SPOON OR OTHER UTENSIL IS INSERTED INTO THE LIQUID.<br />
To reduce the risk of injury to persons:<br />
– Do not overheat the liquid.<br />
– Stir the liquid both before and halfway through heating it.<br />
– Do not use straight-sided containers with narrow necks.<br />
– After heating, allow the container to stand in the microwave oven for a short time before removing the container.<br />
– Use extreme care when inserting a spoon or other utensil into the container.</li>
<li> Liquids, such as water, coffee, or tea are able to be overheated beyond the boiling point without appearing to be boiling. Visible bubbling or boiling when the container is removed from the microwave oven is not always present.<br />
THIS COULD RESULT IN VERY HOT LIQUIDS SUDDENLY BOILING OVER WHEN THE CONTAINER IS DISTURBED OR A SPOON OR OTHER UTENSIL IS INSERTED INTO THE LIQUID.<br />
To reduce the risk of injury to persons:<br />
– Do not overheat the liquid.<br />
– Stir the liquid both before and halfway through heating it.<br />
– Do not use straight-sided containers with narrow necks.<br />
– After heating, allow the container to stand in the microwave oven for a short time before removing the container.<br />
– Use extreme care when inserting a spoon or other utensil into the container.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID POSSIBLE EXPOSURE TO EXCESSIVE MICROWAVE ENERGY</strong></p>
<p>(a) Do not attempt to operate this oven with the door open since an open-door operation can result in harmful exposure to microwave energy. It is important not to defeat or tamper with the safety interlocks.<br />
(b) Do not place any object between the oven front face and the door or allow soil or cleaner residue to accumulate on sealing surfaces.<br />
(c) Do not operate the oven if it is damaged. It is particularly important that the oven door close properly and that there is no damage to the:<br />
(1) Door (bent),<br />
(2) Hinges and latches (broken or loosened),<br />
(3) Door seals and sealing surfaces.<br />
(d) The oven should not be adjusted or repaired by anyone except properly qualiﬁed service personnel.</p>
<h5>Electrical Requirements</h5>
<p>Observe all governing codes and ordinances. The microwave oven is connected to both 120 V sides of the 208/240 V circuit required for electrical connections. If the incoming voltage to the microwave oven is less than 120 V, cooking times may be longer.<br />
Have a qualified electrician check your electrical system.<br />
This device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules.</p>
<p><strong>GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS</strong><br />
For a permanently connected microwave oven:<br />
The microwave oven must be connected to a grounded, metallic, permanent wiring system, or an equipment grounding conductor should be run with the circuit conductors and connected to the equipment-grounding terminal or lead on the microwave oven.<br />
<strong>SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS</strong></p>
<h4>PARTS AND FEATURES</h4>
<p>This manual covers different models. The oven you have purchased may have some or all of the items listed. The locations and appearances of the features shown here may not match those of your model.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-PARTS-AND-FEATURES.webp" /></p>
<table border="0" width="128" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20">A. Electronic oven control<br />
B. convection element and fan<br />
(hidden behind the back panel)<br />
C. Light (inaccessible, in-ceiling)<br />
D. Grill element (can be lowerE. Turntable<br />
F. Metal shielded window<br />
G. Lower oven (on combination models, see separate Use and Care Guide)</td>
<td width="64">H. Door safety lock system<br />
I. Dual microwave emission<br />
J. Cooking guide label<br />
K. Model and serial number plate (on the right mounting rail, single oven models)</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Parts and Features not shown</strong><br />
Steamer<br />
Convection grid<br />
Crisper pan and handle<br />
Baking tray<br />
<strong>Baking Tray</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-Baking-Tray.webp" /></p>
<ul>
<li> The baking tray can be used only with convection cooking.</li>
<li> To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not use in combination with microwave cooking.</li>
<li> The baking tray will become hot. Always use oven mitts or pot holders when handling.</li>
<li>See the “Positioning Baking Tray” section before using it.</li>
<li>See the “Assistance or Service” section to reorder.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Turntable</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-Turntable.webp" /></p>
<p>NOTE: By touching the Turntable On/Off keypad, it is possible to switch the turntable On and Off during some microwave cycles.<br />
The turntable can be turned On or Off during the Manual Cook, Manual Reheat, Manual Defrost, Manual Steam Cook, and all Easy Convect™ cycles.<br />
The turntable rotates in both directions to help cook food more evenly. Do not operate the microwave oven without having the turntable in place. See the “Assistance or Service” section to reorder any of the parts.<br />
The raised, curved lines in the center of the turntable bottom fit between the 3 spokes of the hub. The hub turns the turntable during microwave oven use. The rollers on the support should fit inside the turntable bottom ridge.</p>
<p><strong>Convection rack</strong><br />
The convection rack provides optimal heat circulation for convection cooking.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-Convection-Rack.webp" /></p>
<ul>
<li>The rack will become hot. Always use oven mitts or pot holders when handling.</li>
<li> To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not allow the rack to touch the inside cavity walls, ceiling or floor.</li>
<li> Always use the turntable.</li>
<li> To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not store the rack in the microwave oven.</li>
<li> Two-level cooking is not recommended.</li>
<li> For best results, do not place popcorn bags on the rack.</li>
<li> The rack is designed specifically for this microwave oven. For best cooking results, do not attempt to use any other rack in this microwave oven.</li>
<li> See the “Assistance or Service” section to reorder.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Crisper Pan and Handle</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-Crisper-Pan-and-Handle.webp" />The crisper pan, with its nonstick surface and detachable handle, has been specifically designed for microwave use and is ideal for pan-frying (pan-browning) foods in the microwave oven.</p>
<ul>
<li> The crisper pan will become hot. Always use the handle and oven mitts or pot holders when handling. Place the gripping end on the edge of the pan, squeeze the handle, and lift the pan.</li>
<li> To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not allow the crisper pan or handle to touch the inside cavity walls, ceiling, or floor.</li>
<li>Do not place a crisper pan on the convection grid. Always use the turntable as a support for the crisper pan.</li>
<li> To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not use another metal object with the crisper pan.</li>
<li> To avoid damage, do not place a hot crisper pan directly on heat-sensitive surfaces.</li>
<li>The crisper pan is designed specifically for this microwave ven. Do not use it in any other oven.</li>
<li> Use only wooden or plastic cooking utensils to help avoid scratches.</li>
<li> See the “Assistance or Service” section to reorder.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>KitchenAid™ Steamer Vessel</strong><br />
Use the Steamer Vessel with the Steam Cook feature to steam foods.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-KitchenAidE284A2-Steamer-Vessel.webp" /></p>
<ul>
<li> The steamer vessel will become hot. Always use oven mitts or pot holders when handling.</li>
<li> The steamer vessel is designed to be used only in the microwave oven. To avoid damaging steamer vessel, do not use in a conventional- or combination-type oven, with any other convection or crisp function, or on electric or gas burners.</li>
<li> Do not use plastic wrap or aluminum foil when covering the food.</li>
<li> Always place the steamer vessel on the glass turntable. Check that the turntable turns freely before starting the microwave oven.</li>
<li> Do not remove the lid while the base is inside the microwave oven, as the rush of steam will disrupt the sensor settings.</li>
<li> To avoid scratching, use plastic utensils.</li>
<li> Do not overfill with water. See the steam chart in the “Steam Cooking” section for the amount of water recommended. Lid: Always use the lid when steaming. Place directly over the insert and base or just the base.<br />
Insert: Use when steam cooking to keep foods such as fish and vegetables out of the water. Place insert with food directly over the base. Do not use when simmering.<br />
Base: For steam cooking, place water in the base. For simmering foods such as rice, potatoes, pasta, and vegetables, place food and water/liquid in the base.<br />
See the “Assistance or Service” section to order replacements.<br />
See the “General Cleaning” section for instructions on cleaning.</li>
</ul>
<h5>Control Panel</h5>
<p>This manual covers several models. Your model may have some or all of the items listed. Refer to this manual or the Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) section of our website at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.com</a> for more detailed instructions. In Canada, refer to the Service and Support section at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.ca/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.ca</a>.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-KitchenAidE284A2-Steamer-Vessel2.webp" /></p>
<table width="990">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="37">Keypad</td>
<td width="38">Feature</td>
<td width="385">Instructions</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>OVEN LIGHT</td>
<td width="38">Oven cavity light</td>
<td>The Oven Light keypad controls the oven light. While the oven door is closed, touch OVEN LIGHT to turn the oven light on and off. When the oven door is opened, the oven light will automatically come on.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>START</td>
<td>Function start</td>
<td width="385">The Start keypad begins any oven function. If Start is not touched within 5 minutes after touching a keypad, the function is canceled and the time of day is displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="37">MICROWAVE<br />
ADD 30 SEC</td>
<td width="38">Add 30Seconds</td>
<td width="385">The Add 30 Sec keypad will start 30 seconds of cook time at 100% power when The microwave oven is off.<br />
When a manual cook cycle is running, Add 30 Sec will add 30 seconds of cook time to the current cycle.<br />
Multiple minutes can be added by repeatedly touching Add 30 Sec.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="37">CANCEL MICROWAVE<br />
CANCEL LOWER</td>
<td width="38">Functioncancel</td>
<td>The Cancel keypads stop any function for the appropriate oven except the Clock and Timer.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>BACK</td>
<td width="38">Go back a screen</td>
<td width="385">The Back keypad will cancel current changes and go back one screen every time it is pressed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>KITCHEN TIMER</td>
<td width="38">Kitchen timer</td>
<td width="385">The Kitchen Timer keypad will set a timer that is independent of oven functions. The kitchen timer can be set in hours, minutes, and seconds, up to 99 hours.<br />
NOTE: The kitchen timer does not start or stop the oven.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>RECENTLY USED</td>
<td width="38">Recall function</td>
<td width="385">The Recently Used keypad allows you to quickly select a recent cycle.<br />
1. Touch RECENTLY USED.<br />
2. Select the desired oven cavity.<br />
3. Select the desired recent cooking mode from the available list.<br />
NOTE: If no cooking modes have been used, there will not be any options.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>REMOTE ENABLE</td>
<td width="38">Enable RemoteApp control</td>
<td width="385">Press REMOTE ENABLE to enable the ability to use the KitchenAid® app. If Wi-Fi is not already enabled, the oven will attempt to connect to a local network.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> Remote Enable only works for the lower oven. It does not control the microwave oven.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>SELF CLEAN</td>
<td width="38">Self-Cleaning</td>
<td width="385">Touch SELF CLEAN. Follow the on-screen prompts to set the self-cleaning cycle. See the<br />
“Self-Cleaning Cycle” section for more information.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> Self-Clean only works for the lower oven. It does not clean the microwave oven.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h5>Welcome Guide</h5>
<p>The Welcome Guide allows you to set up your new microwave oven. This appears on your display the first time the microwave oven is powered up or after resetting the oven to factory defaults.<br />
After every selection, a tone will sound. Touch BACK at any time to return to the previous screen.</p>
<ol>
<li>Select your language and touch OK.</li>
<li>To connect the oven to the mobile app, touch YES<br />
OR<br />
touch NOT NOW to skip this step and complete setup. Go to Step 7.</li>
<li>Select CONNECT to automatically connect the oven to the mobile app. Download the KitchenAid app, signup, and select “Add Appliance” in the app. Follow the instructions in the app to scan the QR code from the appliance screen.</li>
<li>To manually connect the oven to the KitchenAid app, touch FIND NETWORK. Select your home network from the list,  touch ADD A NETWORK to manually enter your home network, or touch CONNECT WITH WPS to connect to your network via WPS.<br />
If prompted, enter your Wi-Fi password.</li>
<li> A message will appear when the microwave oven has successfully connected to the Wi-Fi network. Touch OK.</li>
<li> Touch OFF and then touch OK to set the time and date manually<br />
OR<br />
touch ON and then touch OK to set the clock automatically via the Wi-Fi network. Go to Step 9.</li>
<li> Touch the number keypads to set the time of day. Select AM, PM, or 24-HOUR. Touch OK.</li>
<li> Select if Daylight Savings Time is active. Touch OK.</li>
<li> Select the format for displaying the date. Touch OK.</li>
<li>Touch the number keypads to set the current date. Touch OK.</li>
<li>Select if you want to show the clock when the oven is idle.</li>
<li> Touch DONE.</li>
</ol>
<h5>Display Screens</h5>
<p><strong>Clock Screen</strong><br />
The Clock screen displays the time and date when the microwave oven is not in use.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-Display-Screens.webp" /></p>
<p>A. Status icons<br />
B. Status bar<br />
C. Kitchen timer<br />
D. Control Lock<br />
E. Home menu<br />
F. Settings menu</p>
<p><strong>Control Lock</strong><br />
Touch and hold to lock the control. Only the Control Lock icon will respond when the control is locked.<br />
<strong>Home Menu</strong><br />
Touch to set a microwave oven function or access Results mode.<br />
<strong>Kitchen Timer</strong><br />
Shows the current kitchen timer. Touch to set or modify the kitchen timer.<br />
<strong>Settings Menu</strong><br />
Touch to access microwave oven settings and information.<br />
<strong>Status Bar</strong><br />
Displays current microwave oven status, such as Demo mode or locked.<br />
<strong>Status Icons<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-Status-Icons.webp" /></strong>Indicates a problem with the wireless connection.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-Status-Icons2.webp" /> Indicates Remote Enable is active.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-Status-Icons3.webp" /> Indicates +Powered Attachments are connected to the oven.</p>
<p><strong>Function Set Screen</strong><br />
After selecting a microwave oven function, the Function Set screens have a variety of options to customize the cycle. Not all options are available on all microwave oven functions. Touch the option in the menu on the left to change the setting.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-Function-Set-Screen.webp" /></p>
<p>A. Function<br />
B. Time<br />
C. Power level<br />
D. Turntable</p>
<p><strong>Not shown:</strong><br />
Sensor<br />
Food/Option<br />
Amount<br />
Doneness<br />
Microwave oven temperature set<br />
Preheat<br />
Favorite<br />
Information</p>
<p><strong>Function</strong><br />
Shows the current microwave function and selected oven.<br />
<strong>Sensor</strong><br />
Indicates automatic cooking time/power level: no setting needed, just touch START to begin.<br />
<strong>Food/Option</strong><br />
Touch to select the type of food being cooked.<br />
<strong>Amount</strong><br />
Touch to set the amount of food being cooked. Units will change based on the type of food selected.<br />
<strong>Doneness</strong><br />
Touch to set the doneness level of the food being cooked.<br />
<strong>Microwave oven temperature set</strong><br />
Touch to set the microwave oven temperature. The allowed range will be displayed.<br />
<strong>Time</strong><br />
Touch to set a length of time for the function to run.<br />
<strong>Power level</strong><br />
Touch to set the microwave power level.<br />
<strong>Turntable</strong><br />
Touch to set the turntable to on or off.<br />
<strong>Preheat</strong><br />
Touch to set preheating the crisper pan or not.<br />
<strong>Favorite (optional)</strong><br />
Touch to set the selected settings as a Favorite function. Touch again to unfavorite. Favorite microwave settings can be accessed from the Home menu.<br />
<strong>Information</strong><br />
Touch to get specific information about the selected microwave function, how it works, what it is best used for, and how best to position racks and accessories.</p>
<p><strong>Status Screen</strong><br />
While the microwave oven is in use, the display will show a timeline with information about the current microwave oven function(s). If one of the ovens is not in use, a button to use that oven will appear.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-Status-Screen.webp" /></p>
<table border="0" width="128" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20">A. Time of day<br />
B. Wireless strength<br />
C. Microwave oven function<br />
information</td>
<td width="64">D. Microwave oven timer<br />
E. Microwave oven timeline<br />
F. Lower oven settings</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Time of day</strong><br />
Shows the current time of day.<br />
<strong>Wireless strength</strong><br />
Shows the current Wi-Fi status and strength.<br />
<strong>Microwave oven function information</strong><br />
Shows the current microwave oven function settings for the indicated cavity.<br />
<strong>Microwave oven timer</strong><br />
Shows the remaining cook time (if set).<br />
<strong>Kitchen timer</strong><br />
Touch to set a kitchen timer or modify an existing one.<br />
<strong>Microwave oven timeline</strong><br />
Shows where the microwave oven is in the cooking process and when it will finish. The time in the middle of the screen is the time of day.<br />
<strong>Lower oven settings</strong><br />
Touch to use the lower oven. See the Lower Oven User Instructions.</p>
<h5>Cooking Modes</h5>
<p>The microwave oven has a variety of cooking modes to achieve the best results every time. The cooking modes can be accessed by touching the Home icon and then selecting the desired oven or a previously saved Favorite recipe.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-Cooking-Modes.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Microwave Oven</strong></p>
<table width="807">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="111"><strong>Cooking Mode </strong></td>
<td width="294"><strong>Best for</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="111"><strong>Manual Cook</strong></td>
<td width="294">Foods that start out wet or not solid (like batter), then firm up and gain structure or rise as they cook (like cakes or casseroles)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="111">Popcorn</td>
<td width="294">Bags of microwave popcorn</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="111">Defrost</td>
<td width="294">Foods that need to be thawed before cooking</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="111">Reheat</td>
<td width="294">Foods that have been previously cooked</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="111">Soften</td>
<td width="294">Softening foods like butter or ice cream</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="111">Melt</td>
<td width="294">Melting foods like chocolate or cheese</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="111">Convect Bake</td>
<td width="294">Foods with flaky and dry crusts with moist interiors (like pastries, pies, or bread)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="111">Steam</td>
<td width="294">Steaming foods like vegetables or seafood</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="111">Crisp</td>
<td width="294">Crisping or grilling foods like fries or pizza</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h5>Kitchen Timer</h5>
<p>The Kitchen Timer keypad will set a timer that is independent of microwave oven functions. The kitchen timer can be set in hours, minutes, and seconds, up to 99 hours.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> The kitchen timer does not start or stop the microwave oven.</p>
<ol>
<li>Touch KITCHEN TIMER.</li>
<li>Touch HR: MIN or MIN: SEC.</li>
<li>Touch the number keypads to set the length of time.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> Touching HR: MIN or MIN: SEC, after the time has been</li>
<li>entered, will clear the timer.</li>
<li> Touch the Start button on the display to start the kitchen timer.</li>
<li>To change the kitchen timer while it is running, touch the KITCHEN TIMER, touch the number keypads to set the new length of<br />
time, and then touch UPDATE.</li>
<li> A sound will play when the set time ends, and a drop-down notification will appear. Touch OK to dismiss the notification.</li>
<li>Touch BACK while setting the kitchen timer to cancel the kitchen timer. To cancel a running timer, touch KITCHEN TIMER and then the Cancel button on the display. If a Cancel keypad is touched, the respective oven will turn off.</li>
</ol>
<h5>Tones/Sounds</h5>
<p>Tones are audible signals, indicating the following:</p>
<ul>
<li>Valid keypad touch</li>
<li> The function has been entered.</li>
<li>The oven is preheated.</li>
<li> Invalid keypad touch</li>
<li> End of a cooking cycle</li>
<li> When the timer reaches zero Includes using the kitchen timer for functions other than cooking.</li>
<li> First oven element activation in a cooking mode</li>
<li> +Powered attachments connected</li>
<li> +Powered attachments disconnected</li>
<li>Control is locked</li>
<li> Control is unlocked</li>
</ul>
<h5>Control Lock</h5>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-Control-Lock.webp" />The Control Lock shuts down the control panel keypads to avoid unintended use of the microwave oven. The Control Lock will remain set after a power failure if it was set before the power failure occurs. When the control is locked, only the Control Lock and Kitchen Timer keypads will function.<br />
The Control Lock is preset unlocked but can be locked.<br />
<strong>To Activate the Control Lock:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Touch and hold the Control Lock icon.</li>
<li>A countdown will appear in the gray Status bar at the top of the screen. The Control Lock icon will turn red and the Status bar will display “LOCKED” when the control is locked.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To Deactivate the Control Lock:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Touch and hold the Control Lock icon.</li>
<li>A countdown will appear in the gray Status bar at the top of the screen. The Control Lock icon will no longer be red and the Status bar will be blank when the control is unlocked.</li>
</ol>
<h5>Settings</h5>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-Settings.webp" /></p>
<p>The Settings icon allows you access to functions and customization options for your oven. These options allow you to set the clock, change the microwave oven temperature between Fahrenheit and Celsius, turn the audible signals and prompts on and off, adjust the oven calibration, change the language, and more. Many of these options are set during the Welcome Guide.<br />
The Sabbath mode is also set using the Settings menu.</p>
<table width="854">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64"><strong>Setting</strong></td>
<td width="181"><strong>Available Selections</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Date &amp; Time</td>
<td width="181"> ■ Auto (Off/On)*<br />
■ Time (AM/PM/24-Hour)*<br />
■ Daylight Savings (Off/On)*<br />
■ Date Format (MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/ YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD)*<br />
■ See Date*<br />
■ Show Clock (No &amp; Turn Off Screen/Yes &amp; Dim Screen)*</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Background</td>
<td> ■ Set Background Picture</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Wi-Fi</td>
<td width="181"> ■ Network*<br />
■ SAID/MAC Address<br />
■ Wireless Icon (Show [default]/Hide)<br />
■ Wireless (On/Off)*</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Sounds</td>
<td width="181"> ■ Timers (High [default]/Medium/Low/Off)<br />
■ Notifications (High [default]/Medium/Low/ Off)<br />
■ Accessory In/Out (High/Medium [default]/ Low/Off)<br />
■ Keypress (High [default]/Medium/Low/Off)<br />
■ Mute (Sounds On [default]/Sounds Off)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Temperature</td>
<td width="181"> ■ Temperature (Fahrenheit [default]/Celsius)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Display</td>
<td width="181"> ■ Brightness (Low/Medium/High/Maximum [default])</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Language</td>
<td width="181"> ■ Language (English/Français)*</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="64">Attachment<br />
Registration</td>
<td width="181"> ■ View/Register +Powered Attachments</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="64">Manage<br />
Favorites</td>
<td width="181"> ■ Clear All Favorites</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Calibrate</td>
<td width="181"> ■ Instructions<br />
■ Lower Oven<br />
(0/+10°F/+20°F/+30°F/-10°F/-20°F/-30°F)<br />
(0/+6°C/+12°C/+18°C/-6°C/-12°C/-18°C)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Sabbath Mode</td>
<td width="181"> ■ Disables all oven functions, lights, clock,<br />
and messages. Press any Cancel keypadto end Sabbath Mode.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Sabbath Bake</td>
<td width="181"> ■ Instructions<br />
■ Upper/Single Oven Temperature<br />
■ Upper/Single Oven Timer<br />
■ Lower Oven Temperature<br />
■ Lower Oven Timer<br />
■ Confirm (No/Yes)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Demo</td>
<td width="181"> ■ Demo (Off [default]/On)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>General</td>
<td width="181"> ■ About (Model/Serial numbers, Software Version, SAID/MAC Address)<br />
■ Update (Software update)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Factory Reset</td>
<td width="181"> ■ Reset</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>BUILT-IN MICROWAVE OVEN USE</h4>
<p>A magnetron in the oven produces microwaves that reflect off the metal floor, walls, and ceiling and pass through the turntable and appropriate cookware to the food. Microwaves are attracted to and absorbed by fat, sugar, and water molecules in the food, causing them to move, producing friction and heat which cooks the food.</p>
<ul>
<li> To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not lean on or allow children to swing on the microwave oven door.</li>
<li> To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not operate the microwave oven when it is empty.</li>
<li> The turntable must be in place and correct side up when the microwave oven is in use. Do not use if the turntable is chipped or broken. See the “Assistance or Service” section to reorder.</li>
<li> Baby bottles and baby food jars should not be heated in a microwave oven.</li>
<li> Clothes, flowers, fruit, herbs, wood, gourds, and paper, including brown paper bags and newspaper, should not be dried in a microwave oven.</li>
<li> Paraffin wax will not melt in the microwave oven because it does not absorb microwaves.</li>
<li> Use oven mitts or pot holders when removing containers from the microwave oven.</li>
<li> Do not overcook potatoes. At the end of the recommended cook time, potatoes should be slightly firm. Let potatoes stand for 5 minutes. They will finish cooking while standing.</li>
<li> Do not cook or reheat whole eggs inside the shell. Steam buildup in whole eggs may cause them to burst. Cover poached eggs and allow a standing time.</li>
</ul>
<h5>Food Characteristics</h5>
<p>When microwave cooking, the amount, size and shape, starting temperature, composition, and density of the food affect cooking results.<br />
<strong>Amount of Food</strong><br />
The more food heated at once, the longer the cooking time needed.<br />
Check for doneness and add small increments of time if necessary.<br />
<strong>Size and Shape</strong><br />
Smaller pieces of food will cook more quickly than larger pieces, and uniformly shaped foods cook more evenly than irregularly shaped food.<br />
<strong>Starting Temperature</strong><br />
Room temperature foods will heat faster than refrigerated foods, and refrigerated foods will heat faster than frozen foods.<br />
<strong>Composition and Density</strong><br />
Foods high in fat and sugar will reach a higher temperature and will heat faster than other foods. Heavy, dense foods, such as meat and potatoes, require a longer cook time than the same size of a light, porous food, such as cake.</p>
<h5>Cooking Guidelines</h5>
<p><strong>Covering</strong><br />
Covering food helps retain moisture, shorten cook time, and reduce spattering. Use the lid supplied with cookware. If a lid is not available, wax paper, paper towels, or plastic wrap approved for microwave ovens may be used. Plastic wrap should be turned back at one corner to provide an opening to vent steam.<br />
Condensation on the door and cavity surfaces is normal during heavy cooking.<br />
<strong>Stirring and Turning</strong><br />
Stirring and turning redistribute heat evenly to avoid overcooking the outer edges of food. Stir from outside to the center. If possible,<br />
turn food over from bottom to top.<br />
<strong>Arranging</strong><br />
If heating irregularly shaped or different sized foods, arrange the thinner parts and smaller sized items toward the center. If cooking<br />
several items of the same size and shape, place them in a ring pattern, leaving the center of the ring empty.<br />
<strong>Piercing</strong><br />
Before heating, use a fork or small knife to pierce or prick foods that have a skin or membrane, such as potatoes, egg yolks, chicken livers, hot dogs, and sausage. Prick in several places to allow steam to vent.<br />
<strong>Shielding</strong><br />
Use small, flat pieces of aluminum foil to shield the thin pieces of irregularly shaped foods, bones, and foods such as chicken wings, leg tips, and fishtails. See the “Aluminum Foil and Metal” section first.<br />
<strong>Standing Time</strong><br />
Food will continue to cook by the natural conduction of heat even after the microwave cooking cycle ends. The length of standing time depends on the volume and density of the food.<br />
<strong>Turntable On/Off</strong><br />
For best performance, the turntable should be on during microwave cooking.<br />
If using oversized cookware that does not turn freely on the microwave turntable, turn the turntable off. To turn off the turntable when setting a microwave function, touch TURNTABLE and then OFF. When cooking with the turntable off, food should be turned halfway through the cooking process.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> The turntable cannot be turned off during any auto cooking cycle.</p>
<h5>Cookware and Dinnerware</h5>
<p>Cookware and dinnerware must fit on the turntable. Always use oven mitts or pot holders when handling because any dish may become hot from heat transferred from the food. Do not use cookware and dinnerware with gold or silver trim. Use the following chart as a guide, then test before using.</p>
<table width="856">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="125"><strong>Maternal</strong></td>
<td width="280"><strong>“Recommendations</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="125">Aluminum Foil, Metal</td>
<td width="280">See the “Aluminum Foil and Metal” section.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="125">Browning Dish</td>
<td width="280">The bottom must be at least 3/16′ (5 mm) above the turntable. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="125">Ceramic Glass, Glass</td>
<td width="280">Acceptable for use.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="125">China, Earthenware</td>
<td width="280">Follow manufacturer’s recommendations.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="125">Melamine</td>
<td width="280">Follow manufacturer’s recommendations.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="125">Paper: Towels, Dinnerware, Napkins</td>
<td width="280">Use non-recycled and those approved by<br />
the manufacturer for microwave oven use.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="125">Plastic: Wraps, Bags, Covers, Dinnerware, Containers</td>
<td width="280">Use those approved by the manufacturer for microwave oven use.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="125">Pottery and Clay</td>
<td width="280">Follow manufacturer’s recommendations.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="125">Silicone Bakeware</td>
<td width="280">Follow manufacturer’s recommendations.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="125">Straw, Wicker, Wooden<br />
Containers</td>
<td width="280">Do not use in a microwave oven.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="125">Styrofoam®t</td>
<td width="280">Do not use in a microwave oven.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="125">Wax Paper</td>
<td width="280">Acceptable for use.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>To Test Cookware or Dinnerware for Microwave Use:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Place cookware or dinnerware in the microwave oven with 1 cup (250 mL) of water beside it.</li>
<li> Cook at 100% cooking power for 1 minute.<br />
Do not use cookware or dinnerware if it becomes hot and the water stays cool.</li>
</ol>
<h5>Aluminum Foil and Metal</h5>
<p>Always use oven mitts or pot holders when removing dishes from the microwave oven.<br />
Aluminum foil and some metal can be used in the microwave oven. If not used properly, arcing (a blue flash of light) can occur and cause damage to the microwave oven.<br />
<strong>OK for Use</strong><br />
Racks and bakeware supplied with the microwave oven (on some models), aluminum foil for shielding, and approved meat thermometers may be used with the following guidelines:</p>
<ul>
<li> To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not allow<br />
aluminum foil or metal to touch the inside cavity walls, ceiling<br />
or floor.</li>
<li> Always use the turntable.</li>
<li> To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not allow contact with another metal object during microwave cooking.<br />
<strong>Do Not Use</strong><br />
Metal cookware and bakeware, gold, silver, pewter, non-approved meat thermometers, skewers, twist ties, foil liners such as sandwich wrappers, staples, and objects with gold or silver trim or a metallic glaze should not be used in the microwave oven.</li>
</ul>
<h5>Positioning Baking Tray</h5>
<p>The baking tray can only be used with convection cooking and broiling (on some models). To avoid damage to the microwave oven, do not use the baking tray in combination with microwave cooking.<br />
Place the baking tray on slide rails as shown below. Push in the baking tray to stop position. Check that the baking tray is level.<br />
For best cooking results, use the baking tray only in the recommended position.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-Positioning-Baking-Tray.webp" /></p>
<p>†® Styrofoam is a registered trademark of the Dow Chemical Company.</p>
<h5>Microwave Cooking Power</h5>
<p>Many recipes for microwave cooking specify which cooking power to use by percent, name, or number. For example, 70%=Medium-High=7.<br />
Use the following chart as a general guide for the suggested cooking power of specific foods.<br />
The power level cannot be changed in Sensor cooking modes.</p>
<p><strong>MICROWAVE COOKING POWER CHART</strong></p>
<table width="880">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="104"><strong>Percent/ Name</strong></td>
<td width="73"><strong>Number</strong></td>
<td width="232"><strong>Use</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="104">100%, High (default setting)</td>
<td width="73">10</td>
<td width="232">Quick heating convenience foods and foods with high<br />
water content, such as soups, beverages, and most vegetables.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="104">90%</td>
<td width="73">9</td>
<td width="232">Cooking small, tender pieces of meat, ground meat, poultry pieces, and fish fillets.<br />
Heating cream soups.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="104">80%</td>
<td width="73">8</td>
<td width="232">Heating rice, pasta, or casseroles.<br />
Cooking and heating foods that need a cook power lower than high. For example, whole fish and meatloaf.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="104">70%, Medium- High</td>
<td width="73">7</td>
<td width="232">Reheating a single serving of food.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="104">60%</td>
<td width="73">6</td>
<td width="232">Cooking sensitive foods such as cheese and egg dishes, pudding, and custards.<br />
Cooking non-stirrable casseroles, such as lasagna.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="104">50%, Medium</td>
<td width="73">5</td>
<td width="232">Cooking ham, whole poultry, and pot roasts.<br />
Simmering stews.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="104">40%</td>
<td width="73">4</td>
<td width="232">Melting chocolate.<br />
Heating bread, rolls, and pastries.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="104">30%, Medium- Low, Defrost</td>
<td width="73">3</td>
<td width="232">Defrosting bread, fish, meats, poultry, and precooked foods.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="104">20%</td>
<td width="73">2</td>
<td width="232">Softening butter, cheese, and ice cream.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="104">10%, Low</td>
<td width="73">1</td>
<td width="232">Taking chill out of fruit.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h5>Sensor Cook</h5>
<p>The Sensor is used in auto cooking modes.<br />
During the Sensor Cook function, a sensor automatically adjusts the cooking time and power level.<br />
The timeline will show “SENSING” and then the time countdown once the sensor identifies the cooking duration.<br />
If the microwave oven door is opened during a sensor function, the microwave oven will turn off and any additional operations will<br />
be canceled.<br />
<strong>For best cooking performance:</strong><br />
Before using a sensor cook function, make sure power has been supplied to the microwave oven for at least 2 minutes, the room temperature is not above 95°F (35°C), and the outside of the cooking container and the microwave oven cavity is dry.</p>
<h5><strong>Popcorn</strong></h5>
<ul>
<li> Do not use regular paper bags or glassware.</li>
<li> Pop only one package of popcorn at a time.</li>
<li> Follow manufacturer’s instructions when using a microwave popcorn popper.</li>
<li> Listen for popping to slow to one pop every 1 or 2 seconds, and then stop the cycle. Do not repop unpopped kernels.</li>
<li> For best results, use fresh bags of popcorn.</li>
<li>Cooking results may vary by brand and fat content.</li>
<li> Recommended bag sizes are 3.5 oz, 3.0 oz, and 1.75 oz.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> Follow the instructions provided by the microwave popcorn manufacturer.</li>
</ul>
<h5>Defrost</h5>
<p>Times and cooking powers have been preset for defrosting a number of food types.<br />
Manual Defrost requires that a cook time and power level be entered if using other than 30% cook power.</p>
<ul>
<li>For optimal results, food should be 0°F (-18°C) or colder when defrosting.</li>
<li> Unwrap foods and remove lids (from fruit juice) before defrosting.</li>
<li> Shallow packages will defrost more quickly than deep blocks.</li>
<li>Separate food pieces as soon as possible during or at the end of the cycle for more even defrosting.</li>
<li>Foods left outside the freezer for more than 20 minutes or frozen ready-made food should not be defrosted using an automatic Defrost setting but should be defrosted manually.</li>
<li>Use small pieces of aluminum foil to shield parts of food such as chicken wings, leg tips, and fishtails. See the “Aluminum<br />
Foil and Metal” section first.<br />
Use the following chart as a guide when defrosting meat, poultry, fish, bread, or juice.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>DEFROST PREPARATION CHART</strong></p>
<table width="864">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" width="352"><strong>MEAT</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="107">Beef: ground, steaks,<br />
roast, stew</td>
<td rowspan="3" width="245">The narrow or fatty areas of irregular-shaped cuts should be shielded with foil before defrosting.<br />
Do not defrost less than 1/4 lb (113 g) or two 4 oz (113 g) patties.<br />
Place all meats in a microwave-safe baking dish.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Lamb: stew and chops</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="107">Pork: chops, ribs,<br />
roasts, sausage</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>POULTRY</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="107">Chicken: whole and<br />
cut up</td>
<td rowspan="3" width="245">Place in a microwave-safe baking dish, chicken breast-side up.<br />
Remove giblets from the whole chicken.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Cornish hens</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Turkey: breast</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>FISH</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="107">Fillets, steaks, whole,<br />
shellfish</td>
<td>Place in a microwave-safe baking dish.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">BREAD</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="107">Loaves, muffins,<br />
biscuits, slices</td>
<td>Place in a microwave-safe baking dish.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>JUICE</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="107">Frozen juice or juice<br />
concentrate</td>
<td width="245">Remove from any metal containers.<br />
Place in a microwave-safe baking dish.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h5>Reheat</h5>
<p>Times and cooking powers have been preset for reheating a number of food types.<br />
Manual Reheat requires that a cook time and a power level be entered if using other than 70% cook power.<br />
Use the following chart as a guide.</p>
<p><strong>REHEAT CHART</strong></p>
<table width="705">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="92"><strong>Food</strong></td>
<td width="380"><strong>Preparation</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="92">Meal</td>
<td width="380">Place food on the plate. Cover with plastic wrap and vent. Let stand 2-3 minutes after reheating.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="92">Beverage</td>
<td width="380">Do not cover.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="92">Casserole</td>
<td width="380">Place in a microwave-safe container. Cover with plastic wrap and vent. Stir and let stand 2-3 minutes after reheating.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="92">Pizza</td>
<td width="380">Place on a paper towel-lined microwave-safe plate.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="92">Soup</td>
<td width="380">Place in a microwave-safe container. Cover with plastic wrap and vent. Stir and let stand 2-3 minutes after reheating.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="92">Sauce</td>
<td width="380">Place in a microwave-safe container. Cover with plastic wrap and vent. Stir and let stand 2-3 minutes after reheating.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="92">Manual</td>
<td width="380">Default power level 70%</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h5>Soften/Melt</h5>
<p>Soften and Melt functions may be used to soften or melt your food. Times and cooking powers have been preset for a number of food types. Use the following chart as a guide.</p>
<table width="703">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="119"><strong>Food</strong></td>
<td width="354"><strong>Preparation</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="119">Butter</td>
<td width="354">Unwrap and place in a microwave-safe container.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="119">Margarine</td>
<td width="354">Unwrap and place in a microwave-safe container.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="119">Ice Cream</td>
<td width="354">Place in a microwave-safe container.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="119">Chocolate</td>
<td width="354">Cut squares into small pieces or use chips. Place in a microwave-safe container.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="119">Cream cheese</td>
<td width="354">Unwrap and place in a microwave-safe container.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="119">Cheese</td>
<td width="354">Cut into small pieces and place in a microwave-safe container.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="119">Marshmallows</td>
<td width="354">Place in a microwave-safe container.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h5>EasyConvect™ Conversion</h5>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-EasyConvectE284A2-Conversion.webp" /></p>
<p>A. Broil element<br />
B. convection fan<br />
C. Convection element<br />
D. Convection grid</p>
<p>Convection cooking uses the convection element, the broil element, and the fan. Hot air is circulated throughout the oven cavity by the fan. The constantly moving air surrounds the food to heat the outer portion quickly.</p>
<ul>
<li>The convect function may be used to cook small amounts of food on a single rack.</li>
<li>Always use the convection grid placed on the turntable or baking tray.</li>
<li> Do not cover turntable or convection grid or baking tray with aluminum foil.</li>
<li>Do not use light plastic containers, plastic wrap, or paper products. All heatproof cookware or metal utensils can be used in convection cooking. Round pizza pans are excellent for convection cooking.</li>
<li> Use convection cooking for items such as shuffles, bread, cookies, angel food cakes, pizza, and most meats and fish.</li>
<li> All EasyConvect™ functions require preheating before use.</li>
</ul>
<p>Place food in the microwave oven after preheating is complete.<br />
EasyConvect™ Conversion is a function that converts a standard thermal bake cook time and temperature into an ideal cook time and temperature for convection cooking after the oven has preheated.<br />
Convection temperatures and times differ from those of standard cooking. The oven can automatically reduce standard recipe temperatures and times for convection cooking.<br />
When selecting a convection cooking mode, the option to optimize the recipe for convection will be available.<br />
To have the oven automatically adjust the set time and/or temperature for better convection cooking results, select YES. The oven will automatically adjust for convection cooking.<br />
To manually enter the set time and temperature one time, select NO. The option to optimize the recipe will be available the next time a convection cooking mode is selected.<br />
To never have the oven optimize the recipe, select NO, DON’T ASK AGAIN. The oven will not change the set time or temperature<br />
and will not ask again.<br />
This option can be reset from the Settings menu.<br />
The conversion may not be exact because foods are grouped in general categories. Use the most similar food option if your exact food is not available.</p>
<h5>Steam Cooking</h5>
<p>Steam Cook is a sensor cooking function that uses microwaves to steam food. Always use a steamer vessel. See the “KitchenAid™ Steamer Vessel” section before using. Use Steam Cook for foods such as vegetables, fish, and potatoes.</p>
<ul>
<li>Times and cooking powers have been preset for steaming a number of food types.</li>
<li>Manual Steam Cook requires that a cook time be entered.</li>
<li>It is recommended to add 1/2 cup (125 mL) of water to Steamer Vessel before steaming.</li>
</ul>
<h5>Crisp</h5>
<p>The Crisp feature uses the broil element and microwaves to crisp and brown foods. Crisp can be used to sauté meats and vegetables, pan-fry bacon and eggs, and to crisp and brown pizza and French fries. Always use the crisper pan. See the “Crisper Pan and Handle” section before using.</p>
<ul>
<li>The crisper pan will become very hot. Use oven mitts or detachable handles to grasp and remove the pan from the oven.</li>
<li>Do not place hot crisper pan directly on heat-sensitive surfaces. Damage may occur.</li>
<li>Do not use plastic utensils on the crisper pan, as it becomes very hot quickly and could melt the utensils.</li>
<li>Do not use metal utensils, as they can scratch the pan.</li>
<li> Do not use the crisper pan in any other microwave oven or in a standard thermal oven.</li>
<li>Do not place the crisper pan on the convection rack or the baking tray. Always use the turntable as a support for the pan.<br />
Before Crisping, brush the crisper pan with 1/2 tsp (3 mL) of oil or spray with nonstick cooking spray. For best results, the crisper pan should be preheated for 3 minutes. Arrange food on the crisper pan, and place pan on turntable.<br />
Use the following chart as a guide.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>CRISPING CHART</strong></p>
<table width="682">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64"><strong>Food</strong></td>
<td width="64"><strong>Cook Time(Minutes)*</strong></td>
<td width="64"><strong>Preparation</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Bacon, 4 strips</td>
<td>Side 1: 3:00Side 2: 1:45</td>
<td width="64">Place in crisper pan<br />
in a single layer</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Frozen French fries,2 servings</td>
<td>Side 1: 5:00Side 2: 2:00</td>
<td width="64">Place in crisper pan<br />
in a single layer</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="64">Boneless chicken<br />
breasts, 2 pieces</td>
<td width="64">Side 1: 4:00<br />
Side 2: 3:00</td>
<td>5-6 oz (142-170 g) each</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Hamburger patties, 2</td>
<td width="64">Side 1: 3:30<br />
Side 2: 2:00</td>
<td width="64">4 oz (113 g) each,<br />
1/2″ (1.3 cm) thick</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Frozen thin crust pizza</td>
<td>8:00-9:00</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>*Times are approximate and may be adjusted for individual tastes.</p>
<h4>BUILT-IN MICROWAVE OVEN CARE</h4>
<h5>General Cleaning</h5>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> Before cleaning, make sure all controls are off and the microwave oven is cool. Always follow label instructions on learning products.<br />
Soap, water, and a soft cloth or sponge are suggested first unless otherwise noted.</p>
<p><strong>STAINLESS STEEL (on some models)</strong><br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> To avoid damage to stainless steel surfaces, do not use soap-filled scouring pads, abrasive cleaners, cooktop polishing creme, steel-wool pads, gritty washcloths, or abrasive paper towels. Damage may occur to stainless steel surfaces, even with one-time or limited use.<br />
Rub in direction of grain to avoid damaging.<br />
<strong>Cleaning Method:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Affresh® Stainless Steel Cleaner Part Number W10355016 (not included):<br />
See the “Assistance or Service” section to order.</li>
<li>Vinegar for hard water spots.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>MICROWAVE OVEN DOOR EXTERIOR</strong><br />
<strong>Cleaning Method:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Glass cleaner and a soft cloth or sponge:<br />
Apply glass cleaner to soft cloth or sponge, not directly on panel.</li>
<li>Affresh® Kitchen Appliance Cleaner Part Number W10355010(not included):<br />
See the “Assistance or Service” section to order.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>MICROWAVE OVEN CAVITY</strong><br />
To avoid damage to the microwave oven cavity, do not use soap-filled scouring pads, abrasive cleaners, steel-wool pads, gritty washcloths, or some paper towels.<br />
On stainless steel models, rub in direction of the grain to avoid damage.<br />
The area where the oven door and frame touch when closed should be kept clean.</p>
<p><strong>Cleaning Method:</strong><br />
<strong>Average soil</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Mild, nonabrasive soaps and detergents:<br />
Rinse with clean water and dry with a soft, lint-free cloth.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Heavy soil</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Mild, nonabrasive soaps and detergents:<br />
Heat 1 cup (250 mL) of water for 2 to 5 minutes in oven.<br />
Steam will soften soil. Rinse with clean water and dry with soft, lint-free cloth.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Odors</strong></p>
<ul>
<li> Lemon juice or vinegar:<br />
Heat 1 cup (250 mL) of water with 1 tbs (15 mL) of either lemon juice or vinegar for 2 to 5 minutes in oven.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>MICROWAVE OVEN CEILING</strong><br />
The broil element does not need cleaning since the intense heat will burn off any food spatters. However, the ceiling above the broil element may need regular cleaning.</p>
<p><strong>Cleaning Method:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Warm water, mild detergent and a sponge.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>To clean:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Push the fastening thread gently towards the back of the ceiling and then lower it to release the broil element.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-Cleaning-Method.webp" /></li>
<li>Lower the front of the broil element to access the ceiling for cleaning.</li>
<li> Raise broil element back up and return the fastening thread back to its original location.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/KitchenAId-W10903390B-Built-In-Microwave-Combination-Ovens-Cleaning-Method2.webp" /></p>
<p>Always return the broil element to the cooking position after cleaning.</p>
<p><strong>TURNTABLE</strong><br />
Replace turntable immediately after cleaning. Do not operate the microwave oven without the turntable in place.<br />
<strong>Cleaning Method:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Mild cleanser and scouring pad</li>
<li>Dishwasher</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>RACK</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Steel-wool pad</li>
<li>Dishwasher</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>CRISPER PAN</strong><br />
To avoid damage to the crisper pan, do not immerse or rinse with water while the crisper pan is hot. Do not use steel-wool pads.</p>
<p><strong>Cleaning Method:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Warm water, mild detergent, and a sponge. Heavily soiled areas can be cleaned with a scouring pad and mild cleanser.</li>
<li>Dishwasher</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>BAKING TRAY</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Dishwasher</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>KITCHENAID™ STEAMER VESSEL</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Dishwasher</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>TURNTABLE SUPPORT AND ROLLERS, HUB, CRISPER PANHANDLE</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Dishwasher</li>
</ul>
<h4>TROUBLESHOOTING</h4>
<p>First, try the solutions suggested here. If you need further assistance or more recommendations that may help you avoid a service call,<br />
refer to the warranty page in this manual or visit <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.com/customer-service" target="_blank" rel="noopener">http://www.kitchenaid.com/customer-service</a>. In Canada, visit<br />
<a href="http://www.kitchenaid.ca/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">http://www.kitchenaid.ca</a>.<br />
Contact us by mail with any questions or concerns at the address below:</p>
<p>In the U.S.A.:<br />
KitchenAid Brand Home Appliances<br />
Customer Experience Center<br />
553 Benson Road<br />
Benton Harbor, MI 49022-2692</p>
<p>In Canada:<br />
KitchenAid Brand Home Appliances<br />
Customer Experience Centre<br />
200 – 6750 Century Ave.<br />
Mississauga, Ontario L5N 0B7</p>
<p>Please include a daytime phone number in your correspondence.</p>
<table width="1007">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="141">Problem</td>
<td colspan="3" width="253">Possible Cause</td>
<td colspan="4" width="317">Solution</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2" width="141">Nothing will operate</td>
<td colspan="3" width="253">Has a household fuse blown a has the circuit breaker tripped?</td>
<td colspan="4" width="317">Replace the fuse a reset the circuit breaker. If the problem continues, all an electrician.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3" width="253">Is the appliance wired properly?</td>
<td colspan="4" width="317">See the Installation Instructions.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="5" width="141">The microwave oven will not operate</td>
<td colspan="3" width="253">Is the door completely closed?</td>
<td colspan="4" width="317">Firmly closed0Or</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3" width="253">Is the electronic oven control set correctly?</td>
<td colspan="4" width="317">See the “Electronic Oven Control” section.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3" width="253">On some models, is the Control Lock set?</td>
<td colspan="4" width="317">See the “Control Lock” section.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3" width="253">On combination oven models, is the lower oven self-cleaning?</td>
<td colspan="4" width="317">The upper oven will not work diming the lower oven Sett-Cleaning Cycle</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3" width="253">Is the magnetron working properly?</td>
<td colspan="4" width="317">Try to heat 1 cup (250 mL) of cold water for 2 minutes at 100% cooking power. If water does not heat, call for service. Seethe “INarranty” section.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="141">Microwave oven makes a humming noise</td>
<td colspan="7" width="570">This is normal and occurs when the transformer% the magnetron cycles on.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="141">The microwave oven door looks wavy</td>
<td colspan="4" width="259">This is normal and will not affect performance.</td>
<td colspan="3" width="311"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2" width="141">The turntable will not operate</td>
<td colspan="4" width="259">Is the turntable properly in place?</td>
<td colspan="3" width="311">Make sure the turntable is the correct side up and is sitting securely on the turntable support.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="4" width="259">Is the turntable support operating properly?</td>
<td colspan="3" width="311">Remove turntable. Remove and clean turntable support and rollers. Replace turntable support. Replace table. Place 1 cup (250 mL) of water on the turntable, then restart the oven. If it still is not working, call for service. See the “Warranty” section. Do not operate the oven without turntable and turntable support working properly.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="141">The turntable rotates both directions</td>
<td colspan="2" width="246">This is normal and depends on motor rotation a</td>
<td colspan="5" width="324">beginning of the cycle.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" width="153">Display shows messages</td>
<td width="234">Is the display showing a letter followed by a number?</td>
<td colspan="5" width="324">Clear the display. See the”Display(s)” section. If it reappears, call for service. See the “Warranty” section.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" width="153">The display shows time countdown but is not operating</td>
<td width="234">Is the Timer in use?</td>
<td colspan="5" width="324">See the “Timer” section.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" width="153">Tones are not sounding</td>
<td width="234">Are tones disabled?</td>
<td colspan="5" width="324">See the “Roes” section.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="141">The fan stays on after cooking is completed</td>
<td colspan="7" width="570">Depending on the temperature inside the microwave oven after a cooking cycle ends, the cooling fan may continue to run for some time in order to cool the microwave oven. The turntable may also Continue to rotate and the light may stay on during this time. This is normal. The door may be opened at any time to add a removed food, anchor to start another cooking cycle.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="141">Smoke is coming<br />
from oven vent during crisping</td>
<td colspan="7" width="570">Some smoke is normal and occurs just as in conventional crisping.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="141">Sparking during crisping</td>
<td colspan="6" width="276">This is normal and OCCURS as fat burns off from past burned off.</td>
<td width="294">cooling. Sparking will stop once the fat is completely</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3" width="141">Cooking times seem too long</td>
<td colspan="6" width="276">Is the cooking power set properly?</td>
<td width="294">See “Microwave Cooking Power” in the “Microwave Oven Use” section.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="6" width="276">Are large amounts of food being heated?</td>
<td width="294">Larger amounts of food need longer cooking titers.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="5" width="265">re.<br />
Is the incoming voltage less than that specified in the “Electrical Requirements” section?</td>
<td colspan="2" width="305">Have a qualified electrician check the electrical system of the house.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">Radio or TV Interference</td>
<td colspan="6" width="276">Is the microwave oven plugged into the<br />
same outlet?</td>
<td>Try a different outlet.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="6" width="276">Is the radio or TV receiver near the<br />
microwave oven?</td>
<td width="294">Move the receiver away from the microwave oven,<br />
or adjust the radio or TV antenna.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="6" width="276">Are the microwave oven door and sealing<br />
surfaces clean?</td>
<td>Make sure these areas are clean.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>ACCESSORIES</h4>
<p>For accessories in the U.S.A., you can visit our website at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.com</a> or call us at 1-800-422-1230.<br />
In Canada, visit our website at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.ca/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.ca</a> or call us at 1-800-807-6777.</p>
<p><strong>Affresh® Stainless Steel Cleaner</strong><br />
(stainless steel models)<br />
Order Part Number W10355016<br />
<strong>Affresh® Stainless Steel</strong><br />
<strong>Cleaning Wipes</strong><br />
(stainless steel models)<br />
Order Part Number W10355049</p>
<p><strong>Affresh ® Kitchen and Appliance Cleaner</strong><br />
Order Part Number W10355010<br />
<strong>Porcelain Broiler Pan and Grid</strong><br />
Order Part Number 4396923<br />
<strong>Premium Broil Pan and Roasting Rack</strong><br />
Order Part Number W10123240</p>
<p><strong>KITCHENAID ® BUILT-IN OVEN &amp; MICROWAVE LIMITED WARRANTY</strong></p>
<p>ATTACH YOUR RECEIPT HERE. PROOF OF PURCHASE IS REQUIRED TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE.<br />
Please have the following information available when you call the Customer eXperience Center:</p>
<ul>
<li>Name, address, and telephone number</li>
<li> The model number and serial number</li>
<li> A clear, detailed description of the problem</li>
<li> Proof of purchase including dealer or retailer name and address</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>IF YOU NEED SERVICE:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Before contacting us to arrange service, please determine whether your product requires repair. Some questions can be addressed without service. Please take a few minutes to review the Troubleshooting or Problem Solver section of the Use and Care Guide, or visit <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.com/customer-service" target="_blank" rel="noopener">http://www.kitchenaid.com/customer-service</a>.</li>
<li>All warranty service is provided exclusively by our authorized KitchenAid Service Providers. In the U.S. and Canada, direct all requests for warranty service to:</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>KitchenAid Customer eXperience Center</strong><br />
<strong>In the U.S.A., call 1-800-422-1230. In Canada, call 1-800-807-6777.</strong><br />
If outside the 50 United States or Canada, contact your authorized KitchenAid dealer to determine whether another warranty applies.</p>
<h4>TEN YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY</h4>
<h5>WHAT IS COVERED</h5>
<p><strong>FIRST-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY (PARTS AND LABOR)</strong><br />
For one year from the date of purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated and maintained according to instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid brand of Whirlpool Corporation or Whirlpool Canada, LP (hereafter “KitchenAid”) will pay for factory specified replacement parts and repair labor to correct defects in materials or workmanship that existed when this major appliance was purchased or, at its sole discretion replace the product. In the event of product replacement, your appliance will be warranted for the remaining term of the original unit’s warranty period.<br />
<strong>SECOND THROUGH FIFTH YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY (CERTAIN COMPONENT PARTS ONLY – LABOR NOT INCLUDED)</strong><br />
In the second through fifth years from the date of original purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated, and maintained according to instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid will pay for factory specified parts for the following components to correct non-cosmetic defects in materials or workmanship in these parts that prevent the function of this major appliance and that existed when this major appliance was purchased. This is a limited 5-year warranty on the below-named parts only and does not include repair labor.</p>
<ul>
<li>Electric element</li>
<li>Solid-state touch control system parts</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>SECOND THROUGH THE TENTH YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY (MICROWAVE OVENS ONLY)</strong></p>
<p>In the second through tenth years from the date of original purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated and maintained according to instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid will pay for factory specified parts for the stainless steel oven cavity/inner door if the part rusts through due to defects in materials or workmanship.<br />
<strong>YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE PRODUCT REPAIR AS PROVIDED HEREIN.</strong><br />
Service must be provided by a KitchenAid designated service company.<br />
This limited warranty is valid only in the United States or Canada and applies only when the major appliance is used in the country in which it was purchased. This limited warranty is effective from the date of original consumer purchase. Proof of original purchase date is required to obtain service under this limited warranty.</p>
<h5>WHAT IS NOT COVERED</h5>
<ol>
<li>Commercial, non-residential, multiple-family use, or use inconsistent with published user, operator or installation instructions.</li>
<li> In-home instruction on how to use your product.</li>
<li>Service to correct improper product maintenance or installation, installation not in accordance with electrical or plumbing codes or correction of household electrical or plumbing (i.e. house wiring, fuses or water inlet hoses).</li>
<li>Consumable parts (i.e. light bulbs, batteries, air or water filters, preservation solutions, etc.).</li>
<li>Defects or damage caused by the use of non-genuine KitchenAid parts or accessories.</li>
<li>Conversion of products from natural gas or propane gas.</li>
<li>Damage from accident, misuse, abuse, fire, floods, acts of God or use with products not approved by KitchenAid.</li>
<li> Repairs to parts or systems to correct product damage or defects caused by unauthorized service, alteration or modification of the appliance.</li>
<li>Cosmetic damage including scratches, dents, chips, and other damage to the appliance finishes unless such damage results from<br />
defects in materials and workmanship and is reported to KitchenAid within 30 days.</li>
<li>Discoloration, rust or oxidation of surfaces resulting from caustic or corrosive environments including but not limited to high salt concentrations, high moisture or humidity or exposure to chemicals.</li>
<li>Food or medicine loss due to product failure.</li>
<li> Pick-up or delivery. This product is intended for in-home repair.</li>
<li> Travel or transportation expenses for service in remote locations where an authorized KitchenAid servicer is not available.</li>
<li> Removal or reinstallation of inaccessible appliances or built-in fixtures (i.e. trim, decorative panels, flooring, cabinetry, islands, countertops, drywall, etc.) that interfere with servicing, removal or replacement of the product.</li>
<li> Service or parts for appliances with original model/serial numbers removed, altered or not easily determined.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>The cost of repair or replacement under these excluded circumstances shall be borne by the customer.</strong></p>
<p><strong>DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES</strong><br />
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO ONE YEAR OR THE SHORTEST PERIOD ALLOWED BY LAW. Some states and provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of implied warranties of merchantability or fitness, so this limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province.</p>
<p><strong>DISCLAIMER OF REPRESENTATIONS OUTSIDE OF WARRANTY</strong><br />
KitchenAid makes no representations about the quality, durability, or need for service or repair of this major appliance other than the representations contained in this warranty. If you want a longer or more comprehensive warranty than the limited warranty that comes with this major appliance, you should ask KitchenAid or your retailer about buying an extended warranty.<br />
<strong>LIMITATION OF REMEDIES; EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES</strong><br />
YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE PRODUCT REPAIR AS PROVIDED HEREIN. KITCHENAID SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states and provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province.</p>
<p>Notes ______________________________________________________________________</p>
<p>® /™ ©2018 All rights reserved. Used under license in Canada.</p>
<p><strong>W10903390B</strong></p>
<form id="commentform" class="comment-form" action="https://manuals.plus/wp-comments-post.php" method="post" novalidate="">
<p class="form-submit">
</form>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>KitchenAid KUID508HPS 18 inch Built-In Ice Maker Manual</title>
		<link>https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/kuid508hpsel/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[ItsManual]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Tue, 27 Jun 2023 13:19:03 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[KitchenAid]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://usemanuals.com/?p=129006</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[KitchenAid KUID508HPS 18 inch Built-In Ice Maker in PrintShield Stainless Steel LEARN MORE In an effort to conserve natural resources, this ice maker includes a condensed User Guide. A complete Use and Care Guide can be downloaded at www.kitchenaid.com/manuals. The model number is located on the inside of the ice maker. In the U.S.A., register your ice maker at www.kitchenaid.com. In Canada, register your ice maker at www.kitchenaid.com Your safety and the safety of others are very important. We have provided many important safety messages in this manual and on your appliance. Always read and obey all safety messages. This is the safety alert symbol. This symbol alerts you to potential hazards that can kill or hurt you and others. All safety messages will follow the safety alert symbol and either the word “DANGER” or “WARNING.” These words mean: You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t immediately follow instructions. You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t follow instructions. All safety messages will tell you what the potential hazard is, tell you how to reduce the chance of injury, and tell you what can happen if the instructions are not followed. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WARNING : To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, or injury when using your ice maker, follow these basic precautions: Plug into a grounded 3 prong outlet. Do not remove ground prong. Do not use an adapter. Do not use an extension cord. Disconnect power before cleaning. Disconnect power before servicing. Replace all parts and panels before operating. Use two or more people to move and install ice maker. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS State of California Proposition 65 Warnings: WARNING: This product contains one or more chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. WARNING: This product contains one or more chemicals known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. OPERATING YOUR ICE MAKER How Your Ice Maker Works When you first start your ice maker, the water pan will fill and the system will rinse itself before starting to make ice. The rinsing process takes about 5 minutes. Under normal operating conditions, the ice maker will cycle at preset temperatures. The ice level sensor located in the ice storage bin will monitor the ice levels. IMPORTANT: If the water supply to the ice maker is turned off, be sure to set the ice maker control to OFF. The Ice Making Process Water is constantly circulated over a freezing plate. As the water freezes into ice, the minerals in the water are rejected. This produces a sheet of ice with a low mineral content. When the desired thickness is reached, the ice sheet is released and slides onto a cutter grid. The grid divides the sheet into individual cubes. The water containing the rejected minerals is drained after each freezing cycle. Fresh water enters the machine for the next ice making cycle. Cubes fall into the storage bin. When the bin is full, the ice maker shuts off automatically and restarts when more ice is needed. The ice bin is not refrigerated, and some melting will occur. The amount of melting varies with room temperature. NOTE: As the room and water temperatures vary, so will the amount of ice produced and stored. This means that higher operating temperatures result in reduced ice production. Using the Controls To start ice production, press ON/OFF. To stop ice maker operation, press ON/OFF NOTES: Pressing the ON/OFF button does not shut off power to the ice maker. Allow 24 hours to produce the first batch of ice. Discard the first 2 batches produced. Max Ice Mode Select the Max Ice feature when you have an upcoming need for a large amount of ice and the ice bin is low or empty. Max Ice mode will produce a greater quantity of ice in a 24-hour period. Press MAX ICE while the ice maker is on. The indicator light will illuminate. Press MAX ICE again to turn off the Max Ice feature. The indicator light will turn off. The Max Ice mode will be on when you first turn on the product. It will turn off after 24 hours. To turn Max Ice back on, press MAX ICE. Clean It is recommended that you clean the ice maker when the “Cleaning Needed” light is illuminated or 9 months has elapsed, or ice production decreases significantly. To clean your ice maker, see “Ice Maker System” in the “Cleaning” section. Door Ajar Alarm The Door Ajar Alarm feature sounds an alarm when the ice maker door is open for 5 minutes. The alarm will repeat every 2 minutes. Close the door to turn off. The feature then resets and will reactivate when the door is left open again for 5 minutes. Water Filtration System Do not use with water that is microbiologically unsafe or of unknown quality without adequate disinfection before or after the system. Systems certified for cyst reduction may be used on disinfected waters that may contain filterable cysts. Installing a Water Filter Purchase a KitchenAid approved water filter. Take the water filter out of its packaging and remove the cover from the O-rings. Be sure the O-rings are still in place after the cover is removed. A. Cover B. O-rings C. Alignment pin D. Alignment arrow The water filter compartment is located in the right-hand side of the ice maker controls. For 15″ (38.1 cm) models, push in on the door to release the latch, and then lower the door. Using the arrow pointing to the alignment pin on the side of the filter and the arrow inside the control housing, align the alignment pin with the cutout notch and insert the filter into the housing. A. Alignment pin B. Unlocked symbol C. Locked symbol D. Cutout notch inside control housing E. Arrow pointing to cutout notch F. Arrow pointing to alignment pin Turn the filter clockwise until it locks into the housing. Ensure that the alignment arrow on the filter head aligns with the locked symbol on the control box housing. NOTE: If the filter is not correctly locked into the housing, the ice maker will not produce ice. A. Alignment arrow aligned with locked symbol For 15″ (38.1 cm) models, push the control box door closed until the latch snaps closed. The Water Filter Status Light The water filter status lights will help you know when to change your water filter. The “Order Filter” status light will be illuminated when it is time to order a replacement filter. The “Replace Filter” status light will be illuminated when it is time to replace the filter. Replacing the disposable water filter with a new filter will automatically reset the filter status tracking feature. See “Using the Controls.” Replace the Water Filter To purchase a replacement water filter, see “Accessories.” Replace the disposable water filter when indicated on the water filter status display or at least every 9 months. If the ice making rate decreases before the Replace Filter light illuminates, then replace the filter. Locate the water filter compartment in the right-hand side of the control housing. See Step 3 in the “Install Water Filter” section. Turn the water filter counterclockwise (to the left), and pull it straight out of the compartment. NOTE: There may be some water in the filter. Some spilling may occur. Install the replacement water filter by following steps 2 through 5 in the “Install the Water Filter” section. Normal Sounds Your new ice maker may make sounds that are not familiar to you. Because the sounds are new to you, you might be concerned about them. Most of the new sounds are normal. Hard surfaces such as floors, walls and cabinets can make the sounds seem louder than they actually are. The following describes the kinds of sounds that might be new to you and what may be making them. You will hear a buzzing sound when the water valve opens to fill the water pan for each cycle. Rattling noises may come from the flow of the refrigerant or the water line. Items stored on top of the ice maker can also make noises. The high-efficiency compressor may make a pulsating or high pitched sound. Water running over the evaporator plate may make a splashing sound. Water running from the evaporator plate to the water pan may make a splashing sound. As each cycle ends, you may hear a gurgling sound due to the refrigerant flowing in your ice maker. You may hear air being forced over the condenser by the condenser fan. During the harvest cycle, you may hear a “thud” when the ice sheet slides from the evaporator onto the cutter grid. When you first start the ice maker, you may hear water running continuously. The ice maker is programmed to run a rinse cycle before it begins to make ice. If the ice maker is connected to a water supply pressure in excess of 60 psi, you may hear a loud sound during water filling associated with the flow of water through the inlet valve. Call a licensed, qualified plumber to determine the best method to reduce the supply water pressure (50 psi is recommended). CARING FOR YOUR ICE MAKER Cleaning The ice making system and the air cooled condenser need to be cleaned regularly for the ice maker to operate at peak efficiency and to avoid premature failure of system components. See the “Ice Maker System” and the “Condenser” sections. Exterior Surfaces Wash the exterior enamel surfaces and gaskets with warm water and mild soap or detergent. Wipe and dry. Regular use of a good household appliance cleaner and wax will help maintain the finish. Do not use abrasive cleaners on enamel surfaces as they may scratch the finish. For products with a stainless steel exterior, use a clean sponge or soft cloth and a mild detergent in warm water. Do not use abrasive or harsh cleaners. Do not use chlorine bleach on the stainless steel surfaces. Ice Maker System Minerals that are removed from water during the freezing cycle will eventually form a hard scaly deposit in the water system. Cleaning the system regularly helps remove the mineral scale buildup. How often you need to clean the system depends upon how hard your water is. With hard water of 15 to 20 grains/gal. (4 to 5 grains/liter), you may need to clean the system as often as every 9 months. NOTE: Use one 16 oz (473 mL) bottle of approved ice maker cleaner. To order, see “Accessories.” Press the ON/OFF button. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the ice to fall into the storage bin. Remove all ice from the storage bin. Unscrew the drain cap from the bottom of the water pan located inside the storage bin as shown. Allow the water to drain completely. Replace the drain cap securely on the water pan. If the drain cap is loose, water will empty from the water pan and you will have either thin ice or no ice. Read and follow all handling information on the cleaner bottle before completing the steps below. Use one 16 oz (473 mL) bottle of approved ice maker cleaner. Pour one bottle of solution into the water pan. Fill the bottle twice with tap water and pour it into the water pan. A. Water pan B. Drain cap Press the CLEAN button. See “Using the Controls.” The Clean button will blink, indicating that the cleaning cycle is in process. When the “Cleaning Complete” light is illuminated (approximately 70 minutes), the cleaning cycle is complete. During the cleaning cycle, the system will both clean and rinse itself. After the cleaning cycle is complete, remove the drain cap from the water pan. Look for any cleaning solution left in the water pan. If cleaning solution drains from the water pan, you should run the clean cycle again. Be sure to refill the water pan with cleaner before starting the clean cycle again. Be sure to replace the drain cap securely on the water pan. If the drain cap is loose, water will empty from the water pan and you will have either thin ice or no ice. NOTE: Severe scale buildup may require repeated cleaning with a fresh quantity of cleaning solution. Press the ON/OFF button to resume ice production. Condenser A Dirty or Clogged Condenser Obstructs proper airflow. Reduces ice making capacity. Causes higher than recommended operating temperatures which may lead to component failure. Electrical Shock Hazard Disconnect power before cleaning. Replace all parts and panels before operating. Failure to do so can result in death or electrical shock. ACCESSORIES In Canada, visit our website www.kitchenaid.ca or call 1-800-807-6777. Water Filter Order Part Number F2WC9I1 or ICE2 Cleaner Order Part Number 4396808 Affresh® Stainless Steel Cleaner In U.S.A., order Part Number W10355016 In Canada, order Part Number W10355016B Affresh® Stainless Steel Wipes In U.S.A., order Part Number W10355049 In Canada, order Part Number W10355049B Affresh® Kitchen &#38; Appliance Cleaner In U.S.A., order Part Number W10355010 In Canada, order Part Number W10355010B TROUBLESHOOTING Visit producthelp.kitchenaid.com for recommendations that may help you avoid a service call. Ice Maker Operation Electrical Shock Hazard Plug into a grounded 3 prong outlet. Do not remove ground prong. Do not use an adapter. Do not use an extension cord. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, fire, or electrical shock. PROBLEM RECOMMENDED SOLUTIONS Ice Maker Will Not Operate Check that it is plugged into a grounded 3 prong outlet. Check that the control is turned on. See “Using the Controls.” Replace the fuse or reset the circuit breaker. NOTE: If problems continue, contact an electrician. Room temperature must be above 45°F (7°C). Otherwise, bin thermostat may sense cold room temperature and shut off even though the bin is not full of ice. The ice maker may not restart. Once it does shut it off. If there was a large amount of water added to the ice maker, wait a few minutes for the drain pump to clear. If there is still water in the bin, check to see whether the drain hose is kinked. For models with drain pumps, check that the drain hose is not damaged, or kinked or pinched between cabinet and ice maker. Use only Whirlpool approved drain pump kit, Part Number 1901A. Ice Maker Seems Noisy Water overflowing the reservoir is normal. This overflow helps to purge minerals that were removed from the water during the ice making process. If there a “whooshing” sound, Check the following things:  Check that the water supply is hooked up and turned on. Check that the drain cap is tight and the water drain pan pump is securely attached to the water pan. If there is ice between the evaporator plate and the cutting grid, check that the ice maker is level. If the ice maker is level, and the problem persists, run a cleaning cycle.” If the ice maker is connected to a water supply pressure in excess of 60 psi, you may hear a loud sound during which water filling associated with the flow of water through the inlet valve. Call a licensed, qualified plumber to determine the best method to reduce the supply water pressure (50 psi is recommended). Ice Production Electrical Shock Hazard Disconnect power before servicing. Replace all parts and panels before operating. Failure to do so can result in death or electrical shock. PROBLEM RECOMMENDED SOLUTIONS Ice Maker Runs But Produces No Ice Check that the control is turned on. Check that the water supply is properly connected and turned on. If the drain cap is loose, water will empty from the water pan, and you will have either thin ice or no ice. Tighten the drain cap. Clean the drain tube. Check that there are no kinks in the drain line. Ice Maker Runs But Produces Very Little Ice If the accelerated ice production feature is turned on, this feature increases the ice production rate to provide you with more ice in the same amount of time. Room temperatures of more than 90°F (32°C) will normally reduce ice production. Dirt or lint may be blocking the airflow through the condenser. If there is white scale buildup in the ice maker’s water or freezing system, you should clean the ice maker. If the drain cap is loose, water will empty from the water pan, and you will have either thin ice or no ice. Tighten the drain cap. Ensure that the cutter grid is securely in place and that its harness plug is connected. Check that water filter is properly installed. Ice Quality PROBLEM RECOMMENDED SOLUTIONS Off Taste, Odor or Gray Color in the If there is unusually high mineral content in the water supply, the water may need to be treated. If there is mineral scale buildup, clean your ice maker. Do not store any foods in the ice bin. Check that all packaging materials were removed at the time of installation. Thin, Soft or Clumps of Ice If there is unusually high mineral content in the water supply, the water may need to be treated. If there is mineral scale buildup, clean your ice maker. If there are clumps of ice in the bin and if ice is not used regularly, it will melt and form clumps. Break the clumps with the ice scoop provided. Plumbing Problems Excessive Weight Hazard Use two or more people to move and install ice maker. Failure to do so can result in back or other injury. PROBLEM RECOMMENDED SOLUTIONS Water Not Entering Drain Properly If the drain hose is not aligned over the drain, move the ice maker to align the drain. NOTE: Service technicians cannot repair plumbing problems outside of the ice maker. Call a licensed, qualified plumber. PERFORMANCE DATA SHEET Ice Maker Water Filtration System Model P6GEG2KL, P6KG2KL, P6WG2KL Capacity 2000 Gallons (7571 Liters) System tested and certified by NSF International against NSF/ANSI Standard 42 for the reduction of Chlorine Taste and Odor. This system has been tested according to NSF/ANSI Standards 42 for the reduction of the substances listed below. The concentration of the indicated substances in water entering the system was reduced to a concentration less than or equal to the permissible limit for water leaving the system, as specified in NSF/ANSI Standards 42. Substance Reduction Aesthetic Effects NSF Reduction Requirements Average Influent Influent Challenge Concentration Maximum Effluent Average Effluent Minimum % Reduction Average % Reduction Chlorine Taste/Odor 50% reduction 1.9727 mg/L 2.0 mg/L ± 10% 0.71 mg/L 0.7788 mg/L 70.2 72.8 Test Parameters: pH = 7.5 ± 0.5 unless otherwise noted. Flow = 0.50 gpm (1.89 Lpm). Pressure = 60 psig (413.7 kPa). Temp. = 68°F to 71.6°F (20°C to 22°C). Rated service capacity = 2000 gallons (7571 liters). It is essential that operational, maintenance, and filter replacement requirements be carried out for the product to perform as advertised. Use replacement filter P6RFWG2K, P6RFGEG2K, P6RFKG2K,  Part Number ICE2. Style 1 – When the water filter status display changes from “GOOD” to “ORDER,” order a new filter. When the filter indicator reads “REPLACE,” it is recommended that you replace the filter. Style 2 – Press FILTER to check the status of your water filter. If the filter indicator light is yellow and the words “ORDER FILTER” appear on the display screen, order a new filter. If the filter indicator light is red, it is recommended that you replace the filter. These contaminants are not necessarily in your water supply. While testing was performed under standard laboratory conditions, actual performance may vary. The product is for cold water use only. Do not use with water that is microbiologically unsafe or of unknown quality without adequate disinfection before or after the system. Refer to the “Warranty” section for the Manufacturer’s name, address and telephone number. Refer to the “Warranty” section for the Manufacturer’s limited warranty. Application Guidelines/Water Supply Parameters Water Supply City or Well Water Pressure 30 – 120 psi (207 – 827 kPa) Water Temperature 33°- 100°F (0.6° – 37.8°C) Service Flow Rate 0. 50 gpm (1.89 Lpm) @ 60 psi KITCHENAID® ICE MAKER LIMITED WARRANTY ATTACH YOUR RECEIPT HERE. PROOF OF PURCHASE IS REQUIRED TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE. Please have the following information available when you call the Customer eXperience Center: Name, address, and telephone number Model number and serial number A clear, detailed description of the problem Proof of purchase, including dealer or retailer name and address IF YOU NEED SERVICE: Before contacting us to arrange service, please determine whether your product requires repair. Some questions can be addressed without service. Please take a few minutes to review the Troubleshooting section of the Use and Care Guide or visit producthelp.kitchenaid.com. All warranty service is provided exclusively by our authorized KitchenAid Service Providers. In the U.S and Canada, direct all requests for warranty  service to KitchenAid Customer eXperience Center In the U.S.A., call 1-800-422-1230. In Canada, call 1-800-807-6777. If outside the 50 United States or Canada, contact your authorized KitchenAid dealer to determine whether another warranty applies FIVE YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY WHAT IS COVERED WHAT IS NOT COVERED THREE YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY (PARTS AND LABOR) For three years from the date of purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated, and maintained according to instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid brand of Whirlpool Corporation or Whirlpool Canada LP (hereafter “KitchenAid”) will pay for factory specified replacement parts and repair labor to correct defects in materials or workmanship that existed when this major appliance was purchased or, at its sole discretion, replace the product. In the event of product replacement, your appliance will be warranted for the remaining term of the original unit’s warranty period. FOURTH THROUGH FIFTH YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY (SEALED REFRIGERATION SYSTEM PARTS ONLY LABOR NOT INCLUDED) In the fourth through fifth years from the date of original purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated, and maintained according to the instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid brand will pay for factory specified replacement parts for the following components to correct non-cosmetic defects in materials or workmanship in the sealed refrigeration system that existed when this major appliance was purchased: compressor, evaporator, condenser, dryer/strainer, and connecting tubing. This limited five year warranty is only for the sealed refrigeration system replacement parts as identified and does not include labor. YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE PRODUCT REPAIR AS PROVIDED HEREIN. Service must be provided by a KitchenAid designated service company. This limited warranty is valid only in the United States or Canada and applies only when the major appliance is used in the country in which it was purchased. This limited warranty is effective from the date of original consumer purchase. Proof of original purchase date is required to obtain service under this limited warranty. Commercial, non-residential, or multiple-family use, or use inconsistent with published user, operator, or installation instructions. In-home instruction on how to use your product. Service to correct improper product maintenance or installation, installation not in accordance with electrical or plumbing codes, or correction of household electrical or plumbing (e.g., house wiring, fuses, or water inlet hoses) Defects or damage caused by the use of non-genuine KitchenAid parts or accessories. Damage from accident, misuse, abuse, fire, floods, acts of God, or use with products not approved by KitchenAid. Repairs to parts or systems to correct product damage or defects caused by unauthorized service, alteration, or modification of the appliance. Cosmetic damage, including scratches, dents, chips, and other damage to the appliance finishes, unless such damage results from defects in materials and workmanship and is reported to KitchenAid within 30 days. Discoloration, rust, or oxidation of surfaces resulting from caustic or corrosive environments including, but not limited to, high salt concentrations, high moisture or humidity, or exposure to chemicals. Food or medicine loss due to product failure. Pickup or delivery. This product is intended for in-home repair. Travel or transportation expenses for service in remote locations where an authorized KitchenAid servicer is not available. Removal or reinstallation of inaccessible appliances or built-in fixtures (e.g., trim, decorative panels, flooring, cabinetry, islands, countertops, drywall, etc.) that interfere with servicing, removal, or replacement of the product. Service or parts for appliances with original model/serial numbers removed, altered, or not easily determined. The cost of repair or replacement under these excluded circumstances shall be borne by the customer. DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO FIVE YEARS OR THE SHORTEST PERIOD ALLOWED BY LAW. Some states and provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of implied warranties of merchantability or fitness, so this limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province. DISCLAIMER OF REPRESENTATIONS OUTSIDE OF WARRANTY KitchenAid makes no representations about the quality, durability, or need for service or repair of this major appliance other than the representations contained in this warranty. If you want a longer or more comprehensive warranty than the limited warranty that comes with this major appliance, you should ask KitchenAid or your retailer about buying an extended warranty. LIMITATION OF REMEDIES: EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL AND  CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS  LIMITEDWARRANTY SHALL BE PRODUCT REPAIR AS PROVIDED HEREIN. KITCHENAID SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states and provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province. [...]<p><a class="btn btn-secondary understrap-read-more-link" href="https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/kuid508hpsel/">Read More...</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>KitchenAid KUID508HPS 18 inch Built-In Ice Maker in PrintShield Stainless Steel</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/0-24-224x300-1.webp" /></p>
<table width="1352">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="623"><strong>LEARN MORE</strong><br />
In an effort to conserve natural resources, this ice maker includes a condensed User Guide. A complete Use and Care Guide can be downloaded at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.com/manuals" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.com/manuals</a>. The model number is located on the inside of the ice maker.<br />
In the U.S.A., register your ice maker at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.com</a>. In Canada, register your ice maker at <a href="http://www.kitchenaid.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.com</a></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table width="1349">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="623"><strong>Your safety and the safety of others are very important.</strong></p>
<p>We have provided many important safety messages in this manual and on your appliance. Always read and obey all safety messages.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_2-466.webp" />This is the safety alert symbol.<br />
This symbol alerts you to potential hazards that can kill or hurt you and others. All safety messages will follow the safety alert symbol and either the word “DANGER” or “WARNING.”<br />
These words mean:<br />
<strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_3-437-300x38-1.webp" /> You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t immediately follow instructions.</strong><br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_4-409-300x38-1.webp" /><strong>You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t follow instructions.</strong><br />
All safety messages will tell you what the potential hazard is, tell you how to reduce the chance of injury, and tell you what can happen if the instructions are not followed.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS</h4>
<p><strong>WARNING</strong> : To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, or injury when using your ice maker, follow these basic precautions:</p>
<ul>
<li>Plug into a grounded 3 prong outlet.</li>
<li>Do not remove ground prong.</li>
<li>Do not use an adapter.</li>
<li>Do not use an extension cord.</li>
<li>Disconnect power before cleaning.</li>
<li>Disconnect power before servicing.</li>
<li>Replace all parts and panels before operating.</li>
<li>Use two or more people to move and install ice maker.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS</strong></p>
<table width="1353">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="623">State of California Proposition 65 Warnings:<br />
<strong>WARNING:</strong> This product contains one or more chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer.<br />
<strong>WARNING:</strong> This product contains one or more chemicals known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>OPERATING YOUR ICE MAKER</h4>
<h5>How Your Ice Maker Works</h5>
<p>When you first start your ice maker, the water pan will fill and the system will rinse itself before starting to make ice. The rinsing process takes about 5 minutes.<br />
Under normal operating conditions, the ice maker will cycle at preset temperatures. The ice level sensor located in the ice storage bin will monitor the ice levels.<br />
<strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> If the water supply to the ice maker is turned off, be sure to set the ice maker control to OFF.</p>
<h5>The Ice Making Process</h5>
<ol>
<li>Water is constantly circulated over a freezing plate. As the water freezes into ice, the minerals in the water are rejected. This produces a sheet of ice with a low mineral content.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_5-391-300x193-1.webp" /></li>
<li>When the desired thickness is reached, the ice sheet is released and slides onto a cutter grid. The grid divides the sheet into individual cubes.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_6-372-300x193-1.webp" /></li>
<li>The water containing the rejected minerals is drained after each freezing cycle.</li>
<li>Fresh water enters the machine for the next ice making cycle.</li>
<li>Cubes fall into the storage bin. When the bin is full, the ice maker shuts off automatically and restarts when more ice is needed. The ice bin is not refrigerated, and some melting will occur. The amount of melting varies with room temperature.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_7-343-300x258-1.webp" /><br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> As the room and water temperatures vary, so will the amount of ice produced and stored. This means that higher operating temperatures result in reduced ice production.</li>
</ol>
<h5>Using the Controls</h5>
<ol>
<li>To start ice production, press ON/OFF.</li>
<li>To stop ice maker operation, press ON/OFF<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_8-332-300x128-1.webp" /></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>NOTES:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Pressing the ON/OFF button does not shut off power to the ice maker.</li>
<li>Allow 24 hours to produce the first batch of ice. Discard the first 2 batches produced.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Max Ice Mode</strong></p>
<p>Select the Max Ice feature when you have an upcoming need for a large amount of ice and the ice bin is low or empty. Max Ice mode will produce a greater quantity of ice in a 24-hour period.</p>
<ul>
<li>Press MAX ICE while the ice maker is on. The indicator light will illuminate.</li>
<li>Press MAX ICE again to turn off the Max Ice feature. The indicator light will turn off.</li>
<li>The Max Ice mode will be on when you first turn on the product.<br />
It will turn off after 24 hours. To turn Max Ice back on, press MAX ICE.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Clean</strong></p>
<p>It is recommended that you clean the ice maker when the “Cleaning Needed” light is illuminated or 9 months has elapsed, or ice<br />
production decreases significantly. To clean your ice maker, see “Ice Maker System” in the “Cleaning” section.</p>
<p><strong>Door Ajar Alarm</strong></p>
<p>The Door Ajar Alarm feature sounds an alarm when the ice maker door is open for 5 minutes. The alarm will repeat every 2 minutes.<br />
Close the door to turn off. The feature then resets and will reactivate when the door is left open again for 5 minutes.</p>
<h5>Water Filtration System</h5>
<table width="1296">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="623">Do not use with water that is microbiologically unsafe or of unknown quality without adequate disinfection before or after the system. Systems certified for cyst reduction may be used on disinfected waters that may contain filterable cysts.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Installing a Water Filter</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Purchase a KitchenAid approved water filter.</li>
<li>Take the water filter out of its packaging and remove the cover from the O-rings. Be sure the O-rings are still in place after the cover is removed.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_9-314-300x85-1.webp" /><br />
<strong>A.</strong> Cover<br />
<strong>B.</strong> O-rings<br />
<strong>C.</strong> Alignment pin<br />
<strong>D.</strong> Alignment arrow</li>
<li>The water filter compartment is located in the right-hand side of the ice maker controls. For 15″ (38.1 cm) models, push in on the door to release the latch, and then lower the door.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_10-302-300x202-1.webp" /></li>
<li>Using the arrow pointing to the alignment pin on the side of the filter and the arrow inside the control housing, align the alignment pin with the cutout notch and insert the filter into the housing.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_11-277-300x169-1.webp" /><br />
<strong>A.</strong> Alignment pin<br />
<strong>B.</strong> Unlocked symbol<br />
<strong>C.</strong> Locked symbol<br />
<strong>D.</strong> Cutout notch inside control housing<br />
<strong>E.</strong> Arrow pointing to cutout notch<br />
<strong>F.</strong> Arrow pointing to alignment pin</li>
<li>Turn the filter clockwise until it locks into the housing. Ensure that the alignment arrow on the filter head aligns with the locked symbol on the control box housing.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> If the filter is not correctly locked into the housing, the ice maker will not produce ice.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_12-255-300x113-1.webp" /><br />
<strong>A.</strong> Alignment arrow aligned with locked symbol</li>
<li>For 15″ (38.1 cm) models, push the control box door closed until the latch snaps closed.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>The Water Filter Status Light</strong><br />
The water filter status lights will help you know when to change your water filter.</p>
<ul>
<li>The “Order Filter” status light will be illuminated when it is time to order a replacement filter.</li>
<li>The “Replace Filter” status light will be illuminated when it is time to replace the filter.</li>
<li>Replacing the disposable water filter with a new filter will automatically reset the filter status tracking feature. See “Using the Controls.”</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Replace the Water Filter</strong></p>
<p>To purchase a replacement water filter, see “Accessories.”<br />
Replace the disposable water filter when indicated on the water filter status display or at least every 9 months. If the ice making rate decreases before the Replace Filter light illuminates, then replace the filter.</p>
<ol>
<li>Locate the water filter compartment in the right-hand side of the control housing. See Step 3 in the “Install Water Filter” section.</li>
<li>Turn the water filter counterclockwise (to the left), and pull it straight out of the compartment.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> There may be some water in the filter. Some spilling may occur.</li>
<li>Install the replacement water filter by following steps 2 through 5 in the “Install the Water Filter” section.</li>
</ol>
<h5>Normal Sounds</h5>
<p>Your new ice maker may make sounds that are not familiar to you.<br />
Because the sounds are new to you, you might be concerned about them. Most of the new sounds are normal. Hard surfaces such as floors, walls and cabinets can make the sounds seem louder than they actually are. The following describes the kinds of sounds that might be new to you and what may be making them.</p>
<ul>
<li>You will hear a buzzing sound when the water valve opens to fill the water pan for each cycle.</li>
<li>Rattling noises may come from the flow of the refrigerant or the water line. Items stored on top of the ice maker can also make noises.</li>
<li>The high-efficiency compressor may make a pulsating or high pitched sound.</li>
<li>Water running over the evaporator plate may make a splashing sound.</li>
<li>Water running from the evaporator plate to the water pan may make a splashing sound.</li>
<li>As each cycle ends, you may hear a gurgling sound due to the refrigerant flowing in your ice maker.</li>
<li>You may hear air being forced over the condenser by the condenser fan.</li>
<li>During the harvest cycle, you may hear a “thud” when the ice sheet slides from the evaporator onto the cutter grid.</li>
<li>When you first start the ice maker, you may hear water running continuously. The ice maker is programmed to run a rinse cycle before it begins to make ice.</li>
<li>If the ice maker is connected to a water supply pressure in excess of 60 psi, you may hear a loud sound during water filling associated with the flow of water through the inlet valve. Call a licensed, qualified plumber to determine the best method to reduce the supply water pressure (50 psi is recommended).</li>
</ul>
<h4>CARING FOR YOUR ICE MAKER</h4>
<h5>Cleaning</h5>
<p>The ice making system and the air cooled condenser need to be cleaned regularly for the ice maker to operate at peak efficiency and to avoid premature failure of system components. See the “Ice Maker System” and the “Condenser” sections.</p>
<p><strong>Exterior Surfaces</strong><br />
Wash the exterior enamel surfaces and gaskets with warm water and mild soap or detergent. Wipe and dry. Regular use of a good household appliance cleaner and wax will help maintain the finish. Do not use abrasive cleaners on enamel surfaces as they may scratch the finish. For products with a stainless steel exterior, use a clean sponge or soft cloth and a mild detergent in warm water. Do not use abrasive or harsh cleaners. Do not use chlorine bleach on the stainless steel surfaces.</p>
<p><strong>Ice Maker System</strong></p>
<p>Minerals that are removed from water during the freezing cycle will eventually form a hard scaly deposit in the water system. Cleaning the system regularly helps remove the mineral scale buildup. How often you need to clean the system depends upon how hard your water is.<br />
With hard water of 15 to 20 grains/gal. (4 to 5 grains/liter), you may need to clean the system as often as every 9 months.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Use one 16 oz (473 mL) bottle of approved ice maker cleaner.</p>
<p><strong>To order, see “Accessories.”</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Press the ON/OFF button.</li>
<li>Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the ice to fall into the storage bin.<br />
Remove all ice from the storage bin.</li>
<li>Unscrew the drain cap from the bottom of the water pan located inside the storage bin as shown. Allow the water to drain completely.</li>
<li>Replace the drain cap securely on the water pan. If the drain cap is loose, water will empty from the water pan and you will have either thin ice or no ice.</li>
<li>Read and follow all handling information on the cleaner bottle before completing the steps below. Use one 16 oz (473 mL) bottle of approved ice maker cleaner.</li>
<li>Pour one bottle of solution into the water pan. Fill the bottle twice with tap water and pour it into the water pan.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_15-212-300x196-1.webp" /><br />
<strong>A.</strong> Water pan<br />
<strong>B.</strong> Drain cap</li>
<li>Press the CLEAN button. See “Using the Controls.” The Clean button will blink, indicating that the cleaning cycle is in process.<br />
When the “Cleaning Complete” light is illuminated (approximately 70 minutes), the cleaning cycle is complete. During the cleaning<br />
cycle, the system will both clean and rinse itself.</li>
<li>After the cleaning cycle is complete, remove the drain cap from the water pan. Look for any cleaning solution left in the water pan.<br />
If cleaning solution drains from the water pan, you should run the clean cycle again. Be sure to refill the water pan with cleaner before starting the clean cycle again. Be sure to replace the drain cap securely on the water pan. If the drain cap is loose, water will empty from the water pan and you will have either thin ice or no ice.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> Severe scale buildup may require repeated cleaning with a fresh quantity of cleaning solution.</li>
<li>Press the ON/OFF button to resume ice production.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Condenser</strong></p>
<p><strong>A Dirty or Clogged Condenser</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Obstructs proper airflow.</li>
<li>Reduces ice making capacity.</li>
<li>Causes higher than recommended operating temperatures which may lead to component failure.</li>
</ul>
<table width="697">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="623"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_13-245-300x46-1.webp" /></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="623"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_14-228-279x300-1.webp" /></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="623"><strong>Electrical Shock Hazard</strong></p>
<p>Disconnect power before cleaning. Replace all parts and panels before operating. Failure to do so can result in death or electrical shock.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>ACCESSORIES</h4>
<p>In Canada, visit our website <strong><a href="http://www.kitchenaid.ca/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.ca</a></strong> or call <strong>1-800-807-6777.</strong></p>
<p><strong>Water Filter</strong><br />
Order Part Number F2WC9I1 or ICE2</p>
<p><strong>Cleaner</strong><br />
Order Part Number 4396808</p>
<p><strong>Affresh® Stainless Steel Cleaner</strong><br />
In U.S.A., order Part Number W10355016<br />
In Canada, order Part Number W10355016B</p>
<p><strong>Affresh® Stainless Steel Wipes</strong><br />
In U.S.A., order Part Number W10355049<br />
In Canada, order Part Number W10355049B</p>
<p><strong>Affresh® Kitchen &amp; Appliance Cleaner</strong><br />
In U.S.A., order Part Number W10355010<br />
In Canada, order Part Number W10355010B</p>
<h4>TROUBLESHOOTING</h4>
<p><strong>Visit producthelp.kitchenaid.com for recommendations that may help you avoid a service call.</strong></p>
<h5>Ice Maker Operation</h5>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="623"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_13-245-300x46-2.webp" /></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="623"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_14-228-279x300-1.webp" /></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="623"><strong>Electrical Shock Hazard</strong></p>
<p>Plug into a grounded 3 prong outlet.<br />
Do not remove ground prong.<br />
Do not use an adapter.<br />
Do not use an extension cord.<br />
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, fire, or electrical shock.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table width="1350">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="208"><strong>PROBLEM</strong></td>
<td width="416"><strong>RECOMMENDED SOLUTIONS</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="208"><strong>Ice Maker Will Not Operate</strong></td>
<td width="416">Check that it is plugged into a grounded 3 prong outlet. Check that the control is turned on. See “Using the Controls.” Replace the fuse or reset the circuit breaker. NOTE: If problems continue, contact an electrician. Room temperature must be above 45°F (7°C). Otherwise, bin thermostat may sense cold room temperature and shut off even though the bin is not full of ice. The ice maker may not restart. Once it does shut it off. If there was a large amount of water added to the ice maker, wait a few minutes for the drain pump to clear. If there is still water in the bin, check to see whether the drain hose is kinked. For models with drain pumps, check that the drain hose is not damaged, or kinked or pinched between cabinet and ice maker. Use only Whirlpool approved drain pump kit, Part Number 1901A.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="208"><strong>Ice Maker Seems Noisy</strong></td>
<td width="416">Water overflowing the reservoir is normal. This overflow helps to purge minerals that were removed from the water during the ice making process. If there a “whooshing” sound, Check the following things:</p>
<ul>
<li> Check that the water supply is hooked up and turned on.</li>
<li>Check that the drain cap is tight and the water drain pan pump is securely attached to the water pan.</li>
</ul>
<p>If there is ice between the evaporator plate and the cutting grid, check that the ice maker is level. If the ice maker is level, and the problem persists, run a cleaning cycle.” If the ice maker is connected to a water supply pressure in excess of 60 psi, you may hear a loud sound during which water filling associated with the flow of water through the inlet valve. Call a licensed, qualified plumber to determine the best method to reduce the supply water pressure (50 psi is recommended).</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h5>Ice Production</h5>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="623"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_13-245-300x46-2.webp" /></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="623"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_14-228-279x300-1.webp" /></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="623"><strong>Electrical Shock Hazard</strong></p>
<p>Disconnect power before servicing.<br />
Replace all parts and panels before operating.<br />
Failure to do so can result in death or electrical shock.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table width="1330">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="208"><strong>PROBLEM</strong></td>
<td width="416"><strong>RECOMMENDED SOLUTIONS</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="208"><strong>Ice Maker Runs But Produces No Ice</strong></td>
<td width="416">Check that the control is turned on. Check that the water supply is properly connected and turned on. If the drain cap is loose, water will empty from the water pan, and you will have either thin ice or no ice. Tighten the drain cap. Clean the drain tube. Check that there are no kinks in the drain line.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="208"><strong>Ice Maker Runs But Produces Very Little Ice</strong></td>
<td width="416">If the accelerated ice production feature is turned on, this feature increases the ice production rate to provide you with more ice in the same amount of time. Room temperatures of more than 90°F (32°C) will normally reduce ice production. Dirt or lint may be blocking the airflow through the condenser. If there is white scale buildup in the ice maker’s water or freezing system, you should clean the ice maker. If the drain cap is loose, water will empty from the water pan, and you will have either thin ice or no ice. Tighten the drain cap. Ensure that the cutter grid is securely in place and that its harness plug is connected. Check that water filter is properly installed.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h5>Ice Quality</h5>
<table width="1069">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="208"><strong>PROBLEM</strong></td>
<td width="416"><strong>RECOMMENDED SOLUTIONS</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="208"><strong>Off Taste, Odor or Gray Color in the</strong></td>
<td width="416">If there is unusually high mineral content in the water supply, the water may need to be treated.<br />
If there is mineral scale buildup, clean your ice maker.<br />
Do not store any foods in the ice bin.<br />
Check that all packaging materials were removed at the time of installation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="208"><strong>Thin, Soft or Clumps of Ice</strong></td>
<td width="416">If there is unusually high mineral content in the water supply, the water may need to be treated.<br />
If there is mineral scale buildup, clean your ice maker.<br />
If there are clumps of ice in the bin and if ice is not used regularly, it will melt and form clumps. Break the clumps with the ice scoop provided.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h5>Plumbing Problems</h5>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="623"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_13-245-300x46-2.webp" /></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="623"><strong>Excessive Weight Hazard</strong></p>
<p><strong>Use two or more people to move and install ice maker.</strong><br />
<strong>Failure to do so can result in back or other injury.</strong></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table width="900">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="208"><strong>PROBLEM</strong></td>
<td width="416"><strong>RECOMMENDED SOLUTIONS</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="208"><strong>Water Not Entering Drain Properly</strong></td>
<td width="416">If the drain hose is not aligned over the drain, move the ice maker to align the drain.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> Service technicians cannot repair plumbing problems outside of the ice maker. Call a licensed, qualified plumber.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>PERFORMANCE DATA SHEET</h4>
<p><strong>Ice Maker Water Filtration System</strong><br />
<strong>Model P6GEG2KL, P6KG2KL, P6WG2KL Capacity 2000 Gallons (7571 Liters)</strong></p>
<table width="756">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="85"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_16-207.webp" /></td>
<td width="539">System tested and certified by NSF International against NSF/ANSI Standard 42 for the reduction of Chlorine Taste and Odor.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>This system has been tested according to NSF/ANSI Standards 42 for the reduction of the substances listed below. The concentration of the indicated substances in water entering the system was reduced to a concentration less than or equal to the permissible limit for water leaving the system, as specified in NSF/ANSI Standards 42.</p>
<table width="1931">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="78"><strong>Substance Reduction Aesthetic Effects</strong></td>
<td width="78"><strong>NSF Reduction Requirements</strong></td>
<td width="78"><strong>Average Influent</strong></td>
<td width="78"><strong>Influent Challenge Concentration</strong></td>
<td width="78"><strong>Maximum Effluent</strong></td>
<td width="78"><strong>Average Effluent</strong></td>
<td width="78"><strong>Minimum % Reduction</strong></td>
<td width="78"><strong>Average % Reduction</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="78">Chlorine Taste/Odor</td>
<td width="78">50% reduction</td>
<td width="78">1.9727 mg/L</td>
<td width="78">2.0 mg/L ± 10%</td>
<td width="78">0.71 mg/L</td>
<td width="78">0.7788 mg/L</td>
<td width="78">70.2</td>
<td width="78">72.8</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Test Parameters: pH = 7.5 ± 0.5 unless otherwise noted. Flow = 0.50 gpm (1.89 Lpm). Pressure = 60 psig (413.7 kPa).<br />
Temp. = 68°F to 71.6°F (20°C to 22°C). Rated service capacity = 2000 gallons (7571 liters).</p>
<ul>
<li>It is essential that operational, maintenance, and filter replacement requirements be carried out for the product to perform as advertised.</li>
<li>Use replacement filter P6RFWG2K, P6RFGEG2K, P6RFKG2K,  Part Number ICE2.<br />
Style 1 – When the water filter status display changes from “GOOD” to “ORDER,” order a new filter. When the filter indicator reads “REPLACE,” it is recommended that you replace the filter.<br />
Style 2 – Press FILTER to check the status of your water filter.<br />
If the filter indicator light is yellow and the words “ORDER FILTER” appear on the display screen, order a new filter. If the filter indicator light is red, it is recommended that you replace the filter.</li>
<li>These contaminants are not necessarily in your water supply.<br />
While testing was performed under standard laboratory conditions, actual performance may vary.</li>
<li>The product is for cold water use only.</li>
<li>Do not use with water that is microbiologically unsafe or of unknown quality without adequate disinfection before or after the system.</li>
<li>Refer to the “Warranty” section for the Manufacturer’s name, address and telephone number.</li>
<li>Refer to the “Warranty” section for the Manufacturer’s limited warranty.<br />
<table width="866">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" width="321"><strong>Application Guidelines/Water Supply Parameters</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="141">Water Supply</td>
<td width="180">City or Well</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="141">Water Pressure</td>
<td width="180">30 – 120 psi (207 – 827 kPa)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="141">Water Temperature</td>
<td width="180">33°- 100°F (0.6° – 37.8°C)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="141">Service Flow Rate 0.</td>
<td width="180">50 gpm (1.89 Lpm) @ 60 psi</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
</li>
</ul>
<h4>KITCHENAID® ICE MAKER LIMITED WARRANTY</h4>
<p>ATTACH YOUR RECEIPT HERE. PROOF OF PURCHASE IS REQUIRED TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE.<br />
Please have the following information available when you call the Customer eXperience Center:</p>
<ul>
<li>Name, address, and telephone number</li>
<li>Model number and serial number</li>
<li>A clear, detailed description of the problem</li>
<li>Proof of purchase, including dealer or retailer name and address</li>
</ul>
<table width="1350">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="623"><strong>IF YOU NEED SERVICE:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Before contacting us to arrange service, please determine whether your product requires repair. Some questions can be addressed without service.<br />
Please take a few minutes to review the Troubleshooting section of the Use and Care Guide or visit producthelp.kitchenaid.com.</li>
<li>All warranty service is provided exclusively by our authorized KitchenAid Service Providers. In the U.S and Canada, direct all requests for warranty  service to</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>KitchenAid Customer eXperience Center</strong><br />
<strong>In the U.S.A., call 1-800-422-1230. In Canada, call 1-800-807-6777.</strong><br />
If outside the 50 United States or Canada, contact your authorized KitchenAid dealer to determine whether another warranty applies</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h5>FIVE YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY</h5>
<table width="1887">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="312"><strong>WHAT IS COVERED</strong></td>
<td width="312"><strong>WHAT IS NOT COVERED</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="312"><strong>THREE </strong><strong>Y</strong><strong>EAR LIMITED WARRANTY </strong><strong>(</strong><strong>PART</strong><strong>S </strong><strong>AND LAB</strong><strong>O</strong><strong>R</strong><strong>)</strong></p>
<p>For three years from the date of purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated, and maintained according to instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid brand of Whirlpool Corporation or Whirlpool Canada LP (hereafter “KitchenAid”) will pay for factory specified replacement parts and repair labor to correct defects in materials or workmanship that existed when this major appliance was purchased or, at its sole discretion, replace the product. In the event of product replacement, your appliance will be warranted for the remaining term of the original unit’s warranty period.</p>
<p><strong>FOURTH THROUGH FIFTH YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY<br />
</strong><strong>(</strong><strong>SEALED REFRIGERATION SYSTEM PARTS ONL</strong><strong>Y </strong><strong>LABOR NOT IN</strong><strong>C</strong><strong>LUDED)</strong></p>
<p>In the fourth through fifth years from the date of original purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated, and maintained according to the instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid brand will pay for factory specified replacement parts for the following components to correct non-cosmetic defects in materials or workmanship in the sealed refrigeration system that existed when this major appliance was purchased: compressor, evaporator, condenser, dryer/strainer, and connecting tubing. This limited five year warranty is only for the sealed refrigeration system replacement parts as identified and does not include labor.</p>
<p>YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE PRODUCT REPAIR AS PROVIDED HEREIN. Service must be provided by a KitchenAid designated service company. This limited warranty is valid only in the United States or Canada and applies only when the major appliance is used in the country in which it was purchased. This limited warranty is effective from the date of original consumer purchase.<br />
Proof of original purchase date is required to obtain service under this limited warranty.</td>
<td width="312">
<ol>
<li>Commercial, non-residential, or multiple-family use, or use inconsistent with published user, operator, or installation instructions.</li>
<li>In-home instruction on how to use your product.</li>
<li>Service to correct improper product maintenance or installation, installation not in accordance with electrical or plumbing codes, or correction of household electrical or plumbing (e.g., house wiring, fuses, or water inlet hoses)</li>
<li>Defects or damage caused by the use of non-genuine KitchenAid parts or accessories.</li>
<li>Damage from accident, misuse, abuse, fire, floods, acts of God, or use with products not approved by KitchenAid.</li>
<li>Repairs to parts or systems to correct product damage or defects caused by unauthorized service, alteration, or modification of the appliance.</li>
<li>Cosmetic damage, including scratches, dents, chips, and other damage to the appliance finishes, unless such damage results from defects in materials and workmanship and is reported to KitchenAid within 30 days.</li>
<li>Discoloration, rust, or oxidation of surfaces resulting from caustic or corrosive environments including, but not limited to, high salt concentrations, high moisture or humidity, or exposure to chemicals.</li>
<li>Food or medicine loss due to product failure.</li>
<li>Pickup or delivery. This product is intended for in-home repair.</li>
<li>Travel or transportation expenses for service in remote locations where an authorized KitchenAid servicer is not available.</li>
<li>Removal or reinstallation of inaccessible appliances or built-in fixtures (e.g., trim, decorative panels, flooring, cabinetry, islands, countertops, drywall, etc.) that interfere with servicing, removal, or replacement of the product.</li>
<li>Service or parts for appliances with original model/serial numbers removed, altered, or not easily determined.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Th</strong><strong>e </strong><strong>cost of repair or replacement under the</strong><strong>s</strong><strong>e ex</strong><strong>c</strong><strong>luded </strong><strong>c</strong><strong>ir</strong><strong>c</strong><strong>um</strong><strong>s</strong><strong>tan</strong><strong>c</strong><strong>es </strong><strong>s</strong><strong>hall be </strong><strong>borne by the customer</strong><strong>.</strong></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table width="1350">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="623"><strong>DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES</strong></p>
<p>IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO FIVE YEARS OR THE SHORTEST PERIOD ALLOWED BY LAW. Some states and provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of implied warranties of merchantability or fitness, so this limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table width="1351">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="623"><strong>DISCLAIMER OF REPRESENTATIONS OUTSIDE OF WARRANTY</strong></p>
<p>KitchenAid makes no representations about the quality, durability, or need for service or repair of this major appliance other than the representations contained in this warranty. If you want a longer or more comprehensive warranty than the limited warranty that comes with this major appliance, you should ask KitchenAid or your retailer about buying an extended warranty.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table width="1350">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="623"><strong>LIMITATION OF REMEDIES: EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL AND  CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES</strong></p>
<p>YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS  LIMITEDWARRANTY SHALL BE PRODUCT REPAIR AS PROVIDED HEREIN. KITCHENAID SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states and provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Screenshot_1-510-300x38-1.webp" /></p>
<form id="commentform" class="comment-form" action="https://manuals.plus/wp-comments-post.php" method="post" novalidate="">
<p class="form-submit">
</form>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>KitchenAid Pasta Roller And Cutter Manual</title>
		<link>https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/pasta-roller-and-cutter/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[ItsManual]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Tue, 27 Jun 2023 09:20:36 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[KitchenAid]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://usemanuals.com/?p=127380</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[&#160; KSMPRA, KSMPCA, KSMPSA, KSMFETPRA, KSMPDX PARTS AND FEATURES PARTS AND ACCESSORIES MODEL/ROLLER CHART Use this chart to quickly identify which rollers and/or cutters are included with your KitchenAid product. MODEL # ATTACHMENT(S) INCLUDED KSMPRA Pasta roller, Spaghetti cutter, Fettucine cutter KSMPSA Pasta roller KSMPCA Capellini cutter, Lasagnette cutter KSMFETPRA Pasta roller, Fettuccine cutter KSMPDX Pasta roller, Spaghetti Cutter, Fettuccine cutter, Capellini cutter, Lasagnette cutter PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS SAFETY Your safety and the safety of others are very important. We have provided many important safety messages in this manual and on your appliance. Always read and obey all safety messages. This is the safety alert symbol. This symbol alerts you to potential hazards that can kill or hurt you and others. All safety messages will follow the safety alert symbol and either the word “DANGER” or “WARNING” These words mean: You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t immediately follow instructions. DANGER WARNING You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t follow instructions. All safety messages will tell you what the potential hazard is, tell you how to reduce the chance of injury, and tell you what can happen if the instructions are not followed. State of California Proposition 65 Warnings: WARNING: This product contains one or more chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. WARNING: This product contains one or more chemicals known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS When using electrical appliances, basic safety precautions should always be followed, including the following: Read all instructions. To protect against risk of electrical shock, do not put Stand Mixer in water or other liquid. Close supervision is necessary when this or any appliance is used near children. Unplug Stand Mixer from outlet when not in use, before putting on or taking off parts, and before cleaning. Avoid contacting moving parts. Keep fingers out of discharge opening. Do not operate the Stand Mixer with a damaged cord or plug or after the Stand Mixer malfunctions, or is dropped or damaged in any manner. Return the Stand Mixer to the nearest Authorized Service Center for examination, repair or electrical or mechanical adjustment. The use of attachments not recommended or sold by KitchenAid may cause fire, electric shock or injury. Do not use the Stand Mixer outdoors. PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS SAFETY PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS SAFETY Do not let the Stand Mixer cord hang over the edge of table or counter. Do not let the Stand Mixer cord contact hot surfaces, including the stove.  Also see Important Safeguards included in the Stand Mixer “Instructions” manual. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS This product is designed for household use only. USING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS SPEED SETTINGS CHART ATTACHMENT SPEED NOODLE WIDTH SUGGESTED USES PASTA ROLLER 2 up to 140 mm See roller settings chart LASAGNETTE CUTTER 3 12 mm Thick Noodles FETTUCCINE CUTTER 5 6.5 mm Egg Noodles Fettuccine SPAGHETTI CUTTER 7 2 mm Spaghetti Thin Fettuccine Linguine Fini CAPELLINI CUTTER 7 1.5 mm Very Thin Angel Hair-Type Pasta Capellini Very Fine Linguine FOR DETAILED INFORMATION ON USING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS: Visit kitchenaid.com/quickstart for additional Instructions with videos, inspiring recipes, and tips on how to use your Pasta Roller and Cutters. USING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS ROLLER SETTINGS CHART ATTACHMENT ROLLERSETTING SUGGESTED USES PASTA ROLLER 1 or 2 Kneading and thinning dough 3 Thick “kluski”-type noodles 4 Egg noodles 4 or 5 Lasagna noodles, fettuccine, spaghetti, and ravioli 6 or 7 Tortellini, thin fettuccine, and linguini fini 7 or 8 Very thin “angel-hair”-type pasta/capellini or very fine linguine ATTACHING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS Before first use To avoid damage, do not wash or immerse attachments in water or other liquid. Do not wash in the dishwasher. NOTE: These attachments are designed to be used with pasta dough only. To avoid damaging your Pasta Roller, do not cut or roll anything other than pasta. USING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS MAKING PASTA IMPORTANT: When using the Pasta Roller and Cutters, do not wear ties, scarves, loose clothing or long necklaces; gather long hair with a clasp USING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS USING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS FOR DETAILED INFORMATION ON USING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS: Visit kitchenaid.com/quickstart for additional Instructions with videos, inspiring recipes, and tips on how to use your Pasta Roller and Cutters. DISASSEMBLING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS IMPORTANT: After removing the Pasta Roller or Cutter from the Stand Mixer, be sure to clean any dried dough. See “Care and Cleaning” for details. NOTE: Allow Stand Mixer to rest for at least 1 hour after extruding 2 consecutive pasta dough recipes. RECIPE COOKING PASTA WARNING Food Poisoning Hazard Do not let foods that contain perishable ingredients such as eggs, dairy products, and meats remain unrefrigerated for more than one hour. Doing so can result in food poisoning or sickness. Add 2 tsp (10 mL) salt and 1 tbs. (15 mL) oil (optional) to 6 qt (5.7 L) boiling water. Gradually add pasta and continue to cook at a boil until pasta is “al dente” or slightly firm to the bite. Pasta floats to the top of the water while cooking so stirs occasionally to keep it cooking evenly. Use a colander to drain. Dry Pasta — 7 minutes Fresh Pasta — 2-5 minutes, depending on noodle thickness. BASIC EGG NOODLE PASTA 4 large eggs 3½ cups (830 mL) sifted all-purpose flour 1 tbs (15 mL) water 1 tsp (2 mL) salt Break eggs into a glass measuring cup. Check to see that the eggs measure 7/8 cup (207 mL). If less than 7/8 cup (207 mL), add water, 1 tsp (2 mL) at a time until the measurement is reached. Place flour and salt in the Stand Mixer bowl. Attach bowl and flat beater. Turn to Speed 2 and gradually add eggs and 1 tbs (15 mL) water. Mix for 30 seconds. Stop the  Stand Mixer and exchange the flat beater for the dough hook. Turn to Speed 2 and knead for 2 minutes. Let dough rest for 20 minutes. Divide dough into 4 pieces before processing with Pasta Roller attachment. Follow the cooking instructions above. Yield: About 1 ¼ pound (579 g) dough FOR MORE RECIPES WITH THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS: Visit kitchenaid.com/quickstart for additional Instructions with videos, inspiring recipes, and tips on how to use your Pasta Roller and Cutters. CARE AND CLEANING CLEANING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS These accessories are designed to be used with pasta dough only. To avoid damaging your Pasta rollers and Cutters, do not insert anything other than pasta dough. IMPORTANT: Do not use metal objects to clean out the Pasta Roller and Cutters. Do not wash the Pasta Roller and Cutters in the dishwasher, or immerse in water or other liquids. The Pasta Roller and Cutters should be hand washed. NOTE: Never use a knife or any other sharp object to remove excess dough. Do not run a dish towel or any other cloth through the rollers to clean them. FOR DETAILED INFORMATION ON CLEANING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS: Visit kitchenaid.com/quickstart for additional Instructions with videos, inspiring recipes, and tips on how to use your Pasta Roller and Cutters. CARE AND CLEANING CARE AND CLEANING MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard Plug into a grounded 3 prong outlet. Do not remove the ground prong. Do not use an adapter. Do not use an extension cord. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, fire, or electrical shock. If your Stand Mixer should malfunction or fail to operate while using the Pasta Roller and Cutter attachment, please check the following: Is the Stand Mixer plugged in? Is the fuse in the circuit to the Stand Mixer in working order? If you have a circuit breaker box, be sure the circuit is closed. Turn off the Stand Mixer for 10-15 seconds, then turn it back on. If the Stand Mixer still does not start, allow it to cool for 30 minutes before turning it back on. Did you use the correct speed for the Pasta Roller and Cutters as suggested in the “Roller Settings Chart?” Did you attach the Pasta Roller cutter attachment properly as shown in the “Using the Pasta Roller and Cutters” section? Did you follow the usage instructions as described in the “Using the Pasta Roller and Cutters” section? Is your dough prepared according to the recipe? If the problem is not due to one of the above items, see the “Arranging for Service” section in the “Warranty”. Do not return the Pasta Roller and Cutter attachments or the Stand Mixer to the retailer, as they do not provide service. WARRANTY AND SERVICE KITCHENAID® PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS WARRANTY FOR THE 50 UNITED STATES, THE DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, PUERTO RICO, AND CANADA This warranty extends to the purchaser and any succeeding owner for Pasta Roller and Cutters operated in the 50 United States, the District of Columbia, Puerto  Rico, and Canada. Length of Warranty: One Year Full Warranty from date of purchase. KitchenAid Will Pay for Your Choice of: Hassle-Free Replacement of your Pasta Roller and Cutters. See the next page for details on how to arrange for service, or call the Customer eXperience Center toll-free at 1-800-541-6390. OR The replacement parts and repair labor costs to correct defects in materials and workmanship. Service must be provided by an Authorized KitchenAid Service Center. KitchenAid Wil Not Pay for: A. Repairs when your Pasta Roller and Cutters are used in other than normal single-family home use. B. Damage resulting from accident, alteration, misuse, or abuse. C. Any shipping or handling costs to deliver your Pasta Roller and Cutters to an Authorized Service Center.D. Replacement parts or repair labor costs for Pasta Roller and Cutters operated outside the 50 United States, District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and Canada. DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES; LIMITATION OF REMEDIES IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A  PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE EXCLUDED TO THE EXTENT LEGALLY PERMISSIBLE. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY BE IMPOSED  BY LAW ARE LIMITED TO ONE YEAR, OR THE SHORTEST PERIOD ALLOWED BY LAW. SOME STATES AND PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW  LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS LASTS, SO THE ABOVE  LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THIS PRODUCT FAILS TO WORK AS WARRANTED, THE CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SHALL BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT  ACCORDING TO THE TERMS OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. KITCHENAID AND KITCHENAID CANADA DO NOT ASSUME ANY  RESPONSIBILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state or province to province. WARRANTY AND SERVICE HASSLE-FREE REPLACEMENT WARRANTY – 50 UNITED STATES, DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, AND PUERTO RICO We’re so confident the quality of our products meets the exacting standards of KitchenAid that, if your Pasta Roller and Cutters should fail within the first year of ownership, KitchenAid will arrange to deliver an identical or comparable replacement to your door free of charge and arrange to have your original Pasta Roller and  Cutters returned to us. Your replacement unit will also be covered by our one-year limited warranty. If your Pasta Roller and Cutters should fail within the first year of ownership, simply call our toll-free Customer eXperience Center at 1-800-541-6390 Monday through Friday. Please have your original sales receipt available when you call. Proof of purchase will be required to initiate the claim. Give the consultant your complete shipping address. (No P.O. Box numbers, please.) When you receive your replacement Pasta Roller and Cutters, use the carton, packing materials, and prepaid shipping label to pack up your original Pasta Roller and Cutters and send them back to KitchenAid. HASSLE-FREE REPLACEMENT WARRANTY – CANADA We’re so confident the quality of our products meets the exacting standards of the KitchenAid brand that, if your Pasta Roller and Cutters should fail within the first year of ownership, we will replace your Pasta Roller and Cutters with an identical or comparable replacement. Your replacement unit will also be covered by our one-year limited warranty. If your Pasta Roller and Cutters should fail within the first year of ownership, simply call our toll-free Customer eXperience Center at 1-800-807-6777 Monday through Friday. Please have your original sales receipt available when you call. Proof of purchase will be required to initiate the claim.  Give the consultant your complete shipping address. When you receive your replacement Pasta Roller and Cutters, use the carton, packing materials, and prepaid shipping label to pack up your original Pasta Roller and Cutters and send them back to KitchenAid. ARRANGING FOR SERVICE AFTER THE WARRANTY EXPIRES, OR ORDERING ACCESSORIES AND REPLACEMENT PARTS In the United States and Puerto Rico: For service information, or to order accessories or replacement parts, call toll-free at 1-800-541-6390 or write to: Customer eXperience Center, KitchenAid Small Appliances, P.O. Box 218, St. Joseph, MI 49085-0218 Outside the United States and Puerto Rico: Consult your local KitchenAid dealer or the store where you purchased the Pasta Roller and Cutters for information on how to obtain service. For service information in Canada: Call toll-free 1-800-807-6777. For service information in Mexico: Call toll-free 01-800-0022-767. ®/™ © 2016 KitchenAid. All rights reserved. Used under license in Canada. DISCOVER MORE PRODUCT QUESTIONS OR RETURNS USA: 1.800.541.6390 &#124; KitchenAid.com CANADA: 1.800.807.6777 &#124; KitchenAid.ca ®/™ © 2016 KitchenAid. All rights reserved. The design of the Stand Mixer is a trademark in the U.S. and elsewhere. Used under license in Canada. [...]<p><a class="btn btn-secondary understrap-read-more-link" href="https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/pasta-roller-and-cutter/">Read More...</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>&nbsp;</p>
<p>KSMPRA, KSMPCA, KSMPSA, KSMFETPRA, KSMPDX</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/KitchenAid-Pasta-Roller-And-Cutter.webp" /></p>
<h4>PARTS AND FEATURES</h4>
<p><strong>PARTS AND ACCESSORIES</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/KitchenAid-Pasta-Roller-And-Cutter-PARTS-AND-FEATURES.webp" /></p>
<p>MODEL/ROLLER CHART<br />
Use this chart to quickly identify which rollers and/or cutters are included with your<br />
KitchenAid product.</p>
<table width="1147">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="200"><strong>MODEL #</strong></td>
<td width="716"><strong>ATTACHMENT(S) INCLUDED</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="200">KSMPRA</td>
<td width="716">Pasta roller, Spaghetti cutter, Fettucine cutter</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="200">KSMPSA</td>
<td width="716">Pasta roller</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="200">KSMPCA</td>
<td width="716">Capellini cutter, Lasagnette cutter</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="200">KSMFETPRA</td>
<td width="716">Pasta roller, Fettuccine cutter</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="200">KSMPDX</td>
<td width="716">Pasta roller, Spaghetti Cutter, Fettuccine cutter, Capellini cutter, Lasagnette cutter</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS SAFETY</h4>
<p><strong>Your safety and the safety of others are very important.</strong></p>
<p>We have provided many important safety messages in this manual and on your appliance. Always read and obey all safety messages. This is the safety alert symbol.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/WARNING-34.webp" />This symbol alerts you to potential hazards that can kill or hurt you and others. All safety messages will follow the safety alert symbol and either the word “<strong>DANGER</strong>” or “<strong>WARNING</strong>” These words mean: You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t immediately follow instructions.</p>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/WARNING-34-1.webp" /> DANGER</strong><br />
<strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/WARNING-34-2.webp" /> WARNING</strong><br />
You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t follow instructions.<br />
All safety messages will tell you what the potential hazard is, tell you how to reduce the chance of injury, and tell you what can happen if the instructions are not followed.</p>
<p>State of California Proposition 65 Warnings:<br />
<strong>WARNING</strong>: This product contains one or more chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer.<br />
<strong>WARNING</strong>: This product contains one or more chemicals known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm.</p>
<h4>IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS</h4>
<p>When using electrical appliances, basic safety precautions should always be followed, including the following:</p>
<ol>
<li>Read all instructions.</li>
<li>To protect against risk of electrical shock, do not put Stand Mixer in water or other liquid.</li>
<li>Close supervision is necessary when this or any appliance is used near children.</li>
<li>Unplug Stand Mixer from outlet when not in use, before putting on or taking off parts, and before cleaning.</li>
<li>Avoid contacting moving parts. Keep fingers out of discharge opening.</li>
<li>Do not operate the Stand Mixer with a damaged cord or plug or after the Stand Mixer malfunctions, or is dropped or damaged in any manner. Return the Stand Mixer to the nearest Authorized Service Center for examination, repair or electrical or mechanical adjustment.</li>
<li>The use of attachments not recommended or sold by KitchenAid may cause fire, electric shock or injury.</li>
<li>Do not use the Stand Mixer outdoors.<br />
PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS SAFETY<br />
<strong>PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS SAFETY</strong></li>
<li>Do not let the Stand Mixer cord hang over the edge of table or counter.</li>
<li>Do not let the Stand Mixer cord contact hot surfaces, including the stove.</li>
<li> Also see Important Safeguards included in the Stand Mixer “Instructions” manual.</li>
</ol>
<h4>SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS</h4>
<p><strong>This product is designed for household use only.</strong><br />
USING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS<br />
SPEED SETTINGS CHART</p>
<table width="1297">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="178"><strong>ATTACHMENT</strong></td>
<td width="178"><strong>SPEED</strong></td>
<td width="178"><strong>NOODLE WIDTH</strong></td>
<td width="178"><strong>SUGGESTED USES</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="178">PASTA ROLLER<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/KitchenAid-Pasta-Roller-And-Cutter-SPEED-SETTINGS-CHART-1.webp" /></td>
<td width="178">2</td>
<td width="178">up to 140 mm</td>
<td width="178">See roller settings chart</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="178">LASAGNETTE CUTTER</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/KitchenAid-Pasta-Roller-And-Cutter-SPEED-SETTINGS-CHART-2.webp" /></td>
<td width="178">3</td>
<td width="178">12 mm</td>
<td width="178">Thick Noodles</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="178">FETTUCCINE CUTTER</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/KitchenAid-Pasta-Roller-And-Cutter-SPEED-SETTINGS-CHART-3.webp" /></td>
<td width="178">5</td>
<td width="178">6.5 mm</td>
<td width="178">Egg Noodles Fettuccine</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="178">SPAGHETTI CUTTER</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/KitchenAid-Pasta-Roller-And-Cutter-SPEED-SETTINGS-CHART-4.webp" /></td>
<td width="178">7</td>
<td width="178">2 mm</td>
<td width="178">Spaghetti<br />
Thin Fettuccine<br />
Linguine Fini</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="178">CAPELLINI CUTTER</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/KitchenAid-Pasta-Roller-And-Cutter-SPEED-SETTINGS-CHART-5.webp" /></td>
<td width="178">7</td>
<td width="178">1.5 mm</td>
<td width="178">Very Thin Angel<br />
Hair-Type Pasta<br />
Capellini<br />
Very Fine Linguine</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>FOR DETAILED INFORMATION ON USING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS:<br />
Visit <a href="http://kitchenaid.com/quickstart" target="_blank" rel="noopener">kitchenaid.com/quickstart</a> for additional Instructions with videos, inspiring recipes, and tips on how to use your Pasta Roller and Cutters.</p>
<h4>USING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS</h4>
<p>ROLLER SETTINGS CHART</p>
<table width="1339">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="223">ATTACHMENT</td>
<td width="147">ROLLERSETTING</td>
<td width="545">SUGGESTED USES</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="6" width="223">PASTA ROLLER</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/KitchenAid-Pasta-Roller-And-Cutter-USING-THE-PASTA-ROLLER-AND-CUTTERS.webp" /></td>
<td width="147">1 or 2</td>
<td width="545">Kneading and thinning dough</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="147">3</td>
<td width="545">Thick “kluski”-type noodles</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="147">4</td>
<td width="545">Egg noodles</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="147">4 or 5</td>
<td width="545">Lasagna noodles, fettuccine, spaghetti, and ravioli</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="147">6 or 7</td>
<td width="545">Tortellini, thin fettuccine, and linguini fini</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="147">7 or 8</td>
<td width="545">Very thin “angel-hair”-type pasta/capellini or very fine linguine</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>ATTACHING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS</strong></p>
<p><strong>Before first use</strong><br />
To avoid damage, do not wash or immerse attachments in water or other liquid. Do not wash in the dishwasher.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: These attachments are designed to be used with pasta dough only. To avoid damaging your Pasta Roller, do not cut or roll anything other than pasta.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/KitchenAid-Pasta-Roller-And-Cutter-ATTACHING-THE-PASTA-ROLLER-AND-CUTTERS.webp" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/KitchenAid-Pasta-Roller-And-Cutter-ATTACHING-THE-PASTA-ROLLER-AND-CUTTERS-1.webp" /></p>
<h4>USING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS</h4>
<p><strong>MAKING PASTA</strong></p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT</strong>: When using the Pasta Roller and Cutters, do not wear ties, scarves, loose clothing or long necklaces; gather long hair with a clasp</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/KitchenAid-Pasta-Roller-And-Cutter-Cutter-USING-THE-PASTA-ROLLER-AND-CUTTERS-2.webp" /></p>
<p>USING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS</p>
<h4>USING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/KitchenAid-Pasta-Roller-And-Cutter-USING-THE-PASTA-ROLLER-AND-CUTTERS-3.webp" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/KitchenAid-Pasta-Roller-And-Cutter-USING-THE-PASTA-ROLLER-AND-CUTTERS-4.webp" /></p>
<p>FOR DETAILED INFORMATION ON USING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS:<br />
Visit <a href="http://kitchenaid.com/quickstart" target="_blank" rel="noopener">kitchenaid.com/quickstart</a> for additional Instructions with videos, inspiring recipes, and tips on how to use your Pasta Roller and Cutters.</p>
<p><strong>DISASSEMBLING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/KitchenAid-Pasta-Roller-And-Cutter-USING-THE-PASTA-ROLLER-AND-CUTTERS-5.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT</strong>: After removing the Pasta Roller or Cutter from the Stand Mixer, be sure to clean any dried dough. See “Care and Cleaning” for details.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/KitchenAid-Pasta-Roller-And-Cutter-USING-THE-PASTA-ROLLER-AND-CUTTERS-6.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: Allow Stand Mixer to rest for at least 1 hour after extruding 2 consecutive pasta dough recipes.</p>
<h4>RECIPE</h4>
<p><strong>COOKING PASTA</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/WARNING-34-3.webp" /><strong>WARNING</strong></p>
<p>Food Poisoning Hazard Do not let foods that contain perishable ingredients such as eggs, dairy products, and meats remain unrefrigerated for more than one hour. Doing so can result in food poisoning or sickness.</p>
<p>Add 2 tsp (10 mL) salt and 1 tbs. (15 mL) oil (optional) to 6 qt (5.7 L) boiling water. Gradually add pasta and continue to cook at a boil until pasta is “al dente” or slightly firm to the bite. Pasta floats to the top of the water while cooking so stirs occasionally to keep it cooking evenly. Use a colander to drain.</p>
<p>Dry Pasta — 7 minutes</p>
<p>Fresh Pasta — 2-5 minutes, depending on noodle thickness.</p>
<p><strong>BASIC EGG NOODLE PASTA</strong></p>
<p>4 large eggs<br />
3½ cups (830 mL) sifted all-purpose flour<br />
1 tbs (15 mL) water<br />
1 tsp (2 mL) salt</p>
<p>Break eggs into a glass measuring cup. Check to see that the eggs measure 7/8 cup (207 mL). If less than 7/8 cup (207 mL), add water, 1 tsp (2 mL) at a time until the measurement is reached.</p>
<p>Place flour and salt in the Stand Mixer bowl. Attach bowl and flat beater. Turn to Speed 2 and gradually add eggs and 1 tbs (15 mL) water. Mix for 30 seconds. Stop the  Stand Mixer and exchange the flat beater for the dough hook. Turn to Speed 2 and knead for 2 minutes.</p>
<p>Let dough rest for 20 minutes. Divide dough into 4 pieces before processing with Pasta Roller attachment. Follow the cooking instructions above. Yield: About 1 ¼ pound (579 g) dough</p>
<p><strong>FOR MORE RECIPES WITH THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS:</strong><br />
Visit <a href="http://kitchenaid.com/quickstart" target="_blank" rel="noopener">kitchenaid.com/quickstart</a> for additional Instructions with videos, inspiring recipes, and tips on how to use your Pasta Roller and Cutters.</p>
<h4>CARE AND CLEANING</h4>
<p><strong>CLEANING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS</strong><br />
These accessories are designed to be used with pasta dough only. To avoid damaging your Pasta rollers and Cutters, do not insert anything other than pasta dough.<br />
<strong>IMPORTANT</strong>: Do not use metal objects to clean out the Pasta Roller and Cutters. Do not wash the Pasta Roller and Cutters in the dishwasher, or immerse in water or other liquids.<br />
The Pasta Roller and Cutters should be hand washed.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/KitchenAid-Pasta-Roller-And-Cutter-USING-THE-PASTA-ROLLER-AND-CUTTERS-5.webp" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/KitchenAid-Pasta-Roller-And-Cutter-0.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: Never use a knife or any other sharp object to remove excess dough.<br />
Do not run a dish towel or any other cloth through the rollers to clean them.</p>
<p><strong>FOR DETAILED INFORMATION ON CLEANING THE PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS:</strong><br />
Visit <a href="http://kitchenaid.com/quickstart" target="_blank" rel="noopener">kitchenaid.com/quickstart</a> for additional Instructions with videos, inspiring recipes, and tips on how to use your Pasta Roller and Cutters.</p>
<p>CARE AND CLEANING</p>
<h4>CARE AND CLEANING</h4>
<p><strong>MAINTENANCE</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/KitchenAid-Pasta-Roller-And-Cutter-CARE-AND-CLEANING.webp" /></p>
<h4>TROUBLESHOOTING</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/WARNING-34-3.webp" /><strong>WARNING</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/DANGER-2-1.webp" /></p>
<p>Electrical Shock Hazard<br />
Plug into a grounded 3 prong outlet.<br />
Do not remove the ground prong. Do not use an adapter. Do not use an extension cord.<br />
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, fire, or electrical shock.</p>
<p>If your Stand Mixer should malfunction or fail to operate while using the Pasta Roller and Cutter attachment, please check the following:</p>
<ol>
<li>Is the Stand Mixer plugged in?</li>
<li>Is the fuse in the circuit to the Stand Mixer in working order? If you have a circuit breaker box, be sure the circuit is closed.</li>
<li>Turn off the Stand Mixer for 10-15 seconds, then turn it back on. If the Stand Mixer still does not start, allow it to cool for 30 minutes before turning it back on.</li>
<li>Did you use the correct speed for the Pasta Roller and Cutters as suggested in the “Roller Settings Chart?”</li>
<li>Did you attach the Pasta Roller cutter attachment properly as shown in the “Using the Pasta Roller and Cutters” section?</li>
<li>Did you follow the usage instructions as described in the “Using the Pasta Roller and Cutters” section?</li>
<li>Is your dough prepared according to the recipe?</li>
</ol>
<p>If the problem is not due to one of the above items, see the “Arranging for Service” section in the “Warranty”.<br />
Do not return the Pasta Roller and Cutter attachments or the Stand Mixer to the retailer, as they do not provide service.</p>
<h4>WARRANTY AND SERVICE</h4>
<p>KITCHENAID® PASTA ROLLER AND CUTTERS WARRANTY<br />
FOR THE 50 UNITED STATES, THE DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA,<br />
PUERTO RICO, AND CANADA<br />
This warranty extends to the purchaser and any succeeding owner for Pasta Roller and Cutters operated in the 50 United States, the District of Columbia, Puerto  Rico, and Canada.</p>
<table width="1330">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="162"><strong>Length of Warranty:</strong></td>
<td width="515"><strong>One Year Full Warranty from date of purchase.</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="162">KitchenAid Will Pay for Your Choice of:</td>
<td width="515">Hassle-Free Replacement of your Pasta Roller and Cutters. See the next page for details on how to arrange for service, or call the Customer eXperience Center toll-free at 1-800-541-6390. OR<br />
The replacement parts and repair labor costs to correct defects in materials and workmanship. Service must be provided by an Authorized KitchenAid Service Center.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="162">KitchenAid Wil Not Pay for:</td>
<td width="515">A. Repairs when your Pasta Roller and Cutters are used in other than normal single-family home use.<br />
B. Damage resulting from accident, alteration, misuse, or abuse.<br />
C. Any shipping or handling costs to deliver your Pasta Roller and Cutters to an Authorized Service Center.D. Replacement parts or repair labor costs for Pasta Roller and Cutters operated outside the 50 United<br />
States, District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and Canada.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES; LIMITATION OF REMEDIES</strong><br />
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A  PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE EXCLUDED TO THE EXTENT LEGALLY PERMISSIBLE. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY BE IMPOSED  BY LAW ARE LIMITED TO ONE YEAR, OR THE SHORTEST PERIOD ALLOWED BY LAW. SOME STATES AND PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW  LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS LASTS, SO THE ABOVE  LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.</p>
<p>IF THIS PRODUCT FAILS TO WORK AS WARRANTED, THE CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SHALL BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT  ACCORDING TO THE TERMS OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. KITCHENAID AND KITCHENAID CANADA DO NOT ASSUME ANY  RESPONSIBILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state or province to province.</p>
<p><strong>WARRANTY AND SERVICE</strong><br />
HASSLE-FREE REPLACEMENT WARRANTY – 50 UNITED STATES,<br />
DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, AND PUERTO RICO</p>
<p>We’re so confident the quality of our products meets the exacting standards of KitchenAid that, if your Pasta Roller and Cutters should fail within the first year of ownership, KitchenAid will arrange to deliver an identical or comparable replacement to your door free of charge and arrange to have your original Pasta Roller and  Cutters returned to us. Your replacement unit will also be covered by our one-year limited warranty. If your Pasta Roller and Cutters should fail within the first year of ownership, simply call</p>
<p>our toll-free Customer eXperience Center at 1-800-541-6390 Monday through Friday. Please have your original sales receipt available when you call. Proof of purchase will be required to initiate the claim. Give the consultant your complete shipping address. (No P.O. Box numbers, please.) When you receive your replacement Pasta Roller and Cutters, use the carton, packing materials, and prepaid shipping label to pack up your original Pasta Roller and Cutters and send them back to KitchenAid.</p>
<p><strong>HASSLE-FREE REPLACEMENT WARRANTY – CANADA</strong></p>
<p>We’re so confident the quality of our products meets the exacting standards of the KitchenAid brand that, if your Pasta Roller and Cutters should fail within the first year of ownership, we will replace your Pasta Roller and Cutters with an identical or comparable replacement. Your replacement unit will also be covered by our one-year limited warranty.</p>
<p>If your Pasta Roller and Cutters should fail within the first year of ownership, simply call our toll-free Customer eXperience Center</p>
<p>at 1-800-807-6777 Monday through Friday. Please have your original sales receipt available when you call. Proof of purchase will be required to initiate the claim.  Give the consultant your complete shipping address.</p>
<p>When you receive your replacement Pasta Roller and Cutters, use the carton, packing materials, and prepaid shipping label to pack up your original Pasta Roller and<br />
Cutters and send them back to KitchenAid.</p>
<p>ARRANGING FOR SERVICE AFTER THE WARRANTY EXPIRES, OR ORDERING ACCESSORIES AND REPLACEMENT PARTS</p>
<p>In the United States and Puerto Rico: For service information, or to order accessories or replacement parts, call toll-free at 1-800-541-6390 or write to:</p>
<p>Customer eXperience Center, KitchenAid Small Appliances, P.O. Box 218, St. Joseph, MI 49085-0218</p>
<p>Outside the United States and<br />
Puerto Rico:<br />
Consult your local KitchenAid dealer or the store where you purchased the Pasta Roller and Cutters for information on how to obtain service.<br />
<strong>For service information in Canada:</strong><br />
Call toll-free <strong>1-800-807-6777.</strong><br />
<strong>For service information in Mexico:</strong><br />
Call toll-free <strong>01-800-0022-767.</strong></p>
<p>®/™ © 2016 KitchenAid. All rights reserved. Used under license in Canada.</p>
<p>DISCOVER MORE</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Icon-2.webp" />PRODUCT QUESTIONS OR RETURNS</p>
<p>USA: 1.800.541.6390 | KitchenAid.com<br />
CANADA: 1.800.807.6777 | KitchenAid.ca</p>
<p>®/™ © 2016 KitchenAid. All rights reserved. The design of the Stand Mixer is a trademark in the U.S. and elsewhere. Used under license in Canada.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Icon-1-4.webp" /></p>
<form id="commentform" class="comment-form" action="https://manuals.plus/wp-comments-post.php" method="post" novalidate="">
<p class="form-submit">
</form>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>KitchenAid Dishwasher KDTE304LPA Manual</title>
		<link>https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/kdte304lpa-dishwasher/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[ItsManual]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Tue, 22 Nov 2022 10:58:07 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[KitchenAid]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://usemanuals.com/?p=3930</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[KitchenAid Dishwasher KDTE304LPA KitchenAid Dishwasher LEARN MORE In an effort to conserve natural resources, this dishwasher includes a condensed User Guide. Complete User Instructions can be downloaded at                                         www.kitchenaid.com/customer-service/manuals. For future reference, please make a note of your product model and serial numbers. These can be located on a label in the tub along the left outer edge. Model Number________________________________                                                       Serial Number______________________________________ Register your dishwasher at www.kitchenaid.com. In Canada, register your dishwasher at www.kitchenaid.ca. Your safety and the safety of others are very important.                                                       We have provided many important safety messages in this manual and on your appliance. Always read and obey all safety messages. This is the safety alert symbol. This symbol alerts you to potential hazards that can kill or hurt you and others. All safety messages will follow the safety alert symbol and either the word “DANGER” or “WARNING.”These words mean: DANGER: You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t immediately follow instructions. You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t follow instructions. All safety messages will tell you what the potential hazard is, tell you how to reduce the chance of injury, and tell you what can happen if the instructions are not followed. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WARNING: When using the dishwasher, follow basic precautions, including the following: Read all instructions before using the dishwasher. Use the dishwasher only for its intended function. Use only detergents or rinse agents recommended for use in a dishwasher, and keep them out of the reach of children. When loading items to be washed: Locate sharp items so that they are not likely to damage the door seal. Load sharp knives with the handles up to reduce the risk of cut-type injuries. Do not wash plastic items unless they are marked “dishwasher safe” or the equivalent. For plastic items not so marked, check the manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not touch the heating element during or immediately after use. Do not operate the dishwasher unless all enclosure panels are properly in place. Do not tamper with controls. Do not abuse, sit on, or stand on the door, lid, or dish racks of the dishwasher. To reduce the risk of injury, do not allow children to play in or on the dishwasher. Under certain conditions, hydrogen gas may be produced in a hot water system that has not been used for two weeks or more. HYDROGEN GAS IS EXPLOSIVE. If the hot water system has not been used for such a period, before using the dishwasher turn on all hot water faucets and let the water flow from each for several minutes. This will release any accumulated hydrogen gas. As the gas is flammable, do not smoke or use an open flame during this time. Remove the door or lid to the washing compartment when removing an old dishwasher from service or discarding it. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS State of California Proposition 65 Warnings:                                                                         WARNING: This product contains one or more chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer.                                                                                                                     WARNING: This product contains one or more chemicals known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. WARNING Tip Over Hazard Do not use dishwasher until completely installed. Do not push down on open door. Doing so can result in serious injury or cuts. GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS For a grounded, cord-connected dishwasher:                                                                    The dishwasher must be grounded. In the event of a malfunction or breakdown, grounding will reduce the risk of electric shock by providing a path of least resistance for electric current. The dishwasher is equipped with a cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet that is installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances.                               WARNING: Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician or service representative if you are in doubt whether the dishwasher is properly grounded. Do not modify the plug provided with the dishwasher; if it will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. For a permanently connected dishwasher:The dishwasher must be connected to a grounded metal, permanent wiring system, or an equipment-grounding conductor must be run with the circuit conductors and connected to the equipment-grounding terminal or lead on the dishwasher. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS KEY USAGE TIPS Filtration system and maintenance Your dishwasher has the latest technology in dishwasher filtration. This filtration system minimizes sound and optimizes water and energy conservation while providing superior cleaning. The filter system consists of two parts, an upper filter assembly and lower filter. IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to dishwasher, do not operate your dishwasher without filters properly installed. Be sure lower filter is securely in place and upper filter assembly is locked into place. If upper assembly turns freely, it is not locked into place. The filters may need to be cleaned when: Visible objects or soils are on upper filter assembly. Dishes feel gritty to the touch. See the “Filtration System” section in the full online User Instructions for complete removal and maintenance schedule. Drying – Rinse aid is essential You must use a drying agent such as a rinse aid for good drying performance. Rinse aid along with the Heat Dry, Extended Heat Dry option will provide best drying and avoid excessive moisture in dishwasher interior. Energy efficiency Energy efficiency is gained by extending cycle time and reducing the amount of wattage and water used during your dishwasher’s cycle. For exceptional cleaning, cycles are longer due to the soak and pauses. Efficient dishwashers run longer to save water and energy, just as driving a car slower saves on gas. Your first cycle will run longer to calibrate the optical water sensor. Premium Top Rack Adjuster You can raise or lower the top rack to fit tall items in either the top or bottom rack. Adjusters are located on each side of the top rack. To raise the rack: Press both rack adjuster thumb levers and lift the rack until it is in the up position and level. To lower the rack: Press both rack adjuster thumb levers and slide the rack to its down position and level. NOTE: The top rack must be level. Touch START/RESUME every time you add a dish IMPORTANT: If anyone opens the door (such as, for adding a dish, even during the Delay option), Start/Resume must be touched each time to resume the cycle. Push the door firmly closed within 4 seconds of touching Start/Resume. If the door is not closed within 4 seconds, the Start keypad light will flash, an audible tone will be heard, and the cycle will not start. OPERATING YOUR DISHWASHER Prepare and load the dishwasher IMPORTANT: Remove leftover food, bones, toothpicks, and other hard items from dishes. Remove labels from containers before washing. Make sure when the dishwasher door is closed no items are blocking detergent dispenser. Items should be loaded with soiled surfaces facing down and inward to the spray as shown in the graphics above. This will improve cleaning and drying results. Angle dirtiest dish surface downward, allowing space for water to flow up through rack and between dishes. Avoid overlapping items, like bowls or plates that may trap food. Place plastics, small plates, and glasses in upper rack. Wash only items marked “dishwasher safe.” To avoid thumping/clattering noises during operation, load dishes so they do not touch one another. Make sure lightweight load items are secured in racks. Use the slots in the covers and suggested loading patterns to keep your silverware separated for optimum wash. If your silverware does not fit into the designated slots, lift and slide covers off to remove them and mix silverware types to keep them separated. When loading silverware, always place sharp items pointing down and avoid “nesting” as shown. 2. Check that all arms spin freely Items in the rack can block the spray arms. 3. Add detergent Premeasured Detergents High-quality premeasured tablets and packs are recommended for improved performance. Quality tablets and packs have been proven better than powder, liquid, or gel detergents at reducing filming on dishes. Using tablets and packs over time will start to reduce or eliminate white film. They are suitable for all water hardness and soil levels. Also, by using a rinse aid, you can minimize repeat buildup of white film (not all packs and tablets contain rinse aid). Always place premeasured detergents in main compartment and close lid. NOTE: Follow instructions on the package when using other dishwasher detergent types. See the complete User Instructions for more details about powders, liquids, and gels. Use automatic dishwasher detergent only. Add detergent just before starting a cycle. Fresh automatic dishwasher detergent results in better cleaning. Store tightly closed detergent container in a cool, dry place. 4. Add rinse aid Your dishwasher is designed to use rinse aid for good drying performance. Without rinse aid, your dishes and dishwasher interior will have excessive moisture. The heating and drying options will not perform as well without rinse aid. Rinse aid keeps water from forming droplets that can dry as spots or streaks. It also improves drying by allowing water to drain off of dishes after final rinse. Rinse aid does not adhere to dishware, and when used, it is dispensed during each cycle. To add rinse aid, open the dispenser lid by gently pushing in the center of the lid with your thumb while lifting up on the edge. Pour rinse aid into the opening until the indicator level shows that it is full. Close dispenser by pushing down gently on the lid. NOTE: For most water conditions, the factory setting will give good results. If you are experiencing poor drying performance, try a higher setting. Turn the arrow adjuster to the next higher number to increase the amount of rinse aid. 5. Select a cycle Efficient dishwashers run longer to save water and energy, just as driving a car slower saves on gas. Typical cycle time is approximately 21/2 hours but can take less or more time to complete depending on selections. Push door firmly closed and touch START to repeat the same cycle and options as in the previous wash cycle, or select another cycle appropriate for your load. See the Cycle Guide. 6. Select options You can customize your cycles by selecting the options desired. See the Cycle Guide. If you change your mind, touch the option keypad again to turn off the option. Not all options are available for every cycle. If an invalid option is selected for a given cycle, the lights will flash. Adding options may increase the cycle time. 7. Start or resume a cycle NOTE: If needed, run hot water at the sink nearest your dishwasher until water is hot. Turn off water. With door firmly closed, touch START. IMPORTANT: If the door is opened for more than a few seconds after the cycle is started (even during the Delay time), the Start keypad must be touched again after the door is closed. If Start keypad is not touched, the Start keypad light with flash, and audible tone will be heard, and cycle will not resume. 8. Follow the progress of your dishwasher The display will indicate cycle progress such as Washing, Drying, Clean, and Sanitized. The cycle has completed when the Clean light is lit. Refer to the Control chart in the Cycle Guide section for operation of the Sanitized indicator. CYCLE GUIDE IMPORTANT: The sensor in your dishwasher monitors the soil level. Cycle time and/or water usage can vary as the sensor adjusts the cycle for the best wash performance. If the incoming water is less than the recommended temperature or food soils are heavy, the cycle will automatically compensate by adding time, heat, and water as needed. *The government energy certifications are not based on this cycle. See the Normal cycle description for the government energy certification cycle. Using the ProWash™ cycle may increase your energy usage. **No other washing and drying temperature options were selected, and the dishwasher was not subjected to truncated testing. Rinse aid was not used, and there was no detergent used in the prewash. DISHWASHER CARE Cleaning the Exterior Clean the exterior of the dishwasher with only a soft, damp cloth, and mild detergent. If your dishwasher has a stainless steel exterior, it may have a coating that is resistant to fingerprints. Avoid using abrasive cleaning products on the exterior of the dishwasher. Cleaning and Maintaining the Interior Many detergents may leave white spots or a white residue on dishware and on the interior of the dishwasher. Over time this residue can become unsightly and could affect dishwasher performance. Use of a dishwasher cleaning product, such as affresh® Dishwasher Cleaner, can help to remove the residue. Monthly use of affresh® Dishwasher Cleaner is recommended to help maintain the dishwasher. Follow package directions. NOTE: KitchenAid recommends the use of high-quality, premeasured detergent tablets or packs and the use of rinse aid for dishwasher cleaning and daily care. If you have a drain air gap, check and clean it if the dishwasher isn’t draining well. To Reduce Risk of Property Damage During Vacation or Extended Time Without Use: When you will not be using the dishwasher during the summer months, turn off the water and power supply to the dishwasher. Make sure the water supply lines are protected against freezing conditions. Ice formations in the supply lines can increase water pressure and cause damage to your dishwasher or home. Damage from freezing is not covered by the warranty. When storing your dishwasher in the winter, avoid water damage by having your dishwasher winterized by authorized service personnel. TROUBLESHOOTING First try the solutions suggested here. If you need further assistance or more recommendations that may help you to avoid a service call, refer to the warranty page in this manual or visit producthelp.kitchenaid.com. In Canada, visit kitchenaid.ca. For internet connectivity questions, in the U.S.A. or Canada, call 1-877-559-2603. Contact us by mail with any questions or concerns at the address below: In the U.S.A.: KitchenAid Brand Home Appliances Customer eXperience Center 553 Benson Road Benton Harbor, MI 49022-2692 In Canada: KitchenAid Brand Home Appliances Customer eXperience Centre 200 – 6750 Century Ave. Mississauga, Ontario L5N 0B7 Please include a daytime phone number in your correspondence. IF YOU NEED SERVICE: Before contacting us to arrange service, please determine whether your product requires repair. Some questions can be addressed without service. Please take a few minutes to review the Troubleshooting section of the Use and Care Guide or visit producthelp.kitchenaid.com. All warranty service is provided exclusively by our authorized KitchenAid Service Providers. In the U.S. and Canada, direct all requests for warranty service to: KitchenAid Customer eXperience Center                                                                                  In the U.S.A., call 1-800-422-1230. In Canada, call 1-800-807-6777.                                               If outside the 50 United States or Canada, contact your authorized KitchenAid dealer to determine whether another warranty applies. LIFETIME LIMITED WARRANTY WHAT IS COVERED FIRST YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY (PARTS AND LABOR)                                                For one year from the date of purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated, and maintained according to instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid brand of Whirlpool Corporation or Whirlpool Canada LP (hereafter “KitchenAid”) will pay for factory specified replacement parts and repair labor to correct defects in materials or workmanship that existed when this major appliance was purchased or, at its sole discretion, replace the product. In the event of product replacement, your appliance will be warranted for the remaining term of the original unit’s warranty period. SECOND THROUGH FIFTH YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY (CERTAIN COMPONENT PARTS ONLY – LABOR NOT INCLUDED)In the second through fifth years from the date of original purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated, and maintained according to instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid will pay for factory specified replacement parts for the following components to correct non-cosmetic defects in materials or workmanship in these parts that prevent function of this major appliance and that existed when this major appliance was purchased. This is a limited five year warranty on the below named parts only and does not include repair labor. Nylon dish racks Electronic controls LIFETIME LIMITED WARRANTY (STAINLESS STEEL TUB  AND INNER DOOR LINER ONLY) For the lifetime of the product from the date of original purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated, and maintained according to instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid will pay for factory specified replacement parts and repair labor for the following components to correct non-cosmetic defects in materials or workmanship that existed when this major appliance was purchased: Stainless steel tub Inner door liner YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE PRODUCT REPAIR AS PROVIDED HEREIN. Service must be provided by a KitchenAid designated service company. This limited warranty is valid only in the United States or Canada and applies only when the major appliance is used in the country in which it was purchased. This limited warranty is effective from the date of original consumer purchase. Proof of original purchase date is required to obtain service under this limited warranty. WHAT IS NOT COVERED Commercial, non-residential, multiple-family use, or use inconsistent with published user, operator, or installation instructions. In-home instruction on how to use your product. Service to correct improper product maintenance or installation, installation not in accordance with electrical or plumbing codes, or correction of household electrical or plumbing (e.g., house wiring, fuses, or water inlet hoses). Consumable parts (e.g., light bulbs, batteries, air or water filters, preservation solutions). Defects or damage caused by the use of non-genuine KitchenAid parts or accessories. Damage from accident, misuse, abuse, fire, floods, acts of God, or use with products not approved by KItchenAid. Repairs to parts or systems to correct product damage or defects caused by unauthorized service, alteration, or modification of the appliance. Cosmetic damage including scratches, dents, chips, and other damage to the appliance finishes, unless such damage results from defects in materials and workmanship and is reported to KitchenAid within 30 days. Discoloration, rust, or oxidation of surfaces resulting from caustic or corrosive environments including, but not limited to, high salt concentrations, high moisture or humidity, or exposure to chemicals. Pickup or delivery. This product is intended for in-home repair. Travel or transportation expenses for service in remote locations where an authorized KitchenAid servicer is not available. Removal or reinstallation of inaccessible appliances or built-in fixtures (e.g., trim, decorative panels, flooring, cabinetry, islands, countertops, drywall) that interfere with servicing, removal, or replacement of the product. Service or parts for appliances with original model/serial numbers removed, altered, or not easily determined. The cost of repair or replacement under these excluded circumstances shall be borne by the customer. DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO FIVE YEARS OR THE SHORTEST PERIOD ALLOWED BY LAW. Some states and provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of implied warranties of merchantability or fitness, so this limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province. DISCLAIMER OF REPRESENTATIONS OUTSIDE OF WARRANTY KitchenAid makes no representations about the quality, durability, or need for service or repair of this major appliance other than the representations contained in this warranty. If you want a longer or more comprehensive warranty than the limited warranty that comes with this major appliance, you should ask KitchenAid or your retailer about buying an extended warranty. LIMITATION OF REMEDIES: EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE PRODUCT REPAIR AS PROVIDED HEREIN. KITCHENAID SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states and provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province. FAQ’S Is Bosch the same as KitchenAid? KitchenAid and Bosch dishwashers are both excellent and offer good value for the money. But aside from similarities in the wash cycle options and their stainless steel interiors, Bosch dishwashers edge out KitchenAid in design, functionality, cleaning performance, reliability, and even price. Is there a reset on a KitchenAid dishwasher? To reset the dishwasher control panel, it needs to be disconnected from the power source for one minute. If your dishwasher is plugged into an outlet, simply unplug the unit for one minute and then plug the unit back in. How do I run a diagnostic on my KitchenAid dishwasher? To invoke a Diagnostics Cycle, press the “Heated Dry” key followed by the “Normal” key then again the “Heated Dry” key and finally “Normal” key, once more. Ensure your machine is in standby mode while doing it (and press the keys rapidly). Where is the reset button on a KitchenAid dishwasher? You can reset it by pressing two buttons on the front of the dishwasher at least five times each for a grand total of ten presses. The dishwasher door must be fully closed while the buttons are both pressed. Why won’t my KitchenAid dishwasher clean the dishes? Loading issues are one of the most common reasons a KitchenAid dishwasher leaves dishes dirty. Overcrowding the racks restricts access to water and detergent so dishes don’t get clean. Allowing items to block the spray arms or detergent dispenser can further limit water and detergent access. Why is the Clean light blinking on my KitchenAid dishwasher? It is normal for the Clean light to stay on after the cycle is complete. The Clean light is an indication that the dishwasher has been run and the dishes inside it are clean. Once the door is opened after the cycle is complete, the light will shut off. Do all KitchenAid dishwashers have filters? Most all automatic dishwashers KitchenAid included come with a filter system inside the dishwasher to catch any food debris before it has a chance to clog your drains. The filter is in the bottom center of the dishwasher beneath the bottom rack and requires periodic cleaning to ensure free flow of the drain. How do I clean the filter in my KitchenAid dishwasher? Under the locating tabs in the bottom of the dishwasher. Insert. The upper filter assembly into the circular opening in the lower filter slowly rotate the upper filter assembly clockwise. Where is the dishwasher filter? The dishwasher filter is at the bottom of your dishwasher, under the bottom rack. To find it, pull out the bottom dish rack, then look for the filter it’s usually either in one of the back corners of the dishwasher tub or around the base of the bottom spray arm. Why is my dishwasher not draining? It’s likely the result of a full garbage disposal that won’t allow the drain water to enter from the machine, so it backs up in the bottom of the dishwasher. Barring that, the problem is probably a kink in the drain hose, or a clog in the hose, the drain, or the air gap. What is the best setting for dishwasher? A Normal cycle doesn’t use extra water, longer cleaning times, or hotter temperatures, making it ideal for dishes and glassware without excessive soiling. Overall, this is the best dishwasher cycle to use for dishes that have an average amount of daily dirt and grime Is it OK to use Quick wash on dishwasher? Uses your dishwasher’s full power to get lightly soiled dishes clean in about half the time. Depending on your dishwasher, a Quick Wash cycle can take anywhere from 20 minutes, to about an hour. [...]<p><a class="btn btn-secondary understrap-read-more-link" href="https://usemanuals.com/kitchenaid/kdte304lpa-dishwasher/">Read More...</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/KitchenAid-logo.png" /></p>
<h3>KitchenAid Dishwasher KDTE304LPA</h3>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/KitchenAid-Dishwasher-product.jpg" /></p>
<p>KitchenAid Dishwasher</p>
<p><strong>LEARN MORE</strong><br />
In an effort to conserve natural resources, this dishwasher includes a condensed User Guide. Complete User Instructions can be downloaded at                                         <a href="https://www.kitchenaid.com/service-and-support/manuals.html" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.com/customer-service/manuals</a>.</p>
<p>For future reference, please make a note of your product model and serial numbers. These can be located on a label in the tub along the left outer edge.</p>
<p>Model Number________________________________                                                       Serial Number______________________________________</p>
<p>Register your dishwasher at <a href="https://www.kitchenaid.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.com</a>. In Canada, register your dishwasher at <a href="https://www.kitchenaid.ca/en_ca.html" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.kitchenaid.ca</a>.</p>
<p><strong>Your safety and the safety of others are very important.                                                       </strong>We have provided many important safety messages in this manual and on your appliance. Always read and obey all safety messages.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Caution-1.jpg" /> This is the safety alert symbol. This symbol alerts you to potential hazards that can kill or hurt you and others. All safety messages will follow the safety alert symbol and either the word “DANGER” or “WARNING.”These words mean:</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Caution-1.jpg" /></p>
<p><strong>DANGER: You</strong> can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t immediately follow instructions.<strong><br />
</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Caution-1.jpg" /></p>
<p>You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t follow instructions. All safety messages will tell you what the potential hazard is, tell you how to reduce the chance of injury, and tell you what can happen if the instructions are not followed.</p>
<h3>IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS</h3>
<p><strong>WARNING:</strong> When using the dishwasher, follow basic precautions, including the following:</p>
<ul>
<li>Read all instructions before using the dishwasher.</li>
<li>Use the dishwasher only for its intended function.</li>
<li>Use only detergents or rinse agents recommended for use in a dishwasher, and keep them out of the reach of children.</li>
<li>When loading items to be washed:
<ul>
<li>Locate sharp items so that they are not likely to damage the door seal.</li>
<li>Load sharp knives with the handles up to reduce the risk of cut-type injuries.</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Do not wash plastic items unless they are marked “dishwasher safe” or the equivalent. For plastic items not so marked, check the manufacturer’s recommendations.</li>
<li>Do not touch the heating element during or immediately after use.</li>
<li>Do not operate the dishwasher unless all enclosure panels are properly in place.</li>
<li>Do not tamper with controls.</li>
<li>Do not abuse, sit on, or stand on the door, lid, or dish racks of the dishwasher.</li>
<li>To reduce the risk of injury, do not allow children to play in or on the dishwasher.</li>
<li>Under certain conditions, hydrogen gas may be produced in a hot water system that has not been used for two weeks or more. HYDROGEN GAS IS EXPLOSIVE. If the hot water system has not been used for such a period, before using the dishwasher turn on all hot water faucets and let the water flow from each for several minutes.</li>
<li>This will release any accumulated hydrogen gas. As the gas is flammable, do not smoke or use an open flame during this time.</li>
<li>Remove the door or lid to the washing compartment when removing an old dishwasher from service or discarding it.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS</strong></p>
<p>State of California Proposition 65 Warnings:                                                                         <strong>WARNING:</strong> This product contains one or more chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer.                                                                                                                     <strong>WARNING:</strong> This product contains one or more chemicals known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Caution-1.jpg" /><strong>WARNING</strong></p>
<p>Tip Over Hazard</p>
<ul>
<li>Do not use dishwasher until completely installed.</li>
<li>Do not push down on open door.</li>
<li>Doing so can result in serious injury or cuts.</li>
</ul>
<h3>GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS</h3>
<ul>
<li><strong>For a grounded, cord-connected dishwasher:   </strong>                                                                 The dishwasher must be grounded. In the event of a malfunction or breakdown, grounding will reduce the risk of electric shock by providing a path of least resistance for electric current. The dishwasher is equipped with a cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet that is installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances.                               <strong>WARNING:</strong> Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician or service representative if you are in doubt whether the dishwasher is properly grounded. Do not modify the plug provided with the dishwasher; if it will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.</li>
<li>For a permanently connected dishwasher:The dishwasher must be connected to a grounded metal, permanent wiring system, or an equipment-grounding conductor must be run with the circuit conductors and connected to the equipment-grounding terminal or lead on the dishwasher.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS</strong></p>
<h3>KEY USAGE TIPS</h3>
<p>Filtration system and maintenance Your dishwasher has the latest technology in dishwasher filtration. This filtration system minimizes sound and optimizes water and energy conservation while providing superior cleaning.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-1-Filtration-system-and-maintenance-300x195-1.jpg" /></p>
<p>The filter system consists of two parts, an upper filter assembly and lower filter.</p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> To avoid damage to dishwasher, do not operate your dishwasher without filters properly installed. Be sure lower filter is securely in place and upper filter assembly is locked into place. If upper assembly turns freely, it is not locked into place.</p>
<p>The filters may need to be cleaned when:</p>
<ul>
<li>Visible objects or soils are on upper filter assembly.</li>
<li>Dishes feel gritty to the touch.</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-2-Filtration-system-and-maintenance-300x231-1.jpg" /></p>
<p>See the “Filtration System” section in the full online User Instructions for complete removal and maintenance schedule.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-3-Filtration-system-and-maintenance-300x228-1.jpg" /></p>
<p><strong>Drying – Rinse aid is essential</strong><br />
You must use a drying agent such as a rinse aid for good drying performance. Rinse aid along with the Heat Dry, Extended Heat Dry option will provide best drying and avoid excessive moisture in dishwasher interior.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-4-Drying-E28093-Rinse-aid-is-essential-300x131-1.jpg" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Icon-1.jpg" /><strong> Energy efficiency</strong></p>
<p>Energy efficiency is gained by extending cycle time and reducing the amount of wattage and water used during your dishwasher’s cycle. For exceptional cleaning, cycles are longer due to the soak and pauses.</p>
<p>Efficient dishwashers run longer to save water and energy, just as driving a car slower saves on gas. Your first cycle will run longer to calibrate the optical water sensor.</p>
<p><strong>Premium Top Rack Adjuster</strong><br />
You can raise or lower the top rack to fit tall items in either the top or bottom rack. Adjusters are located on each side of the top rack.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-5-Premium-Top-Rack-Adjuster-300x240-1.jpg" /></p>
<p>To raise the rack:<br />
Press both rack adjuster thumb levers and lift the rack until it is<br />
in the up position and level.</p>
<p>To lower the rack:<br />
Press both rack adjuster thumb levers and slide the rack to its down position and level.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> The top rack must be level.</p>
<p><strong>Touch START/RESUME every time you add a dish</strong></p>
<p>IMPORTANT: If anyone opens the door (such as, for adding a dish, even during the Delay option), Start/Resume must be touched each time to resume the cycle.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-6-Premium-Top-Rack-Adjuster.jpg" /></p>
<p>Push the door firmly closed within 4 seconds of touching Start/Resume. If the door is not closed within 4 seconds, the Start keypad light will flash, an audible tone will be heard, and the cycle will not start.</p>
<h3>OPERATING YOUR DISHWASHER</h3>
<ol>
<li><strong>Prepare and load the dishwasher</strong></li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-7-Prepare-and-load-the-dishwasher-300x300-1.jpg" /></p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> Remove leftover food, bones, toothpicks, and other hard items from dishes. Remove labels from containers before washing.</p>
<ul>
<li>Make sure when the dishwasher door is closed no items are blocking detergent dispenser.</li>
<li>Items should be loaded with soiled surfaces facing down and inward to the spray as shown in the graphics above. This will improve cleaning and drying results. Angle dirtiest dish surface downward, allowing space for water to flow up through rack and between dishes.</li>
<li>Avoid overlapping items, like bowls or plates that may trap food.</li>
<li>Place plastics, small plates, and glasses in upper rack.</li>
<li>Wash only items marked “dishwasher safe.”</li>
<li>To avoid thumping/clattering noises during operation, load dishes so they do not touch one another. Make sure lightweight load items are secured in racks.</li>
<li>Use the slots in the covers and suggested loading patterns to keep your silverware separated for optimum wash.</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-8-Prepare-and-load-the-dishwasher-300x110-1.jpg" /></p>
<ul>
<li>If your silverware does not fit into the designated slots, lift and slide covers off to remove them and mix silverware types to keep them separated.</li>
<li>When loading silverware, always place sharp items pointing down and avoid “nesting”<br />
as shown.</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-9-Prepare-and-load-the-dishwasher-241x300-1.jpg" /></p>
<p><strong>2. Check that all arms spin freely Items in the rack can block the spray arms.</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-10-Check-that-all-arms-spin-freely-290x300-1.jpg" /></p>
<p><strong>3. Add detergent</strong><br />
Premeasured Detergents</p>
<p>High-quality premeasured tablets and packs are recommended for improved performance.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-11-Add-detergent-296x300-1.jpg" /></p>
<p>Quality tablets and packs have been proven better than powder, liquid, or gel detergents at reducing filming on dishes. Using tablets and packs over time will start to reduce or eliminate white film. They are suitable for all water hardness and soil levels. Also, by using a rinse aid, you can minimize repeat buildup of white film (not all packs and tablets contain rinse aid). Always place premeasured detergents in main compartment and close lid.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Follow instructions on the package when using other dishwasher detergent types. See the complete User Instructions for more details about powders, liquids, and gels.</p>
<ul>
<li>Use automatic dishwasher detergent only. Add detergent just before starting a cycle.</li>
<li>Fresh automatic dishwasher detergent results in better cleaning. Store tightly closed detergent container in a cool, dry place.</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-12-Add-detergent-300x195-1.jpg" /></p>
<p><strong>4. Add rinse aid</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Your dishwasher is designed to use rinse aid for good drying performance. Without rinse aid, your dishes and dishwasher interior will have excessive moisture. The heating and drying options will not perform as well without rinse aid.</li>
<li>Rinse aid keeps water from forming droplets that can dry as spots or streaks. It also improves drying by allowing water to drain off of dishes after final rinse. Rinse aid does not adhere to dishware, and when used, it is dispensed during each cycle.</li>
<li>To add rinse aid, open the dispenser lid by gently pushing in the center of the lid with your thumb while lifting up on the edge.</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-13-Add-rinse-aid-300x218-1.jpg" /></p>
<ul>
<li>Pour rinse aid into the opening until the indicator level shows that it is full.</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-14-Add-rinse-aid-300x110-1.jpg" /></p>
<ul>
<li>Close dispenser by pushing down gently on the lid.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> For most water conditions, the factory setting will give good results.</li>
</ul>
<p>If you are experiencing poor drying performance, try a higher setting. Turn the arrow adjuster to the next higher number to increase the amount of rinse aid.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-15-Add-rinse-aid-227x300-1.jpg" /></p>
<p><strong>5. Select a cycle</strong><br />
Efficient dishwashers run longer to save water and energy, just as driving a car slower saves on gas. Typical cycle time is approximately 21/2 hours but can take less or more time to complete depending on selections. Push door firmly closed and touch START to repeat the same cycle and options as in the previous wash cycle, or select another cycle appropriate for your load. See the Cycle Guide.</p>
<p><strong>6. Select options</strong><br />
You can customize your cycles by selecting the options desired. See the Cycle Guide. If you change your mind, touch the option keypad again to turn off the option. Not all options are available for every cycle. If an invalid option is selected for a given cycle, the lights will flash. Adding options may increase the cycle time.</p>
<p><strong>7. Start or resume a cycle</strong><br />
NOTE: If needed, run hot water at the sink nearest your dishwasher until water is hot. Turn off water. With door firmly closed, touch START. IMPORTANT: If the door is opened for more than a few seconds after the cycle is started (even during the Delay time), the Start keypad must be touched again after the door is closed. If Start keypad is not touched, the Start keypad light with flash, and audible tone will be heard, and cycle will not resume.</p>
<p><strong>8. Follow the progress of your dishwasher</strong><br />
The display will indicate cycle progress such as Washing, Drying, Clean, and Sanitized. The cycle has completed when the Clean light is lit. Refer to the Control chart in the Cycle Guide section for operation of the Sanitized indicator.</p>
<h3>CYCLE GUIDE</h3>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> The sensor in your dishwasher monitors the soil level. Cycle time and/or water usage can vary as the sensor adjusts the cycle for the best wash performance. If the incoming water is less than the recommended temperature or food soils are heavy, the cycle will automatically compensate by adding time, heat, and water as needed.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-16-CYCLE-GUIDE-300x115-1.jpg" />*The government energy certifications are not based on this cycle. See the Normal cycle description for the government energy certification cycle. Using the ProWash™ cycle may increase your energy usage.</p>
<p>**No other washing and drying temperature options were selected, and the dishwasher was not subjected to truncated testing. Rinse aid was not used, and there was no detergent used in the prewash.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-17-CYCLE-GUIDE-300x156-1.jpg" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-18-CYCLE-GUIDE-300x101-1.jpg" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-19-CYCLE-GUIDE-300x113-1.jpg" /></p>
<h3>DISHWASHER CARE</h3>
<p><strong>Cleaning the Exterior</strong><br />
Clean the exterior of the dishwasher with only a soft, damp cloth, and mild detergent. If your dishwasher has a stainless steel exterior, it may have a coating that is resistant to fingerprints. Avoid using abrasive cleaning products on the exterior of the dishwasher.</p>
<p><strong>Cleaning and Maintaining the Interior</strong><br />
Many detergents may leave white spots or a white residue on dishware and on the interior of the dishwasher. Over time this residue can become unsightly and could affect dishwasher performance. Use of a dishwasher cleaning product, such as affresh® Dishwasher Cleaner, can help to remove the residue. Monthly use of affresh® Dishwasher Cleaner is recommended to help maintain the dishwasher. Follow package directions.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> KitchenAid recommends the use of high-quality, premeasured detergent tablets or packs and the use of rinse aid for dishwasher cleaning and daily care.</p>
<p>If you have a drain air gap, check and clean it if the dishwasher isn’t draining well.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-20-DISHWASHER-CARE-300x191-1.jpg" /></p>
<p>To Reduce Risk of Property Damage During Vacation or Extended Time Without Use:</p>
<ul>
<li>When you will not be using the dishwasher during the summer months, turn off the water and power supply to the dishwasher.</li>
<li>Make sure the water supply lines are protected against freezing conditions. Ice formations in the supply lines can increase water pressure and cause damage to your dishwasher or home. Damage from freezing is not covered by the warranty.</li>
<li>When storing your dishwasher in the winter, avoid water damage by having your dishwasher winterized by authorized service personnel.</li>
</ul>
<h3>TROUBLESHOOTING</h3>
<p>First try the solutions suggested here. If you need further assistance or more recommendations that may help you to avoid a service call, refer to the warranty page in this manual or visit <a href="https://producthelp.kitchenaid.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">producthelp.kitchenaid.com</a>. In Canada, visit <a href="https://www.kitchenaid.ca/en_ca.html" target="_blank" rel="noopener">kitchenaid.ca</a>. For internet connectivity questions, in the U.S.A. or Canada, call 1-877-559-2603.</p>
<p>Contact us by mail with any questions or concerns at the address below:</p>
<p><strong>In the U.S.A.:</strong><br />
<strong>KitchenAid Brand Home Appliances</strong><br />
Customer eXperience Center<br />
553 Benson Road<br />
Benton Harbor, MI 49022-2692</p>
<p><strong>In Canada:</strong><br />
<strong>KitchenAid Brand Home Appliances</strong><br />
Customer eXperience Centre<br />
200 – 6750 Century Ave.<br />
Mississauga, Ontario L5N 0B7</p>
<p>Please include a daytime phone number in your correspondence.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-21-TROUBLESHOOTING-300x155-1.jpg" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-22-TROUBLESHOOTING-1-300x99-1.jpg" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-23-DISHWASHER-LIMITED-WARRANTY-300x98-1.jpg" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/FIG-24-DISHWASHER-LIMITED-WARRANTY-300x97-1.jpg" /></p>
<p><strong>IF YOU NEED SERVICE:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Before contacting us to arrange service, please determine whether your product requires repair. Some questions can be addressed without service. Please take a few minutes to review the Troubleshooting section of the Use and Care Guide or visit <a href="https://producthelp.kitchenaid.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">producthelp.kitchenaid.com</a>.</li>
<li>All warranty service is provided exclusively by our authorized KitchenAid Service Providers. In the U.S. and Canada, direct all requests for warranty service to:</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>KitchenAid Customer eXperience Center </strong>                                                                                 In the U.S.A., call 1-800-422-1230. In Canada, call 1-800-807-6777.                                               If outside the 50 United States or Canada, contact your authorized KitchenAid dealer to determine whether another warranty applies.</p>
<h3>LIFETIME LIMITED WARRANTY</h3>
<p><strong>WHAT IS COVERED</strong></p>
<p>FIRST YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY (PARTS AND LABOR)                                                For one year from the date of purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated, and maintained according to instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid brand of Whirlpool Corporation or Whirlpool Canada LP (hereafter “KitchenAid”) will pay for factory specified replacement parts and repair labor to correct defects in materials or workmanship that existed when this major appliance was purchased or, at its sole discretion, replace the product. In the event of product replacement, your appliance will be warranted for the remaining term of the original unit’s warranty period.</p>
<p>SECOND THROUGH FIFTH YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY (CERTAIN COMPONENT PARTS ONLY – LABOR NOT INCLUDED)In the second through fifth years from the date of original purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated, and maintained according to instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid will pay for factory specified replacement parts for the following components to correct non-cosmetic defects in materials or workmanship in these parts that prevent function of this major appliance and that existed when this major appliance was purchased. This is a limited five year warranty on the below named parts only and does not include repair labor.</p>
<ul>
<li>Nylon dish racks</li>
<li>Electronic controls</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>LIFETIME LIMITED WARRANTY (STAINLESS STEEL TUB  AND INNER DOOR LINER ONLY)</strong></p>
<p>For the lifetime of the product from the date of original purchase, when this major appliance is installed, operated, and maintained according to instructions attached to or furnished with the product, KitchenAid will pay for factory specified replacement parts and repair labor for the following components to correct non-cosmetic defects in materials or workmanship that existed when this major appliance was purchased:</p>
<ul>
<li>Stainless steel tub</li>
<li>Inner door liner</li>
</ul>
<p>YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE PRODUCT REPAIR AS PROVIDED HEREIN. Service must be provided by a KitchenAid designated service company. This limited warranty is valid only in the United States or Canada and applies only when the major appliance is used in the country in which it was purchased. This limited warranty is effective from the date of original consumer purchase. Proof of original purchase date is required to obtain service under this limited warranty.</p>
<p><strong>WHAT IS NOT COVERED</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Commercial, non-residential, multiple-family use, or use inconsistent with published user, operator, or installation instructions.</li>
<li>In-home instruction on how to use your product.</li>
<li>Service to correct improper product maintenance or installation, installation not in accordance with electrical or plumbing codes, or correction of household electrical or plumbing (e.g., house wiring, fuses, or water inlet hoses).</li>
<li>Consumable parts (e.g., light bulbs, batteries, air or water filters, preservation solutions).</li>
<li>Defects or damage caused by the use of non-genuine KitchenAid parts or accessories.</li>
<li>Damage from accident, misuse, abuse, fire, floods, acts of God, or use with products not approved by KItchenAid.</li>
<li>Repairs to parts or systems to correct product damage or defects caused by unauthorized service, alteration, or modification of the appliance.</li>
<li>Cosmetic damage including scratches, dents, chips, and other damage to the appliance finishes, unless such damage results from defects in materials and workmanship and is reported to KitchenAid within 30 days.</li>
<li>Discoloration, rust, or oxidation of surfaces resulting from caustic or corrosive environments including, but not limited to, high salt concentrations, high moisture or humidity, or exposure to chemicals.</li>
<li>Pickup or delivery. This product is intended for in-home repair.</li>
<li>Travel or transportation expenses for service in remote locations where an authorized KitchenAid servicer is not available.</li>
<li>Removal or reinstallation of inaccessible appliances or built-in fixtures (e.g., trim, decorative panels, flooring, cabinetry, islands, countertops, drywall) that interfere with servicing, removal, or replacement of the product.</li>
<li>Service or parts for appliances with original model/serial numbers removed, altered, or not easily determined.</li>
</ol>
<p>The cost of repair or replacement under these excluded circumstances shall be borne by the customer.</p>
<p><strong>DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES</strong><br />
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO FIVE YEARS OR THE SHORTEST PERIOD ALLOWED BY LAW. Some states and provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of implied warranties of merchantability or fitness, so this limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province.</p>
<p><strong>DISCLAIMER OF REPRESENTATIONS OUTSIDE OF WARRANTY</strong><br />
KitchenAid makes no representations about the quality, durability, or need for service or repair of this major appliance other than the representations contained in this warranty. If you want a longer or more comprehensive warranty than the limited warranty that comes with this major appliance, you should ask KitchenAid or your retailer about buying an extended warranty.</p>
<p><strong>LIMITATION OF REMEDIES: EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES</strong><br />
YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE PRODUCT REPAIR AS PROVIDED HEREIN. KITCHENAID SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states and provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province.</p>
<h3><b>FAQ’S</b></h3>
<p><strong class="schema-faq-question">Is Bosch the same as KitchenAid?</strong></p>
<p class="schema-faq-answer">KitchenAid and Bosch dishwashers are both excellent and offer good value for the money. But aside from similarities in the wash cycle options and their stainless steel interiors, Bosch dishwashers edge out KitchenAid in design, functionality, cleaning performance, reliability, and even price.</p>
<p><strong class="schema-faq-question">Is there a reset on a KitchenAid dishwasher?</strong></p>
<p class="schema-faq-answer">To reset the dishwasher control panel, it needs to be disconnected from the power source for one minute. If your dishwasher is plugged into an outlet, simply unplug the unit for one minute and then plug the unit back in.</p>
<p><strong class="schema-faq-question">How do I run a diagnostic on my KitchenAid dishwasher?</strong></p>
<p class="schema-faq-answer">To invoke a Diagnostics Cycle, press the “Heated Dry” key followed by the “Normal” key then again the “Heated Dry” key and finally “Normal” key, once more. Ensure your machine is in standby mode while doing it (and press the keys rapidly).</p>
<p><strong class="schema-faq-question">Where is the reset button on a KitchenAid dishwasher?</strong></p>
<p class="schema-faq-answer">You can reset it by pressing two buttons on the front of the dishwasher at least five times each for a grand total of ten presses. The dishwasher door must be fully closed while the buttons are both pressed.</p>
<p><strong class="schema-faq-question">Why won’t my KitchenAid dishwasher clean the dishes?</strong></p>
<p class="schema-faq-answer">Loading issues are one of the most common reasons a KitchenAid dishwasher leaves dishes dirty. Overcrowding the racks restricts access to water and detergent so dishes don’t get clean. Allowing items to block the spray arms or detergent dispenser can further limit water and detergent access.</p>
<p><strong class="schema-faq-question">Why is the Clean light blinking on my KitchenAid dishwasher?</strong></p>
<p class="schema-faq-answer">It is normal for the Clean light to stay on after the cycle is complete. The Clean light is an indication that the dishwasher has been run and the dishes inside it are clean. Once the door is opened after the cycle is complete, the light will shut off.</p>
<p><strong class="schema-faq-question">Do all KitchenAid dishwashers have filters?</strong></p>
<p class="schema-faq-answer">Most all automatic dishwashers KitchenAid included come with a filter system inside the dishwasher to catch any food debris before it has a chance to clog your drains. The filter is in the bottom center of the dishwasher beneath the bottom rack and requires periodic cleaning to ensure free flow of the drain.</p>
<p><strong class="schema-faq-question">How do I clean the filter in my KitchenAid dishwasher?</strong></p>
<p class="schema-faq-answer">Under the locating tabs in the bottom of the dishwasher. Insert. The upper filter assembly into the circular opening in the lower filter slowly rotate the upper filter assembly clockwise.</p>
<p><strong class="schema-faq-question">Where is the dishwasher filter?</strong></p>
<p class="schema-faq-answer">The dishwasher filter is at the bottom of your dishwasher, under the bottom rack. To find it, pull out the bottom dish rack, then look for the filter it’s usually either in one of the back corners of the dishwasher tub or around the base of the bottom spray arm.</p>
<p><strong class="schema-faq-question">Why is my dishwasher not draining?</strong></p>
<p class="schema-faq-answer">It’s likely the result of a full garbage disposal that won’t allow the drain water to enter from the machine, so it backs up in the bottom of the dishwasher. Barring that, the problem is probably a kink in the drain hose, or a clog in the hose, the drain, or the air gap.</p>
<p><strong class="schema-faq-question">What is the best setting for dishwasher?</strong></p>
<p class="schema-faq-answer">A Normal cycle doesn’t use extra water, longer cleaning times, or hotter temperatures, making it ideal for dishes and glassware without excessive soiling. Overall, this is the best dishwasher cycle to use for dishes that have an average amount of daily dirt and grime</p>
<p><strong class="schema-faq-question">Is it OK to use Quick wash on dishwasher?</strong></p>
<p class="schema-faq-answer">Uses your dishwasher’s full power to get lightly soiled dishes clean in about half the time. Depending on your dishwasher, a Quick Wash cycle can take anywhere from 20 minutes, to about an hour.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
	</channel>
</rss>

<!--
Performance optimized by W3 Total Cache. Learn more: https://www.boldgrid.com/w3-total-cache/

Page Caching using Disk: Enhanced 

Served from: usemanuals.com @ 2026-08-27 12:21:20 by W3 Total Cache
-->